Noah wants to register the Scorpion Lion King's core in the auction. As soon as he takes it out of his pocket, everyone's eyes are on it. As soon as he sees it, he tells him that this core belongs to a Tolsi lion from ancient times and that he hasn't seen one like it in three years and that its price can reach 3000. Wu Shang tells him that he has never seen such an amount in his life, but Wu Shan tells him that this is a very small amount. He then turns to Hoy and tells him that this is just the opening price for the auction. An attendant comes and calls out to Mr. Hoy, telling him that it's time to sell the Patriarch's Cycle Technique. As soon as Cheng hears this, he thinks about buying it and says that it might give him good ideas for self-improvement. The auction for the Cycle Technique begins, and Shuji starts the bidding at 200,000 crystals. This price is three times the appropriate price, and everyone thinks that no one will be able to compete with Shuji for the technique. Mr. Hoy asks who will bid higher, and Cheng steps forward and says 210,000 crystals, causing the entire hall to explode in astonishment that a madman was able to compete with Choji for the purchase. His mother went to him and told him, "You madman, if you win the auction and don't pay, you'll be punished." He replied, "As long as I said it, I can do it." Shuji, with all coolness and confidence, says 22,000. Cheng's maid is sent to tell him to be quiet, so Cheng says 24,000. His mother then hugs him and tells him, "Be quiet, father. Why are you doing this? My young master told you to be quiet." He asks her why he would do that. She replies, "Because my young master said so, and because his name is Feng, he is from Choji." He then thinks to himself, "Indeed, this world is very small. Finally, we meet, third young master Choji." He remembered his servants when they told him that the third young master of the Choji family was the one who incited them to kill him. And the second man who was going to kill him in the forest, when he told him that the one who incited him was the third young master of the Choji family. Then Cheng told Chu to go and tell her master to hit his head against the wall. As soon as she said that, her face changed, and she told him that everyone who insulted the young master died, and you will join them. Her hair began to turn into snakes, and he continued as if he didn't see her, saying 24,100. So Chu went and told her master that he had insulted him. He looked at her and said, "He is an insignificant person from the King Yun clan named Cheng, and he says he will give up the auction." She asks him, "Are you afraid of him, so you're leaving the auction to him?" He replies, "Let him take the book, and when I kill him, I'll take the book from his corpse." We then go to Mr. Hoy, who is asking who will bid higher. Qouna, Qadui, Qatri, follow. Cheng goes to the hidden hall to receive the technique. He gets up and follows the third young master, calling out to him and saying, "You hit Suji's cousin and insulted my servant and hit him, and now you're trying to steal my technique. Don't you know your place in front of me, my son? You don't know whose son you are in this country and who the Choji family is." Cheng replied, "So who are you, for example, that I should be afraid of you? And for a small dispute between me and your cousin, you send servants and others to kill me once, twice, and three times. And you are the one complaining. And even though you are from a rich family with millions of crystals, you retreated in front of me at the auction." The third young master, out of rage, bit his tongue and swallowed it, and then said, "My cousin wronged me, and this is his punishment. Your servant insulted me, so I disciplined him and sent two after me to kill me, so I killed them and paid more than you for the technique, so I took it." People said, "People like you are indeed eye-catching, but they die quickly." He replied, "And people like you are full of themselves. Do you think this is the first time someone has threatened me with death? If you want to kill me, come and show yourself. I will not back down and I am not afraid of your family." He then said that he had memorized every word in the Patriarch's Cycle Technique book and burned it. The third young master replied that he had promised the Tian family that he would not cause trouble and took Chu, who was unhappy with what was happening, and left. After that, everyone in the hall started calling out and saying, "Cheng, the leader! Cheng, the leader!" They told him that he was amazing and that they had never seen the third young master so agitated and angry. Wu Shan said, "Cheng, you shouldn't have provoked him like that and made him angry with you." He replied, "If I had stayed silent and let him step on my head, would he have forgiven me?" He said, "No, he would have tried to kill you anyway and taken the technique from you." He said, "Since it's like this, he's dead, and I'm dead, what do I have to fear?" After that, they go to the hall for the last two auctions. The first auction is for Sky Essence Beads, where each bead makes a weapon advance a full level. There are 50 beads, and the auction will start at 20,000. These beads are the basis for making weapons at Ling, Xian, and Cheng levels. Cheng says that the material in the beads is the essence that enters his mind after refining treasures and weapons. The auction for the Sky Essence begins with Old Ling and Old Luang, who are from the seven noble families and are both very famous for weapon making. Cheng sees that the price of the Sky Essence will rise due to the high competition from the two old men. Cheng explains to Wu how to extract the fire essence from weapons and tells him that the more fire essence in the weapons, the higher their level. After a fierce competition for the Sky Essence between the two old men, the auction is awarded to Old Ling for 1,200,000 crystals. However, Cheng's mind goes elsewhere after seeing the importance of the Sky Essence. He tells himself that he can buy 10 Xuan-level weapons for 1000 crystals, refine them, and get 50 Sky Essence beads, which he can then sell for 1000 crystals. At the same time, the 50 Sky Essence beads can illuminate 10 dragon scales. In this way, Cheng knows how he will become rich and accumulate millions of points to free his sister from imprisonment. Then it's the turn of the Scorpion Lion King's core in the auction, and the auction opens for it at 30,000 crystals. One person says 400,000, and another says 500,000. However, Old Huang brings it to an end and raises the price to 700,000 crystals at once, so the auction is awarded to him. Although Cheng thought it would fetch more, the important thing for him is the information he learned about the Sky Essence. After the auction, Wu Ji, the eldest brother of Wu Shan, comes and tells Cheng that he has heard a lot about him, his courage, and his strength. Since he is Wu Shan's friend, he will not take a commission from him in the auction. When Cheng refuses, Wu Shan asks him, "Are we not friends, or are you not loyal?" He finally accepts the compliment. After deducting the cost of the Cycle Technique that Cheng took, the auction leaves 40,000 crystals, which are deposited in the Tian family bank in Cheng's name, and he receives a Visa card with which he can buy from anywhere. After that, he takes the technique and asks for their permission. As he leaves, he is invited to their weapon exhibition and asks the seller, "How many high-level Xuan weapons do you have?" He replies, "130 pieces." He says he wants to buy them all, but the seller thinks he's joking. He tells him, "Do you know that these are worth up to 200,000 crystals?" The exhibition owner is surprised. He goes to the owner of the shop, who also thinks he's joking. He shows him the golden Visa he has. As soon as the merchant sees the golden Visa, he tells him that he can buy the highest-level Ling weapon, but Cheng says, "No, I want all the Xuan weapons you have." The man, alas, cannot believe it and is overwhelmed with joy. Cheng asks him for a discount for the quantity and takes the weapons and returns to the clan. After refining the weapons, he is able to extract 1000 drops of Sky Essence. He will use 500 of them to illuminate 10 dragon scales and will keep the other 500 to sell later at auction. Then he asks himself, "What will the dragon's power be like after illuminating 10 scales?" He opens the Patriarch's Cycle Technique book and feels that it is not much different from the Cycle Technique books he has read, but he feels that this book hides a great secret. He finds two pages stuck together, and when he opens them, he finds a map of a location. He says that perhaps the Patriarch hid a treasure in this place, but the place is far away, so he will focus on his training for now, and when he gets the chance, he will go. The next day, Teacher Su gathers the disciples. Wu tells Cheng that he heard there are new missions, but to go, they must pass the tests first. Cheng replies, "If the missions require tests, then there must be something special about them." Teacher Su is giving tests to the disciples before the new missions, and this time the tests are terrifying: killing the Sky Forest Ghouls. The students are afraid and see it as suicide. She tells them that the ghouls are a powerful race that eats human flesh and are very intelligent creatures with the ability to play with human minds. They appear randomly, and no one knows where they are. She tells them that she has spread the ghouls in the forest to see who can enter the forest and come out alive. Everyone is afraid and terrified, except for Cheng, whose heart beats only from the ghouls' aura. She tells them that there is a ghoul inside this tent, and the requirement is to overcome the ghoul's aura. She has drawn circles around the ghoul, and the test is that the five closest disciples to the ghoul will participate with her. As soon as they approach the ghoul and see each other, the ghoul looks at them. The first to approach is the outer disciple Hao Shiqi, who reaches the eighth circle. Some of his colleagues see him as the best outer disciple in the peak, while others see Cheng as the best. But the deciding factor is Cheng himself. Will he advance further? Let's see now. The princess tells them that the ghoul cannot touch them and that the purpose of the test is courage, not strength. Cheng advances calmly with a smile, and everyone says, "Where is he going?" The ghoul roars at Cheng, who stops at the seventh circle, mocking him because he is Cheng, and he must get rid of him. He rushes forward to reach the level of forgetting, and advances to the tenth circle. Teacher Su tells him that his test is over and he must return and wait for the result. Suddenly, the ghoul roars in Cheng's face, and the ghoul is defeated with the first blow. The disciples freeze in place in shock. The teacher tells him, "Why did you kill him when you were only supposed to reach him?" He replies that he got angry and couldn't control himself when the ghoul roared in his face. She says, "Because of you, we won't continue the test because you killed the ghoul we had." The test ends, and the disciples gather around the hero who killed the ghoul without any effort. The next day, Zhong from the Shuji family meets Cheng and tells him that he heard he insulted his cousin Feng more than once. Cheng replies, "He's a coward. He started the mistake, and in the end, he ran away from me." Zhong, who is used to everyone bowing to him, says, "How dare you speak to me like that?" He replies, "I'm telling the truth, and the truth hurts, doesn't it?" Zhong then says, "If I see you in the Sky Forest, I will kill you." He replies, "I wish you would send someone to kill me, and have them come at me face to face, not from behind like every time with your ridiculous tricks and schemes." They get on the flying house, and the Sky Forest mission begins. When they reach the Sky Forest, one of the guards says to Cheng, "We are responsible for protecting you, and your provoking Shuji like this makes things a little difficult for us." The second guard says, "Don't change or get arrogant because you are the best outer disciple, because no matter how good you are, you are nothing compared to a single inner disciple. And if we see Zhong attacking, we won't be able to defend you." So Cheng says, "And who told you I want you to defend me?" The squad leader, Lin Jing, asks the disciples to prepare to enter the forest. Cheng feels something in the air that startles him a little and says, "What's going on?" Commander Lin tells him, "Be quiet, my son. It's just the wind moving the branches of the trees." Suddenly, a disciple is surprised and is saved. After five hours, night is approaching, and Commander Lin asks the disciples to rest for a while. The inner disciples discover that Chu Heng is missing. The commander appears worried, but one of the disciples tells him that Chu knows a ghoul and went after it to kill it. Commander Lin tells them that Chu is a very strong disciple and there is nothing to fear, but the ghouls themselves are in the middle of the forest. He tells them that four years ago, he was still an outer disciple and went on a mission like this. When they saw a ghoul, the disciples surrounded him, and he killed the ghoul. He tells them that he was a beginner then, and any ghoul, no matter how strong, cannot withstand three of his blows. Of course, Cheng doesn't miss the sarcasm and mockery of the unbelievable words. Suddenly, Chu Heng appears and says to the commander, "Okay, show me yourself." The commander realizes that this is a ghoul disguised as Chu, because if a ghoul eats a human and drinks their blood, it can appear in their image. Indeed, the ghoul begins to appear and emerges from Chu's body, saying, "Finally, after four years of wandering in the forest, I found humans." Suddenly, the ghouls appear, and with a transformation, Cheng takes out the flying knife and begins his ghoul hunting. He says to his companions, "If you are afraid, what are you doing here?" He asks them to attack him because if they just pay, they will all be eaten. However, the ghouls killed three disciples, and Commander Lin grabbed their big ghoul and is hitting him. The ghoul stands with his hands tied and says, "Didn't you say you kill ghouls with three blows? I'm not dead yet." He replies, "Shut up, you are a ghoul of officer rank." He tells himself that this ghoul has the strength of a human at the Sky level and rarely appears to anyone because their aura is strong and clear from a great distance. The ghoul laughs and says, "You're right." Commander Lin continues to hit the ghoul with his sword, but it's as if he's hitting a statue. The ghoul doesn't feel it, nor is he enjoying the blows. Suddenly, Cheng hits the ghoul officer in the neck with the flying knife, but the ghoul notices the knife and dodges it before it can kill him. The ghoul officer looks at Chu and says, "You don't seem easy, human." Cheng replies, "If I'm special, will you let me go?" He says, "No, of course, because your taste will be very special, and this is an opportunity not to be missed." He starts playing with his tongue, and the ghoul officer begins to attack Cheng, who at the same moment activates the 100-scale technique and lunges at the ghoul with all his might. He enters him, and the result is that the ghoul's blow makes Cheng dig into the ground, but it doesn't affect him because since his body upgraded to the Ling level, all normal blows don't affect him, and the warm current returns to his body. Energy begins to gather in Cheng's body, and the ghoul says, "Didn't I tell you you're not easy? You got up after that blow like a demon." The commander is amazed that a newcomer at half a step to the Sky realm can get up from such a blow. Cheng excitedly says to the ghoul, "I liked your blow, but can you repeat it?" The ghoul gets angry, sparks fly from his eyes, sharp horns appear, and he leaps at Cheng, making his eyes disappear from their sockets in shock. But he manages to escape the blow with great speed, which impresses the ghoul and makes him even more angry, baring his fangs. He strikes Cheng's shoulder with his horn, which comes out of his back, and lifts him up, blood pouring from everywhere, as if he were dead. The ghoul grabs his head to eat it, but Cheng activates the Soul Thorn technique and throws the flying knife at the ghoul at the same time. Then he activates the 100-scale Dragon Scale technique, breaks the ghoul's horn, and leaps up with all his might, stabbing the horn into the ghoul's head, killing him. He then grabs the flying knife with rage and cuts it into 100 pieces. The other ghouls, as soon as they see this, flee. The commander gives him a pill to heal his wound quickly. They collect the many cores that came out of the ghoul's remains, and they give the large core to Cheng, of course. He hesitates a little before starting again. Suddenly, they are surprised by fire, and someone throws poisoned darts at them from the direction of the fire. The commander hides in a tree and says that if even one needle touches him, he will die. Cheng dodges the darts, but nothing happens to him. Commander Lin is surprised and checks on him, but Cheng tells him he only feels a slight tickle in his body. Suddenly, a girl appears and stops them in their tracks, asking, "What peak do you belong to?" They reply, "We are from the Dew Peak." She says she is an inner disciple from the Virgin of the Wasteland Peak and tells them not to move, or she will unleash the Dragon Shock on them. The disciples are surprised that the girls have weapons that can kill a person in the Sky realm so easily. Commander Lin asks her if she is from the Su family, given that she has such a powerful weapon. She tells him not to speak unless she allows him. He shouts at her, "Who do you think you are to attack us with poisoned darts and speak to us like that?" She tells him they are not poisoned darts but are covered with a substance that identifies ghouls. She tells him that when a ghoul eats a human, it appears in their image, but if the dart hits it, its color turns red, and from there she knows it's a ghoul. That's why she shot the darts at them to see if they were humans or ghouls. Then she asks her team to come down from the trees. Ling asks her about the reason for her extreme caution and if she has been attacked before. She tells him that they are girls from the Virgin of the Wasteland Peak and the Black Rock Peak met in the forest and agreed to stay together. Then a ghoul officer appeared, killed one of the Black Rock Peak disciples, and took his form and began to attack them. The commander tells her that the ghoul officer ate one of them and attacked them. If it weren't for Cheng killing the ghoul, they would all have been eaten. But she and her companions don't believe that Cheng killed the ghoul officer. Commander Lin says, "If I hadn't seen it with my own eyes, I wouldn't have believed it either." The injured are taken to the clan to be treated, and guard patrols are organized and exchanged. In the morning, Cheng wakes up happy that he was able to activate the second attack technique of the Heavenly Demon Fist. Suddenly, Commander Lin hears the sound of fighting nearby and tells them to come and see what's happening. When they go, they find Huotian Nian from the fifth level of the Sky realm, belonging to the Lone Sky Peak, fighting with two giant ghoul officers. Chu says that Huotian Nian is a sword master and the strongest in the clan, but Lin says that even so, he won't be able to escape from two ghoul officers. He asks them to help Huotian. Cheng goes to him, and they stand back to back, each fighting a ghoul and protecting each other's backs at the same time. Cheng begins to activate the Wrathful Demon Fist and hits the ghoul in the stomach, causing a serious injury that leaves Huotian astonished that he could do that with just the strength of his body without using any energy. Cheng's fist pierces the ghoul's body and comes out the other side, but the ghoul lunges at Cheng to take revenge. However, Huotian draws his spinning sword and kills the ghoul, saving Cheng. Then Cheng thanks him and recognizes him, and they both begin to attack the second ghoul. Huotian draws his Star Sword and attacks the ghoul, wounding him. Cheng takes advantage of the ghoul's injury and delivers a blow from the Wrathful Demon Fist, eating him from the inside and finishing him off. Then they see a ghoul attacking from behind, and they don't see it. Huotian attacks it with the Dragon Shock, which doesn't affect the ghoul. The ghoul walks towards the girl and says, "Nice blow." He grabs her by the neck, and she screams and calls for their help. Cheng rushes to her and takes out the flying knife, but the ghoul snatches it and flies away. Cheng asks Huotian to protect the other disciples from the remaining ghouls, and he will go after Chu to save her. Huotian succeeds in killing all the ghouls and reaches Zhong. When he doesn't see Cheng with them, he thinks he's dead and says he wished he could have killed him with his own hands. He then turns to Commander Lin and says that if Cheng were alive, neither you nor the ghouls could have killed him. Zhong argues with him, saying, "How can someone from the Dew Peak speak like this to disciples from the Angry Sky Peak?" Huotian replies, "We are the Lone Sky Peak, we are not afraid of a few children from the big families." He tells him, "If you want to live, sit down and be quiet." He then says, "I am defending him because he killed an officer ghoul and saved many disciples from other peaks, but he doesn't need me to defend him because he is capable of dealing with scum like you." But he doesn't believe that there was an officer ghoul and that Cheng killed him. We then go to Cheng, who cuts off the ghoul's hand with his flying knife and threatens the ghoul, saying, "Let her go, and I'll let you live." The ghoul laughs and says, "Look around you first before you talk to me." Cheng looks around and finds himself surrounded by giant ghouls. He starts thinking and tells himself that attacking two ghouls at the same time has pushed him to his limits, but he believes he won't get out of here alive. However, he tells himself that he will not surrender and that he must live to save his sister, Yan. He grabs the flying knife and stares at the ghouls with a smile. The ghoul says, "I see death in your laughing eyes. No matter what you're planning, you're dead." The six ghouls begin to approach him to devour him like a chicken in their midst, but he spins and creates a vortex that pulls the six ghouls away from him, but they quickly return. One of them embeds its horn in his shoulder, coming out of his back, and another in his leg. He stops and thinks about what to do, telling himself that the flying knife doesn't affect their strong bodies and that the Wrathful Demon Fist is slow. If he uses it, he will kill them easily. Then he removes the ghouls' horns from his shoulder and leg, and a lot of blood pours out, tiring him, but his determination remains the same. He says, "Even if they kill me, I'll take them with me to hell." Chu, seeing him in this state, tells him, "Enough, leave me and run for your life." But he gets up and attacks them all, hitting them, but they pierce his body with their horns until he can no longer move. Chu tries to help him and takes out her box to activate the Dragon Shock technique, but the ghoul easily destroys it. She looks at Cheng, crying, and tells him she's sorry she can't help him. Then the ghoul goes to Cheng and tells him he admires his courage, but since he is not of their race, he must be killed. Before he kills him, Chu Fei, the master of the flying sword, appears and comes from behind the ghoul and kills him. Then the horns are removed from Cheng's body, which is full of holes, and his blood is drained. He asks his uncle who this is and how he is still alive after all the injuries to his body. She tells him that he did this to himself to save her, and he tries to heal him, giving him an injection to keep him alive until they take him to the city for further treatment. He tells her that they are currently in the city of Bai Di, and she says she knows it as the white city that protects everyone from hell. He also says that he knows that the ghouls' homeland is nearby, and that a trench in the ground separates them from the ghouls. He tells her that the imperial army should be protecting the city and preventing the ghouls from entering the forest. She tells him that their strength is increasing rapidly and that they have managed to destroy an army watchtower and pass through it into the forest. She also tells him that she heard that four ghoul leaders intend to attack the city. He asks about the other disciples, and she tells him that the army rescued them and transferred them to the southern region. In the city of Bai Di, Huotian sees Cheng and checks on him. Cheng is glad to see him alive, but he hides it and tries to show his courage. Then he meets Choji Yi and tells him, "Didn't you tell me that I would die if I entered the forest and no one saw me there?" Huotian replies, "We found him like a cat in the forest, and when he returned to the city, his courage returned." He tells them that his problem is with Cheng and asks them to leave. They leave him alone, but Chu warns him, saying, "If you go near Cheng, nothing good will happen to you." He replies, "Do you think the Choji family can account for your family, Chu Qian?" In the midst of the argument, a great disaster occurs, and the ghouls begin to attack the city. Huotian tells them that the army is focused on fighting the ghouls and doesn't have time to return them to their clans, and they must return on their own. Suddenly, Choji King Yun, the imperial army advisor, appears and tells them that Cheng will not be allowed to associate with people he doesn't approve of. Cheng replies, "If you're a man, show me how you'll stop me from leaving." Huotian replies, "Are you the imperial army advisor, so you think you can do anything?" He replies, "The ghouls have surrounded the city. If you hand over Cheng, I will send two army divisions to escort you to the clan." But Chu doesn't like the talk and attacks the advisor with the Dragon Shock. He gets angry and tells her that he will take her to his friends in the army to have fun with her before killing her. He tells the others, "Anyone who disobeys my orders will be considered a disguised ghoul, and I will order their execution." Immediately, Cheng begins to attack him, but Cheng stands his ground like a monster, unfazed. This makes the advisor burn with rage because his body was not affected by the blow. He summons the spiritual soldier to kill him, but Cheng destroys him, tearing him into 100 pieces. He tries to attack the advisor, who creates an energy shield around himself to protect him from the attack and tells Cheng, "A weak person like you in the Crystal realm cannot break my defenses." But Cheng hits him with the power of the Demon Fist, destroying his defenses. The advisor is surprised, begins to fear, and retreats, saying, "If you kill me, the soldiers will not leave you, and they will avenge me." He replies, "You are just a pawn in the army, and don't think the entire army will move for you." He says, "You are not worth killing. You are all just puppets who are bought and sold and act arrogant towards people, but none of you can do anything." The advisor pulls out a dagger to kill him, but Cheng is faster, gives him a Soul Thorn, takes the dagger from him, and kills him. He says he doesn't like killing humans, but he killed him because he insulted him and insulted his companions in the heart of the city. General Tuo Xiu appears and tells Cheng to lead the army. He begins to attack him, but Chu makes Cheng lie down on the ground and attacks the general with the Dragon Shock. The general tells Cheng that if he doesn't explain what happened now, the next blow will not miss. Cheng tells him that the advisor tried to kill me, and he wanted me to watch him kill me, or kill him before he killed me. The general says that army personnel abide by the laws, and if he wanted to kill him, there must be a reason. He hands over the dragon to be killed, which is very powerful and has high pressure. Everyone thinks Cheng is surely dead, but the stubborn Cheng exchanges the general's attack with the power of the Horror Demon, which does nothing to the dragon's illusion. But the general gets annoyed, and when Chu sees that the matter is difficult for Cheng, she remembers to use the Thunderstone. But the surprise is that the demon's power penetrates the dragon's illusion, and Cheng becomes the controller of the dragon's illusion. The general is about to turn to stone from what is happening, and Cheng only wants to devour the dragon's power with the demon's power, but he didn't expect to be able to control it. However, to use it, he must be one step into the Sky realm, and he is only half a step. Also, the dragon is bigger than his power. He tells him that the dragon is now his alone and he cannot use its power, but there is no harm in trying. He tries and succeeds, amazing everyone with his power and ability to control it. Chu sees him as a genius and thinks that if his opponent were equal to him, he would have defeated him. But Cheng begins to lose the dragon's power and must get rid of it because he doesn't have enough energy to maintain control over it. He strikes the general with the dragon, but the general unleashes another dragon illusion on him, the dragon that Cheng controls, to cause the biggest surprise. The demon's power penetrates the new dragon, renewing its energy and returning it to Cheng's fist. The advisor curses the day he met the advisor Choji and thought of getting involved in his quarrel. Cheng and Yun appear, and she creates a protective barrier and saves the general, who is also trapped inside the barrier. Everyone talks about the beautiful annihilation maiden who looks beautiful from the outside but has no feelings because she is simply an annihilation maiden. Yun goes to Cheng and asks him his name and asks him how he, being half a step into the Sky realm, could have killed a general. She says he is strange. He replies that she is the strange one, acting like a puppet when she speaks to him. She tells him that she noticed he used a strange power to control the general's dragon and asks how someone like him can control such power for so long. She tells him he is talented for killing the advisor and enduring the general and almost killing him in the city of Bai Di. Therefore, she will let him choose his own way to die. He asks her why she is talking like a puppet and tells her that he did that to them because he was defending himself, and that is justice. She replies that there is no such thing as justice, but there is such a thing as laws, and the city of Bai Di is under the control of the imperial army, and anyone who insults the army must die immediately. She begins to attack him and traps him inside a transparent barrier, like the one she trapped the general in. He tries to break it using the 100-scale technique, but it's no use. He uses the Wrathful Demon Fist, and it's still no use. He takes out the flying knife, and it's still no use. She tells him not to try because her barrier is invincible, and since he didn't choose the way he wants to die, she will choose a way for him. She begins to attack him, but Chu's uncle arrives at the opportune moment and asks her why she wants to kill him. She tells him that he was going to kill General Shishiu, which is an insult to the army and deserves death. He tells her, "You must be mistaken. How can a young man at half a step into the Sky realm kill a general?" She tells him that she saw it with her own eyes. He thinks to himself that Yun has no feelings, but the only way to convince her is through laws. He tells her that she cannot kill him and that the military court should decide. She says he is right, but the army is fighting the ghouls, and the military court is busy. So she takes him with her and tells him that she will take him to the court after the war is over. He asks, "So you're going to take me with you wherever you go?" She replies, "Yes, because he is a criminal and must be imprisoned until his trial." She takes him with her everywhere she goes, even to the swimming pool. He says she has no feelings and sees many bruises on her body. He asks himself what happened to her and says that these bruises could disappear with the pill method, and he understood that she didn't want to heal them. She takes him to a meeting of generals and sees the greatest generals of the empire, all in the Crystal realm. They ask her who he is, and she tells them he is a criminal and she is keeping him with her until the war is over and then she will present him to the military court. The highest-ranking general asks her about his crime, and General Qi Chu stands there and winks at her so she doesn't mention him. She tells him, "Why are you winking at me, Chu?" Uncle Wu is sitting there and says, "She probably doesn't understand the language of winks and hints." Then General Shi tells her that dust got into his eye. When she tells them that he was going to kill Shishiu, they all show signs of shock and surprise. She tells them that if she hadn't saved General Shi from his hands, he would have been dead by now. General Shi is embarrassed and covers his eye with his hand. Yun, the crazy one, is held accountable, and Uncle Wu tells them that Cheng is his niece's friend and from the King Yun clan, and that General Qi attacked him to avenge Advisor Choji, but he was defeated because he was hasty and underestimated his opponent. The commander tells her to hand him over to an officer of the military court, as he cannot attend a meeting of this level. He begins to tell the generals that the ghouls have sent four leaders to the war. Suddenly, the ghoul aura enters them during the meeting, and he tells them to prepare for battle. We go to Yun, who is about to hand Cheng over. Cheng is happy that she will leave him with a military court officer so he can escape, but she disappoints him. He finds himself walking outside with her. When he asks her, "Aren't you going to hand him over to the officer?" she replies, "I'm afraid to leave him with them." So he hits them and runs away, afraid she will take him with her to the battlefield while he is imprisoned like this. Indeed, she takes him with her to the battlefield with the ghouls, and she sets them on fire with one move. Cheng feels sorry for them falling into the hands of the emotionless Yun. The ghoul leaders arrive, and Cheng unleashes his powerful aura from a distance. The supreme commander asks the ghoul leaders to retreat from the attack, and whoever is forced to respond will be met with a response. The leader laughs and says, "We want you to be forced, my brother." The supreme commander warns everyone, and the leader arrives, sucks the life out of a soldier, drinks his blood, and relishes it. He unleashes his immense power. He makes the mistake of his life and tries to eat Yun to solve his problem. She grabs his hand and then cuts it off. Cheng is very impressed by his ferocity and strength in combat. The ghoul is sad about his hand and says to Yun, "How could you do this, girl?" She replies, "Stop whining, ghoul, and you." The ghouls begin to attack the humans fiercely, and Cheng thanks God that he is inside a box in this great battle. The ghouls attack Cheng, who is surprised, but Yun saves him. He is surprised that she cared about his life and saved him. He asks her to let him out, and she says, "No, because if you escape, I will find you even if you go back into your mother's womb." As soon as she lets him out of the box, he falls down, but the ghoul who was attacking him says, "I will never let you escape." He pushes him with his dense aura from above so he doesn't stick to the ground and escape from him. It seems he has evil intentions towards him. The supreme commander warns Yun about the immortal ghoul's flame, and Cheng's body begins to be consumed by the ghoul's flame, even though it is as powerful as a Ling-level weapon. He tries to escape the flame and thinks of jumping to the ground. When he tries to jump, he discovers that the ghoul has created a barrier around the flame, trapping him inside so he cannot escape. He tries to break the barrier, but it's useless. He activates the 100-scale technique, but it's useless. The Wrathful Demon Fist, and it's still useless. His body begins to be consumed, and he sees that his end is near. Suddenly, he notices that his body is absorbing the flame. Then he remembers that he heard that the ghoul leaders have a burning flame, but with low heat. He thinks of taking advantage of the ghouls' flame and tries to absorb as much flame as possible before the ghoul notices and returns to him. Yun notices that the release of the immortal flame on them by the ghouls has significantly increased the ghouls' power. She thinks of a way to weaken the flame, or she will lose. She unleashes her blood barrier on the Black Iron Ghoul Lord, which indeed separates the ghoul from the immortal flame. The ghoul gets angry and tells her that she has entered into a challenge with him and that his ghoul aura is much stronger than her immense power. He begins to attack her. The ghoul's aura begins to overpower Yun's immense energy, and the generals say that Yun will lose to the Black Iron Ghoul Lord. The supreme commander sees that there is no fear for him because she surpasses herself when her opponent is stronger. He rushes towards the flame and wants to know.

What is happening inside, and suddenly he sees Sheng bathing in flames and tells Xu Fei that it seems he is absorbing the immortal flames into his body. So Chu flies up and looks at him up close, asking himself what is happening to this kid inside the flames. This makes the ghoul notice that Sheng is absorbing his flames, which, if completed, will cause a great disaster because the flames are his most important weapon. He rushes towards Cheng and says, "Impossible, a human body can withstand my flames, and even stranger is that he can absorb them too." The ghouls will go crazy from what is happening and say, "If they let Sheng absorb their immortal black iron flames, they will lose the battle." They agreed that they must stop him, and the commander asks the soldiers to use all their strength to protect Sheng and not let the ghouls reach him. The soldiers indeed begin to hinder the ghouls and prevent them from reaching Sheng. This makes one of the ghouls very angry and he strikes the soldiers with the technique of the pillars of chaos, chaining the general until he loses his energy and his movements slow down. But the commander asks them to retreat and escape the chains of the pillars of chaos, telling them to leave this ghoul to him. He activates the super energy shield technique, strikes the ghoul, and destroys the pillars. This makes the ghoul very angry because he will not be able to reach Sheng to absorb the flames. Sheng is hanging and feeling very bad. He sees a line on his body under the Ling mark, and he also notices two marks on his arm. He remembers seeing them before, but he doesn't remember exactly. He suddenly remembers the battle and sees Yun fighting the ghoul. The supreme commander saw that the aura of the ghoul leader was much stronger than Yun's energy, even though Cheng's body had absorbed all the immortal flames. He thinks of helping her, but they are surprised to find him standing in front of them and telling him, "I will not let you take a single step." So Sheng's help comes out and tells him, "If you wanted to deal with me, you would have helped me without anyone asking you." He indeed begins to help him and asks his flying sickle to attack the ghoul leader, who gets angry at him and says, "You absorbed my flames and now you are attacking me." So he stops fighting with his eyes and goes to kill Sheng, who activates the demon terror technique, but it does nothing against the ghoul's divine power, as the ghoul has a strong shield around him. He thinks of a way to attack the ghoul before the ghoul reaches him and finishes him. He tries the soul thorn, which does nothing but makes him very angry. He stands in front of him and tells him that his soul is stronger than that of a normal human, but his attacks cannot affect him. The ghoul's blow makes him fall to the ground and bleed. He sees that he is dead and tells him, "This is the fate of an ant when it tries to bite a stronger being." But Sheng gets up and says, "It was a very strong blow, enough to generate a warm current in my body that boils my energy." The energy begins to gather, but this alone is not enough. There must be a force to rival the ghoul's terrifying aura, especially since Sheng has not even reached the heavenly realm. Then he sees General Xi Xiu through the opening and calls him to send him his dragon. He indeed sends him the phantom dragon and they strike with the dragon's anger to control it. When Uncle Chu sees the general send his dragon to Sheng, he realizes that Sheng has the ability to control the energy of others. He starts calling Cheng to give him offensive energy as well. Cheng has now become their only hope for winning the battle, and he indeed managed to benefit from the phantom dragon and Uncle's weapons and attack the ghouls with all his might. But the ghoul gets angry at Ling, who doesn't know what to do with the ghoul, who even General Ling's power cannot handle. The ghoul begins to attack Sheng. At the same time, Yun had regained her strength and managed to deliver several consecutive blows to the ghoul using the blood barrier, the seal barrier, and the knife barrier. She managed to trap the ghoul inside the barrier, who was very angry that he had fallen into this trap. Then she asks Sheng to direct the dragon's power at the barrier, which completely destroys it and kills the ghoul leader inside. This makes the ghouls retreat and withdraw after their leader died. The soldiers managed to kill a large number of them as they fled. Then what does Yun do? She traps Cheng again inside the transparent barrier to bring him to trial. He tells her, "Are you kidding me? You must be kidding me. I just saved your life." But she calmly and coolly tells him that the battle is over and he must be tried. She tells him that he was saving himself because if the ghouls had won, they would have killed everyone in the city, including him. He asks her when she will release him, and she tells him that the court will decide, not her. The supreme commander asks her why she is imprisoning Sheng. She tells him that she must hand him over to the court. He tells her that he has investigated what happened and knows that Advisor Chu Ji was the one who started the fighting for personal gain, which is against army regulations. She says, "Okay," and releases him. The supreme commander says that the first contributor to today's battle is Sheng, the outer disciple of Dew Peak in the King Yun clan. He tells him that if he were a member of the army, he would have given him a great promotion. The supreme commander decided to reward Sheng in the name of the Imperial Army and give him three treasures. They take him to the Imperial Army museum to choose his treasures. But an old, worn-out sword catches his eye. The commander tells him, "Don't even think about taking those useless old weapons." He tells him that they are keeping this sword for the phoenix crystal embedded in it. So Sheng asks if the crystal can be reused. He says it's difficult to remove the crystal from the sword, and when the sword was intact, it was very dangerous due to its rapid attacks because of the crystal. So Sheng chooses the broken sword and sees a broken spear with a crystal that smells of blood, resistant to barrier techniques. He remembers seeing it in Yun's hair and tells the commander that he will take this one too. He also sees a Nirvana pill. He asks the commander if he can take it. The commander tells him that it raises the trainee's power to levels. If he takes it, and if he is injured, his body will be completely healed as long as he is not dead. He tells him that he has become a popular hero and no one can refuse his request. Then the commander tells him, "After you have taken your three treasures, what do you intend to do?" He told him that he was tired of being confined within Yun's barrier and needed to rest. He asked him to find him a room to sleep in for the night. He entered the room, locked himself in, and began to extract the crystals from the weapons. He used the weapons to illuminate some of the dragon scales, but he doesn't know what to do with the crystals. He tells himself that he doesn't have a good weapon other than the flying sickle, but the crystals are not suitable for him. He remembers the new mark that appeared on his body today and remembers that he saw one like it in the technique book of gravity. He opens the book and remembers that his body is a weapon and that he can use the crystals inside his body. He holds them in his hand and begins to train on the statues in the room. He discovers that his blows have increased in speed due to the hovering phoenix crystal. He holds the barrier resistance crystal and sees General Yun, whom the guards are trying to stop in front of the mirror for examination. She tells him that she is not a ghoul officer to stand in front of the mirror. The guard tells her that these are instructions for everyone and must be followed. So Sheng enters and tells her to listen because these are orders. The guard thanks him, and Yun tells Sheng, "What's it to you?" He tells her, "Be easy with others so that others will be easy with you." So she immediately traps him inside the transparent barrier, which is what he wants. Then he puts the crystal in his hand and punches the barrier, shattering it. She asks him how he did it. He tells her, "If I told you, you would find another way to trap me." He tells her, "Leave me alone and go see what the guard wants from you." She gets even angrier and unleashes the blood prison power on him, telling him, "Show me how you will get out." He tells her, "Why should I get out when I haven't done anything against the law? You are forced to let me out." She tells him that no one has been able to break the blood prison before, and if he does, she will give him a reward. She tells him, "Try it and show me." So Sheng, who had trapped the ghoul inside the blood barrier, activates the demon terror technique and destroys the barrier with one fist. He tells her, "I want the reward." She asks him, "What do you want?" He says, "I want a kiss." The soldiers say that no man can dare to harass General Ion except the hero Cheng. She tells him, "This is a simple and easy thing. Are you sure about your request?" He tells her, "Yes, I'm sure." So she approaches him and kisses him on the cheek. He thought she would be shy and wanted to embarrass her, but he discovered that she had no feminine qualities at all. Then she excused herself and went to her room, feeling her heartbeat increasing. From here, she understood that a kiss is a way of expressing feelings between humans. She felt that Sheng was a little different from others. Sheng was taken back to his clan, so he decided to return alone. He says, "No one has seen Yun since the kiss." He starts making his way up the mountain to return to the clan. As he walks, he sees the mountain that was on the map drawn in the gravity technique book. He tells himself, "Where did I see this place?" even though he hasn't passed through here before. Then he remembers that this is the place on the map of the patriarch of gravity. Suddenly, he finds people attacking him and telling him that this is the forbidden land of the Yu family and if he gets close, they will kill him. He begins to suspect that there is something behind this. Then he remembers that they are one of the seven noble families and decides to engage in combat with them. He dodges and strikes them until he kills both of them and enters the mountain, seeing no one else but them. Then he finds a hidden entrance and enters it, but cautiously, because the seven families treat people with arrogance and aggression. When he enters, he finds a barrier array. He uses the blood smelling stone to break it, but he hesitates. When he sees a giant ferocious tiger, he becomes worried and thinks of leaving the place quickly. He runs quickly and manages to get out of the hidden door, thanking God that he didn't trigger the array, otherwise the monster would have come out and destroyed the entire eastern region. He continues his way, asking himself, "What will I encounter next as I walk?" He encounters an ancient city, and when he tries to enter, he finds a very strong barrier surrounding it, but he breaks the barrier. When he enters, he finds giant people living in the city and realizes that these are the seven noble families. As soon as they see him, they call him a child and try to kill him. He runs and finds himself inside a black fog, and someone is trying to kill him. He asks him his name and begins to attack him. When he dodges his attack, he tells him, "Clearly, you have experience fighting, even though you are only half a step away from the heavenly realm." He tells him that everyone who underestimated him before, he killed them, and it seems that will happen to them too. Then he starts to wander in the fog, and Sheng says to himself, "Where will you come from this time? From the right, or from the left, or from behind, or from the front?" Sheng says, "The seven noble families are all arrogant and trivial." Then he tells him, "You will attack from the front," but Sheng surprises him and attacks him from behind. He is surprised and asks him how he knew his location. He tells him, "I knew from hell." Then the fog begins to dissipate, and people appear. They ask and realize that the one who died is their man, Yang Yu, and Sheng is still alive. The battle spreads. Then a woman comes and screams at him, "Who are you, old man?" He tells her, "Names don't matter. You mind your own business, and I'll mind mine." Then the patriarch of one of the seven families, named Wang, appears and tells him that he will choose himself. Sheng is very angry and tries to get out of his way and leave. The girl tells the patriarch not to follow him, and that he will die anyway if he enters the building. He finds a tiger and ghouls in his path, so he turns back. The patriarch asks them to catch him and tells them, "Don't let him escape from you." He unleashes his energy on the wolves and tells them, "Leave him to me." The wolves attack him, but Sheng unleashes the demon power on a wolf and controls it. The patriarch feels that he has lost control of the wolf, so he orders the rest of the wolves to kill him. He attacks them using the hovering phoenix crystal and controls another wolf with extreme speed that amazes those present. But this angers the patriarch even more, and he insists on killing Sheng. The patriarch's followers ask him to stop the fight so that the statues don't sense them. But the girl sees that they cannot complete their plan because they cannot kill someone half a step away from the heavenly realm. She laughs at them mockingly. The patriarch tells her that this is her last laugh and they all agreed to kill him. But Sheng tells him that the biggest and fastest wolf went towards the statues, and if they get close to him, he will use him to attract the statues towards him and bring them with him. Everyone then stands frozen in place, including the patriarch, and accepts the reality and lets him stay with them. Then they continue on their way and see very strange things. Flying monstrous fish attack people and eat them. They think of going back too, but Sheng unleashes lightning power and passes under the monstrous fish. But suddenly, he finds the fish surrounding him again, so he jumps up quickly and leaps between the fish as if they were a ladder until he passes. The patriarch is very annoyed and wants to kill him, but the heavenly group with him warns him not to move the wolves next to the statues. So he continues with them. Then they encounter an array, and Wang knows it and knows its solution. He says it's like stories and riddles. He asks the patriarch, "Who can deal with this array?" He tells him, "Shut up and sit aside. Don't open your mouth." Sheng thinks and tells himself that he has read a little about arrays and has not reached the level of expertise, but his knowledge of them is not insignificant. The girl attacks the array, and three monsters of strange creatures emerge from it. This greatly impresses the audience, and they cheer for her. But the riddle is complex and becomes more difficult for her. Sheng wants to stop her, but the old man tells him, "Mind your own business." Sheng tells himself that her method will end with four monsters, and she tells him that she thinks there are five monsters. He tells her that there must be only four. Then one of the heavenly group attacks him and tells him, "Shut up, old man, and let her concentrate on her work." The old man tells him, "If you open your mouth again, I will kill you." The girl enters a battle to the death with the array creatures, and everyone watches. Sheng realizes that the greatest danger is coming towards him and wants to do something. He says that they have consumed immense energy and only one person will leave this place. But the old man asks everyone not to listen to Teng's words and begins to attack Teng to kill him, but he doesn't succeed. A sword suddenly comes from his back. Everyone begins to fight each other, because the one who remains in the end is the one who will leave. They see Sheng as the weakest among them, so they leave him for last. Then one of them activates the monstrous eagle technique he has, but Sheng strikes him with the demon's fist and controls him. This provokes him, and they attack him with the golden snake monster, but he defeats it. Two go to the girl and harass her before killing her. She calls out to Sheng and tells him that she will give him her power to protect her from the despicable sons of the seven families. He indeed takes her power, and suddenly one of them kills his brother and tells him, "Since only one person must live, it will be me." After killing his brother, only the wounded old man and the girl remain. Sheng goes to the old man and tells him, "You are already dead because of your wound," and then kills him. Then he tells Sheng, "There is only us left now. I wish you would commit suicide and spare us. Otherwise, I will kill you in a way that will make you suffer." Sheng tells him, "Okay, there is no third option." Sheng unleashes the eagle on him, but he tells him that no matter how strong the eagle is, it is useless because you have not entered the heavenly realm. If you think you can defeat me with this eagle, consider yourself dead. He draws his luminous sword and aims it at Sheng. Sheng tries to use the crystal he has, but he strikes him with a powerful blow with the sword that breaks the wall and reaches Sheng's body. He defends himself for a second, and the other stands looking at him in amazement, saying, "How is his body so strong? This blow alone is enough to split him in half." He begins to attack him again, but Sheng tells himself that he will not retreat. He will either win everything or lose everything. Sheng begins to attack him with the flying sickle, but he is surprised to find the sword in his stomach. But Sheng is faster and grabs the sword between his ribs and tries to pull it out. Then he calls the eagle, and suddenly pulls out the sword. The other tries to escape the eagle, but Sheng unleashes the soul thorn on him. But he is faster and traps himself inside the Li Shim barrier, waiting for the eagle to disappear so he can come out and kill Sheng. Sheng holds the crystal in his hand and says, "Surely this barrier is not as strong as Yun's barrier." But the man tells him that experts in the crystal realm cannot break the barrier, and you are still a child who has not even entered the heavenly realm. Sheng tries, but fails. He notices that the eagle is starting to disappear, so he takes out the pill he got from the Imperial Army museum to take it. As soon as the other sees him, he is stunned that someone like him has the pill. Then he strikes the barrier with a blow that destroys it, and the other is about to cry. Then he kneels at Sheng's feet and tells him that he doesn't want to die and will be his servant. Sheng tells him, "You were the first one to stab the old man in the back," and then finishes him off. Then the array opens, and someone comes out saying, "Finally, someone has reached me after 3000 years." Sheng asks him, "What is required of me now?" The puppet replies, "You will face some challenges. If you can overcome them, you will be the owner of this place." He tells him that if he fails, he will not die, but will be turned into a puppet like him. Sheng asks the puppet, "What is my mother's life?" The puppet tells him that he is not an expert in making puppets, but he can make him live for 1000 years as a puppet and will help him become the leader here. He goes with him, saying to himself, "If this place belongs to an immortal being, how can someone as weak as me pass the tests?" The puppet tells him that the master has accounted for the abilities and will first choose his power limits. Sheng enters the terrifying power test and stands on a rock in a sea of flames. In front of him are 10 warriors like giants. Their leader throws a rope to Sheng, who sees that if he falls, he will die. Sheng begins to pull the rope against the ten men, pulling with all his might, but he cannot overcome them. He summons the dragon scales, and then his power increases, but he discovers that their power increases as his power increases. He hears a voice telling him that power is not everything in a tug-of-war game, and if he had paid attention to the details, he would have noticed something. He tells himself that their power is indeed slightly higher than his, so the amount of his power doesn't matter. When he focuses on them, he sees their leader saying something to them, so they pull the rope all at once. Then he starts to confuse them by calling them too, until he distracts them and overcomes them. The puppet tells him that he is smart because he understood the game from just a simple hint from him. It's time for the soul test. Sheng tells him that the soul is his best advantage. The puppet tells him not to be arrogant and not to underestimate it, because the soul test is not easy. He tells him, "I will give you one last piece of advice: if you are not attentive and aware, your soul will be roasted like a potato. But if you pass this test, you will be the owner of the entire place." He keeps walking until he reaches the heavenly ladder test, and he must reach the end of the ladder to pass the test. He begins to climb the ladder, step by step, but there are no traps so far. After passing 1000 steps, he begins to feel pain and tells himself that the real test has begun. He looks at what is on the next step, and finds nothing strange. He continues to ascend, and suddenly feels an attack, and knows it is a soul attack. He decides to attack it and stands on the ladder towards the attack. Suddenly, the attack turns into flames with a temperature of 2000 degrees Celsius, making him scream in pain. Then he tells himself that there must be a way to pass this test, because no test is insurmountable. Then he remembers the state of self-forgetfulness and forgets himself. Indeed, it worked for him, and he passed the test. But he is worried and tells himself, "It's impossible for the solution to be this easy." Suddenly, he finds three monsters in front of him. He is scared at first, but then regains his composure and tells the monster, "You are just an illusion." Indeed, the monsters disappear, and he hears a voice saying, "Well done. If fear had taken over your heart, the monsters would have eaten your soul." Then he sees a fog in front of him and hears a voice saying, "Keep going, keep going. You still have one last challenge." He goes up, and suddenly the skeleton of his father appears and attacks him. He tries to eat him while he is in pain, and hears his voice saying, "Hold on to your goal." He tells himself, "What is my goal? My goal is that I chose to go in this direction, and I must continue no matter what, no matter the obstacles." He tells his father's skeleton, "Rest in your grave, and I will take care of my sister." He continues his way to the end of the ladder, and the puppet is waiting for him there. He says, "Congratulations, you have become the temporary owner of this place." Sheng asks, "Why temporary?" He tells him that to assert his full control over this place, he must pass many tests, and he is not ready for that now. But he can enter another optional test to obtain the technique of contemplating the insight of tranquility. Sheng asks, "Insight into what?" The puppet replies, "You don't know the contemplation technique? Where are you from?" He says, "This is a technique for gathering and condensing energy. Although you can do it without the technique, the energy you gather yourself without techniques is hundreds of times weaker than what you gather with the technique." Sheng tells him, "Why can't I see what you are pointing to?" He says that this technique has five different insights, the first is the sword, which is the weakest, and the fifth is the universe, which is the strongest technique. He tells him that depending on the level he reaches in the tests, he will see one of the five techniques. Sheng tells him that he will definitely reach the fifth level, the insight of the universe, but the puppet thinks he will reach the third level, and that would be good for him. The challenge begins, and he tells him that he has five challenges. In the first, he will face aquatic monsters that are easy to overcome. He draws his flying sickle and begins the attack, and indeed finishes them all. In the second challenge, he faces swamp ghouls, which are few in number but strong. Cheng also manages to finish them with the flying sickle and passes the second stage of the test. In the third stage, he faces the very strong Hydra snake monster with deadly poison. The puppet warns him that if he is afraid, he will be removed from the stage, but Sheng thinks it's easy and says that poisons don't affect him. The snakes begin to spread poison on Sheng, and it indeed doesn't affect him. He draws the flying sickle to cut them, which turns them into tuna. Then he tells the puppet, "Didn't I tell you that my body is immune to poisons?" The puppet asks Sheng to be satisfied with the third challenge and take the insight of the birds and withdraw. But Sheng insists on continuing. The puppet tells him that this decision is not in his favor and is reckless, but he will do as he wishes. They enter the fourth stage, and in the fourth level, he faces the spirits of strong people who were here before and died, but turned into evil spirits that inhabited the place. Physical attacks are useless against them. They attack Sheng all at once with great speed and manage to penetrate his body because physical attacks were useless against them. He draws the soul thorn, and indeed it works, and he manages to kill a large number of them. The puppet tells him, "You are doing well so far, but please surrender before they cut you up, because the ghosts are increasing in number. You have exhausted your offensive path." He faces them all. The puppet tells him, "You clearly have a dragon hidden in your body." Sheng tells him, "I have nine dragons, and I don't know what will happen if they all come to life together." He tells him, "You seem to have the qualifications to pass the fifth test." When he finds that his soul has been damaged by the attack of the spirits, he helps him recover his health. Then he enters the fifth and final challenge and faces a warrior half a step away from the heavenly realm. He says, "I will defeat him," but the puppet tells him not to underestimate the opponent, because even if he is half a step away from the heavenly realm, his power level will be at the level of the fifth challenge. Sheng notices that the warrior has a part of an immortal soul and has great combat skills. He tells himself that he must not stop defending against him, even for a second. Despite Sheng's feeling of the warrior's strange innate energy, he begins the attack to gain the offensive advantage. But the warrior dodges the flying sickle once, twice, and three times. He resorts to the thorny spiritual technique, an old trick that allows him to control the flying sickle and make it come from behind the warrior and kill him. He is very confident that this method will work against the warrior, but he is surprised. He is only half a step away from the heavenly realm. The warrior begins to attack and manages to hit Cheng with a powerful blow that penetrates his body and sends him flying far away. Then the warrior descends with incredible speed, making Cheng crawl on the ground with his hands. He feels the warrior's power, and if he cannot stop his attacks, he will be finished. Sheng gets up to confront the warrior. The warrior strikes him with waves that send him flying away again. He gets up and tries to get close to him to fight him hand-to-hand. When he gets close, the warrior tries to push Sheng away again, but Sheng slips away. The warrior then wraps his arm like a snake around Sheng's arm and falls to the ground, and begins to wrap his arms and legs around Sheng's body like a snake. But Sheng manages to slip away and grabs him by the head, knocking him to the ground. But he gets up again and begins to attack Sheng, leaving him to get very close to him, and then pierces his head with the soul thorn. The puppet tells him, "You turned out to be cunning in combat. If you had killed the warrior man-to-man, you would have defeated him." He tells him, "Regardless of how he won the battle, he won the test and will receive the map of the final universe." When he looks at the map, he finds himself unable to take his eyes off it. The puppet tells him that this will happen the first time, but after seeing it two or three times, he will get used to it and be able to take his eyes off it. He tells him that this map makes him feel the power of the sun and moon, and this will help him improve his training speed and he can try it now. He begins to try it, and something strange happens to Sheng. When Sheng was trying to use the map of the universe for the first time, he sees the stellar energy that penetrates his soul and purifies it. It was able to coexist with the heavenly demon energy within him, which used to absorb any innate energy it encountered. He begins to feel something strange in his hand and immense energy penetrates his entire body. He discovers that this is the innate energy of the heavenly demon. The puppet congratulates him on entering the heavenly realm. Then Sheng tells the puppet that these tests have taken a lot of his time and that he must return to his clan because he has missions to carry out. The puppet tells him that the immortal palace is a suitable place for him to train well, and why does he want to leave after becoming its king? Sheng tells him that he has many other more important things to do now. The puppet gives him a token and tells him, "Whenever you want to return to the immortal palace, just hold this token in your hand, and you will find yourself here." Sheng thanks the puppet and says, "I will work hard to become the master of this immortal palace." The puppet asks him to strive to be able to return the immortal palace to its former glory. He reaches Dew Peak and finds two soldiers waiting for him at the door. They arrest him, and he doesn't understand anything. He asks what's going on and where they are taking him. They tell him, "You will know now." They take him to Punishment Mountain and enter the judgment hall where Vice President Qin Mu is present. He asks Sheng to kneel as soon as he enters. But Sheng tells him that he only kneels to God, his father, and his mother. He tells him, "Never mind, you have committed many crimes and must be punished, you and your family." Sheng is surprised and asks him what these crimes are. The deputy Qin gets angry and tells him, "A few days ago, you participated in the demon-slaying competitions in the forest, and you conspired with the demons. You cruelly killed disciples of the King Yun clan. This is a grave crime that will bring you and your entire family into great trouble." Sheng doesn't understand anything, but he feels from Qin's words, which don't make sense, that they have plotted something against him. He tells Deputy Qin, "What are you talking about, old man?" He tells him that he has investigated and discovered that his family is innocent, so he will be punished alone. Sheng tells him, "I'm standing here. Come and kill me if you can." Deputy Qin orders the soldiers to bring him the sacred punishment sticks. Sheng is bored in front of this foolish man and tells himself, "Let's try the new heavenly realm techniques with this Nazi." Then the soldiers begin to beat him with the sticks. The deputy tells them to hit him well. Sheng is indifferent to the result and they keep hitting him. The foolish deputy is very annoyed and in pain. He asks the soldiers to hit him harder. But when he focused on Sheng, he found that his voice and words were consistent from the beginning of the beating, and nothing changed. He felt that he was faking his pain and shouted at them, asking them to hit him harder. He was about to explode with rage because Sheng felt no pain. Suddenly, Sheng breaks the handcuffs on his hands and pushes them all, knocking them to the ground. Qin tells him, "What is this? You are resisting the court. You have sentenced yourself to death." Suddenly, Young Master Chu Ji Feng enters and asks Qin what is happening. He tells him that the criminal does not acknowledge the court's judgment and is resisting and wants to escape. When Sheng saw Feng, he knew that the Chu family had plotted this whole thing. He tells Feng, "Let's finish this play you're putting on and talk seriously." Feng tells him, "Today is the last day of your life, and I have an offer for you. Think about it before you die." Sheng tells him, "With your strength, you are no match for me. If you don't get out of my way, I will kill you." Su enters the hall and asks him to kill her. Feng begins to attack Sheng with his fiery swords, and Su also attacks with her knives. Qin activates the seal technique and seals Sheng's innate energy. Sheng looks at the old man Qin, making him stand frozen in shock. Sheng manages to dodge Feng's sword strike and Su's knives. Feng attacks Cheng's body, which is unaffected by his sword strike. He continues to attack with all the swords at once. But as we all know, Sheng begins to unleash the demon power on the swords' power to absorb it and return control to Sheng. Feng is shocked by what he sees and asks Cheng how he learned the heavenly sword technique of the Chu family. But Sheng tells himself, "Let's scare Feng a little." Before attacking Feng, he escapes the hall. He tries to stop him and says, "You're late, master." The old man Qin tells him, "If you kill Feng, you will sentence yourself to death." Su covers Feng so he can escape, but she cannot resist Sheng's power and falls to the ground dead. Sheng goes out after Feng and tells him, "Wait, coward, you who hide behind a woman." Feng tells him, "If you dare to attack me and kill me, you will be the sworn enemy of the Su family, because I am their only hope." Sheng tells him, "I will show you if you dare." The heavenly immortal appears and says, "No one in this world can save you from what will happen to you." Feng turns to the heavenly immortal to ask him to stop him. Sheng tells him, "The heavenly immortal will not save you." He tells him, "If you kill him within the clan, you will be sentenced to death." He tells him, "Kill me then, if you can." Sheng begins to attack the heavenly immortal, but the immortal blocks his attack. Sheng wants to get the final universe, but Princess Su appears at the right time and stops the fight. She asks the heavenly immortal to calm down a little. He tells her that Sheng trespassed into their clan and killed a disciple, and must die. She tells him that since Sheng is a disciple of her peak, she is the one who is angry, so why does he want to kill him without an investigation first? He tells her that he is an immortal from the King Yun clan and has the right to kill any disciple he wants, and she has nothing to do with it. He also tells her that she is just a child who has lost her influence in the imperial palace due to interests and no longer has authority in the palace. Sheng comes and stands between him and the princess, telling him, "Don't think that just because you live longer than us, you have the right to bully a girl. You are a despicable man." Sheng tells the princess Su that this old man is a despicable man and cannot do anything to him. Princess Su is annoyed that she has reached a day where she has to defend a disciple of hers. She tells the old man, "You are indeed despicable, and we are not afraid of you." He tells her, "Do you think that because you are a princess in the imperial palace, I cannot kill whoever I want?" So Sarah comes out and tells him, "If you kill Sheng, I will use the heavenly decree and kill you, even if you go underground." The old man tells her, "He killed someone in the clan and violated its laws. This is not fair." So they try to kill him, and he was defending himself. What was I supposed to do then? Should I let them kill me? So they ask the immortal if he has any evidence of his words. Qin comes and says he is a liar. He tells them that he suspected him of dealing with demons and that Feng happened to be passing by and wanted to help him catch the criminal who was trying to escape, but he attacked him and killed him. Sheng asks him to swear to his words. He tells them, "May I be torn to pieces by a cart if I am lying, my friends." So Su tells the immortal that she wants a sacred trial. The old man with her tells her that it took two years for the last sacred trial, and she wants to repeat it. Sheng asks about the trial of his sister Yan and sets the time for the trial for the night. Night comes, and the sacred trial begins. Sheng asks the judge if he really killed Feng yesterday in the court. He tells him, "Yes, I killed him." The immortal tells him, "Then you are guilty and must die." Sheng asks the judge a question and asks him, "What would you do if someone tried to kill you?" The judge replies, "Regardless of who is attacking me, I will definitely attack them." Sheng tells him, "You know that I killed Feng with his innate energy sword, which he wanted to kill me with." The judge tells him, "And how did you steal an innate energy skill from someone else?" He turns to the immortal and says that this is impossible and that he is lying and must die. Sheng tells Deputy Qin, "Attack me with your innate energy." The judge orders Qin to do as Sheng said. When Qin attacks with the seal, he absorbs his energy and controls him. But the immortal tells him, "We believed you, man, but that doesn't mean you didn't kill someone and must be punished." The judges say the verdict after deliberation. After deliberation, the judge stands up and sentences Sheng to death for the murder of Feng Chu Ji. But the mischievous Sheng bursts into laughter as soon as he hears the verdict. This makes the judge turn into a ghoul who wants to eat him out of anger. He tells him, "How dare you?" Sheng tells him, "Is this how things are done in your King Yun clan?" Suddenly, Su enters and tells them, "I requested the sacred trial, and I had to attend the trial." Su tells the immortal Purple Sky, "What evidence are you relying on for your verdict?" She asks the judge to explain it to her. He stutters to the princess and tells her that he was indeed unfair in his judgment because he did not tell the whole truth. He asks her to forgive him. She tells him that she forgives him, but she doesn't know if Sheng will forgive him too. The immortal says to her, "You are giving this brat too much credit and beating us up for him." She tells him that Sheng is her disciple and that she chose him herself after studying him, and that he has a future that will make him higher than all of you. Sheng thanks the princess who is beating him up and tells him, "I sent a group with you to go."

Demons are slaughtered, and in the end, they returned, and you, sir, did not. And whenever you appear, you bring trouble with you. You are a human being and you give. So he approached her and asked her about her sister's trial, which was two years ago, and about who the judge was who judged her. So she told him that the one in front of him for trial was the Yun family, and that the judges who judged her were the Heavenly Immortal and the Flood Robber Immortal. So he said, on his tongue, and told her, I will never forget these two names. So she said to him, you are weak now and you cannot do anything to them. She told him, let's go to the clan so I can take you to the new training place. And when he went there, he saw the legendary Fishman's identity. He asked the guard to let him in for training. So he told him, I want to see your ID card. And when he held it, he was surprised that he was an external student and had all these points. And he told Sheng Gan, there are people inside, and he asked him to wait for him until they came out and then enter. And he saw Meng coming out exhausted from the pool. And when he knew that Sheng would enter, he waited to see his strength inside the legendary pool. And Sheng entered and jumped into the pool. And the legendary Fishman men attacked him. And Sheng wrote that his speed in the water was very slow. So he tried to use his techniques or energy, but he felt restricted and had no capabilities in the water. So he tried the innate energy attack, but the monsters attacked him. He thought of walking against the current, but this would be a retreat for him. So he decided to go with the current, but he discovered that the legendary Fishman was faster than him, even with the water current. So he descended to a depth of 30 meters underwater, and this monster was behind him, chasing him. So he said to himself, I wish he had taken some advice from Meng about the pool and benefited from his experience to avoid the Fishmen. But he replied to himself, saying that everyone who entered here before him did not have the experience, and he must be like them and rely on himself to overcome difficulties. And when he saw the fish using its tail to move quickly in the water, he thought of transforming his innate energy into a tail. And then he descended to a depth of 50 meters and caught a fish to know how it moved its body. And then he attacked three of the Fishmen. So he activated his tail to become faster, and he attacked and killed all three of them. The guard outside was surprised by his strength, not believing what his eyes saw, and that Sheng was able to kill three Yellow-ranked Fishmen. And Meng said, when did Sheng become this strong? And when he reached a depth of 60 meters underwater, and when he found the Fishmen attacking with axes made of bones, he tried to block them with his hand and succeeded. Then he decided to use his flying knife against them, and indeed he used the flying knife to avoid their flying axes. And when he held the axe, he felt it vibrate a little and was surprised. Then he attacked with the flying knife and succeeded in finishing them all. The guard outside was going crazy from astonishment and said, how did Sheng finish off six Blue-ranked Fishmen so brutally? And the young master Bai Heen arrived and asked the guard if there was anyone in the fish tank. So he told him that there was someone inside, but his time was running out. So he called him quickly to come out. So Meng told him that the person inside was his friend and that his time had not yet expired, and also that he could extend the time if it expired. And he asked the guard Sao to leave Sheng inside and extend his time at his expense. So the young master got angry and attacked Meng. He told him, it is clear that you do not know who you are talking to. And the guard Su entered and told them, let's avoid it with words and understand each other, guys. So Sheng grabbed them and went out to see what was outside. So the guard told him that these two were fighting and asked him to go calm Meng, and he would take care of the young master Bai. And Bai, when he saw Sheng, asked him about his name, but Meng told him, leave him and stay with me. As long as the fight has started, let's continue. But Sheng intervened and told him that his name was Sheng from Dew Peak, but Meng insisted on causing trouble and attacked and asked Sheng to attack with him. And suddenly, snow began to fall on them, and Sheng was controlled. And Bai told him, do you think your weak innate energy can resist my snowfalls? So Sheng used stellar energy and eliminated the snowfalls. So Bai drew his sword. So Sheng grabbed the sword with his hand. So Bai activated the frozen frost service technique and froze Sheng's hand with the sword and laughed and told him, show me what you will do, you worm. So Sheng broke the frost with his other hand, destroying the ice and freeing his hand from the frost. This made Bai go crazy with surprise. So he told him, I will not surrender and I will not let you defeat me. And he brought out the sacred mark of Chi You. And Meng warned Sheng. And Bai's brother told him, you will disgrace the entire family name with your actions for something that is not worth it, and you will disgrace the family name. Sheng controlled Bai's sacred mark and killed him with it. And Meng told Sheng that he was surprised by his great strength and wondered how he had not been promoted until now and become an inner disciple. So Sheng told him, you are just a little sensitive, and I don't have time to join the inner disciples of the clan. So he told him that the clan competition is approaching, and only inner disciples can participate in it, and you should not miss this opportunity. So Sheng thanked him for the information and told him, don't worry, I will enter the clan before the competition. And we go to Cauldron Mountain, belonging to the Qin Qion clan, and we see the Heavenly Immortal sitting with the Purple Sky Immortal. And he told him that he discovered that Sheng is the brother of Yan, whom they judged two years ago. So he told him, although they are not a big family, the boy and his sister are very talented, and there is no one like them, and they deserve attention. So the Sky Immortal told him that if Sheng achieved accomplishments in the future, they must reconsider what they did to his sister Yan, because his personality indicates that he will not let this matter pass by so easily. So he told him that Tsao said that he reached a depth of 100 meters in the legendary fish tank and must receive a prize. And he said that they must plan to get rid of him, and they agreed that when the time for the clan competition comes, they will put strong opponents for him to finish him off. And we go to the Flying Falcon platform, and there the disciples are training to climb the mountain. And Sheng arrived, and Zaban asked him to show them his climbing abilities. So Sheng climbed the Flying Falcon platform, climbing the mountain like a falcon, with incredible speed that made those standing tell him that their eyes could not see it due to its speed, and they saw that he would break all the records that had been achieved before in the number of meters. And indeed, Sheng's single jump reached 10 meters. And the disciples, after what they saw, said to each other, we might as well go and kill ourselves, guys. And indeed, Sheng broke the record on his first attempt without exhausting himself or even using half his strength. And then Fuxian went with Sheng because he wanted something important from him, and Sheng wanted something important from him, but it should be a secret between them and he should not mention it to anyone. And he gave him 55 drops of Heavenly Expansion Essence to sell for him at the auction. And he told him that every period he would bring him more. Fuxian was very burdened and told him, do you still have more? And he told him that he wanted this matter to be a secret because many families, if they knew, would pressure their family because of it. So he told him, don't worry, we will hold a secret auction and sell it without anyone knowing. And he saw that the abundance of heavenly essence in the market could cause chaos in the imperial city. And Sheng went to the weapon exhibition to buy a weapon for the clan competition. And when the exhibition owner saw him, he told him that he had brought other Xuan-grade weapons. So Sheng told him, I want a higher-grade weapon this time. So he took him and went up to the second floor to see what he wanted. And when he went upstairs, the merchant told him that he had three Ling-grade swords of very high quality from past eras. The first sword is the Nine Weights Sword, which is made by merging nine blades together, and Chi Duoxi failed to add the tenth blade, but the sword is very heavy. And Sheng wanted the second sword, the Jade Wave Sword, which is made from the wings of a seventh-rank demonic beast. And Sheng said that the sword is not bad, but he wants to see the third sword. And this third sword, the master Xi spent his whole life making it, but he died before completing it, leaving a will to the person who gets the sword that if he can complete it successfully, the sword will reach the Ziban grade. So Sheng asked him if merging it with Heavenly Expansion Essence would be good. So he told him that it would be excellent, but the essence is not available in the market. And he told him that if he merged it with a slightly lower essence, it would also be good. So Sheng told him that he would buy this sword. So he told him that the sword is not for sale, but it is a gift to the person who is destined for it, and that to get it, he must meet the leader. And when he entered the leader, he noticed that she was trying to attract him. So he entered the stage of self-forgetfulness so that he could break her control over his soul. And she was very impressed by the strength of Sheng's soul and told him that the owner of this sword said it was a gift to the person who could complete its weight, but she would not give him the sword before confirming that he could indeed complete the sword's weight. And she told him that he knows that he is not a sword maker, and she also sees that there is no fire inside his body, so how can he complete the sword if he takes it? And she brought out her falcon. So he told her, if you want to test my abilities, take the exhibition manager out. And when he went out, he brought out demonic power flames from within him. So she asked if these flames were spiritual. So he told her that he did not know if these flames were spiritual or not, but he was sure that he had the ability to forge the sword and upgrade it to the Ziban rank. So she was convinced by his words and called the manager to give him the sword as a gift. So he thanked her. She told him that he might not be the best one to forge the sword, but for many years, no one has appeared in the entire region who is a genius in forging swords, and that she will rely on him for forging. And the manager told the leader that she had broken the rules. So she told him, what rules? It has been a long time since such a genius appeared in our region, and she sees that this boy will be much greater than his master Qin Qion, who is currently a disciple. And Sheng walked away, saying to himself that he must complete this sword successfully so that Chi Zuoxi can rest in his grave. And he took the sword and went to the forging institute to complete the sword. But they told him that strangers are not allowed to enter. So he told them that he wanted to rent a furnace to forge his sword. So he told him that they were busy now and did not have time for him. And suddenly, there was a furnace whose fire had run out and was about to explode. And suddenly, there was a furnace whose fire had run out. So Sheng quickly entered and saved the furnace from exploding. So Chu Han thanked him for his help and told him that he would help him and forge his sword. So Sheng told him that he would complete the entire sword himself, but he needed a furnace. And indeed, they gave him the furnace and stood watching. They returned to her to see how this young man would forge the sword. And when the forging began, his inner energy appeared, and he added the Heavenly Expansion Essence so that no one would know what he was doing. And Chu noticed that Sheng's Qi was indeed strong, but how would he be able to complete the forging of the sword without Heavenly Expansion Essence? And when the sword was finished, Chu, impressed, asked him to take the sword out of the furnace to see it. And when the sword came out, it was called the Light of Heaven. He noticed that Sheng was holding a sword of the Qing level. And they told him that he was not from their institute, and the one holding a weapon of the Qing level. So he told them that this sword was his and that he completed its forging himself. So he told him that this sword is above the Xuan level, and therefore you must register before you leave here. And they took him aside and asked him how he forged the sword. So he told them, if you want to register the sword, register it, but I will not tell you how I completed its forging. So he held a fist of fire in his hand and told him that if he did not tell him the method, he would not leave the institute alive. So he told them, you are only in the seventh stage of the Heavenly Dao, and you will not be able to defeat me. So he mocked him, saying, how dare a boy in the first stage of the Heavenly Dao do this to us? So he told them, you are a bunch of thieves and swindlers. And he drew his sword while they drew their swords, and the battle began. And their attack on him began by activating the Sky-Raising technique and the Moon-Raising technique, but they failed with him. And he mocked the ringing ones and refused to kill them because they were masters in their sect, and he did not want trouble with the sect. But before he left, he asked them to swear to him that they would not mention him or the sword to anyone, or he would file a complaint against them so that they would let him live. And indeed, they swore to him. And he left and went to the Seven Lights Sword arena for the competition. And he learned that his Heavenly Expansion Essence was sold for 250,000 crystals. And thus, he knew the source that would provide him with the money that would help him buy weapons and experiment in the coming days. And he entered to register his name in the competition and stood in line until his turn came. And he noticed that there were two lines. So he asked Chao why there were two lines here, a large line and a small line. So she told him that the small line is for you to qualify for the eighth stage or higher, and if you don't feel strong enough, go stand in the second line for the weak. So he stood in the eighth-level line and went up to the arena behind them. And Chao prepared and told him that he might die here. And he told him that he was at the eighth level of the Heavenly Dao and was training to be able to enter the eighth floor of the arena. So Sheng told him that he would go with her to see this eighth level. So Chao told him that he had a mid-grade sword called the Illusion Dragon, which would help him complete the eighth floor. And he asked Sheng if he knew what he would do here. And he pointed to the crystal balls and told him that he would throw the crystal ball until his face was imprinted inside it, and then the stones would attack the crystal with strong rays to break it. And what is required of him is to hold the crystal. And then he told him that if his sword was less than mid-grade, it would break. And he asked Sheng to show him the weapon he had to see its rank. And as soon as Sheng took out his sword and Chao saw it, he knew it was of the Ziyan rank. His eyes popped out of his face and he told Sheng that he was second, and that if he came here relying on the strength of his sword, he would not be able to enter this challenge, because the sword bearer is the most important. And the stones began to attack the crystal balls. And Sheng noticed that Chao, who was with him, used the sword with great skill and dealt with the sword wonderfully and deserved the title of swordsman. But Chao's ball had one more hit and shattered, even though he surpassed his previous record. But Sheng's ball remained as it was, and the rays could not even touch it. And Sheng was not sad because he was still in the challenge and had not yet lost, so he should not lose hope. And wave 21 of the attack began, and the stage of defending the balls began again, and they were able to win the challenge and set another record. And a new wave began, and Chao was surprised by Sheng's strength and resilience until now. And Sheng was bigger and stronger, and he had to stop them using sword intent, not through his skills. And he waited for the rays, and as soon as the rays arrived, Sheng ignited his sword intent and stood there, going crazy. And he said, how can he focus and meditate for just a few moments and be able to ignite his sword intent? And he said to himself, surely Sheng has something behind him. And after the waves ended, Sheng stood asking why there were no more waves. So Chao replied to him that wave 100 was the last wave, and it was the limit of the eighth level. But the problem now is not the waves, the problem is you, who were able to reach the limit of the eighth level so easily. And then the trainees noticed that someone had reached wave 100 and went to find out who it was. So Chao asked if it was him, and he pointed to Sheng, who was standing with his eyes closed. And his sword continued, and he imagined himself using his sword after igniting it while he was meditating on the capabilities of his new sword intent until he forgot himself. And the people around him began to notice and ask, how long has he been sitting like this, and how long will he remain in this state, and he is lost in God's kingdom? And from the intensity of his feeling of the terrible sword intent, he said to himself that this is not an ordinary sword technique, and that no human before him has used such a technique. And then the people in the place began to grumble and talk to him and ask him to leave them the place because there are other students who want to enter and train. And suddenly Sheng stopped and turned around. The defensive sword intent formed an unparalleled oval shape, which made everyone standing surprised. How could a newcomer here, still in the first level of the Heavenly Dao, reach this level of meditation with his sword intent, to the point that students from all over the place came from above and below to see the miracle happening at the hands of the new newcomer Sheng. And Hao Tian Ming suddenly entered and began to talk to him. And the students said, how does the newcomer Sheng know Hao, the famous one? And Hao told Sheng that he was surprised by his advanced use of the sword and wished they would meet in a fight in the upcoming competitions. And Sheng wanted to fight him, but to be able to do so, he first had to join the inner disciples. And he excused himself to go and try to join the inner disciples. And after Sheng left, Hao asked one of those standing if Sheng was the young man who reached wave 100. So he told him, yes, he is standing there. So he stopped meditating and said to himself that Sheng is advancing in his strength and abilities at an astonishing rate that amazes the minds. And Sheng went to Princess Su, and she told him that she knew he was looking for her regarding his joining the inner sect so that he could enter the upcoming competitions. And it was his turn to laugh. And she told him that no one here understands him except her. So she told him that she would hold a small competition tomorrow for the disciples who want to join the inner sect. And she told him that he must be among the top seven so that she can help him join the inner sect. So Sheng told him that this is a simple and easy matter, and that he will show them what he will do tomorrow to those he meets. And then the princess sat and meditated for a while on Sheng and said that she was sure that Sheng would be able to overcome the competitors up to the seventh level of the Heavenly Dao and easily reach the seventh position, and that his future is great and extends to the point where he can enter the Cloud Hall and help her overcome internal problems. And then she replied to herself and said that this is a bit difficult and will take time because the crowned prince will ascend the throne within a year. And the next day, we go to the external student competitions for entry into the inner sect, which begins with entering the magic circle that will determine and identify the abilities of each one, and based on his strength, the difficulty level he will compete at will be determined. And he told them that the top 10 disciples will enter the inner sect, and the top seven disciples out of the 10 will enter the same peaks. And the students saw Sheng and were worried about him because they knew he was not an easy opponent and no one could defeat him. And the first one entered and scored 410 points. And Sheng was next, and the students were worried and asked each other, how many points could Sheng reach? And some of them were afraid for themselves and said that if his points exceeded 1800 points, he would take their place. And Sheng stood like a lion in front of his enemies coming from the fifth Heavenly Dao. And the battle began with 26 warriors, and he was able to defeat them one by one with ease. And he told them confidently, let me enter the eighth level, or rather, let me enter the tenth level directly so we don't waste time, guys. And he indeed entered the tenth level, which is the peak of the Heavenly Dao, and he fought fiercely and easily, as if he were training himself. To the point that Princess Su saw him in front of her like a monster. And he was progressing in growth in a frightening way. And she saw that the upcoming peak competitions would go down in history because of Lu Sheng's presence in them. And the competition organizer told her, your man, how is he still standing on his feet and fighting so fiercely? And the organizer told her that Sheng had finished the tenth level and reached the point of 55,000, which made all the students lose consciousness because they did not want to believe that this newcomer had become the first student in the entire sect and had broken the record of Zion, the strongest student in Dew Peak. And the students of Dew Peak saw him as their hope for achieving glory for the peak, and no one after that would use them, and they would be the focus of all competitors. As for Lu Sheng himself, he saw only his sister, who was laughing at him as if she had been standing there watching him as he accelerated the greatest heavenly powers to reach the level that would allow him to break her confinement and free her. And Sheng returned to Dew Peak, and someone was waiting for him to congratulate him on joining the inner disciples and take him to his new room. And he entered his room and said to himself, I wonder why Princess Su left before telling him a single word after the glory he achieved in the competitions. And he suspected that something was happening inside the royal palace. And he said to himself that he must enter the Cloud Hall to save his sister first, and then thank Princess Su for her help. And Sheng sat in the new room contemplating his new strength. And he found the technique of raising 1000 demons. And then he began to activate the technique to try it on the concrete wall in front of him, which was completely destroyed by the power of the new technique, which he himself could not believe. And Lin Jing was standing and afraid, and said, what was Sheng training on, and he destroyed the concrete surroundings? And Sheng apologized to him. And Lin told him that the elder brother Zion wanted to talk to him about the peak competitions. And he told him, although you have become first in the inner sect, to win, you will need the help of the other members of Dew Peak. So Sheng told him that he is number one in the entrance test, but only for now. And he asked Lin if Zion wanted to test his true abilities. So Lin told him that the entire inner sect of Dew Peak has become arrogant because of the number you reached in the competition. But brother Zion is not of that type. And we go to a meeting of the peak. The members told Zion that despite Sheng breaking the record, he is still the strongest in the sect. And he told them that he summoned him to talk about the competition only. So one of them said, what did this newcomer do to deserve to sit among us? So Zion replied to them, I don't want a word. All that matters to me is the peak competition and nothing else. And he sees that Sheng has great abilities that will bring them glory and resources to Dew Peak. And Sheng entered, and this was the first time he met him. And Zion greeted Sheng and congratulated him on joining the inner sect. And he told him that since this is his first time in the peak competition, he will give him an overview of the competition. But one of the naysayers replied and said, what is the benefit of explaining it to him? He won't be able to do anything against the other peaks anyway, because they are bigger and stronger. So Zion replied to him and said that Dew Peak is indeed small compared to the other peaks, but we have a chance that we will be the best. So please, let's not have this spirit-breaking tone. So Sheng asked about the strength of Dew Peak in the upcoming competition. So one of them told him that there are 33 peaks, each peak enters a certain number of students for the competition, and the elite students in the sect always dominate the top ten seats. And for Dew Peak, reaching the 100th position is an achievement for them. So Sheng told him, do you think reaching the 100th rank is an achievement? Are you not confident in our abilities? So he said, honestly, no. And Zion told Sheng that the Heavenly Dao is not a true measure of strength, and that Tian Peak participates with 40 students, the weakest of whom is from the Heavenly Dao. And Sheng wanted to participate in this competition. And he asked about the level of strength she had reached. And then he asked Zion if the competition had prizes. So he said, the first place will receive a Sheng Zhu bead, which enables its owner to reach beyond the Crystal Dao. And the top three will join the Cloud Hall. So Sheng told himself that the current emperor was a student in the Cloud Hall, and if he could enter the Cloud Hall, he could help Princess Su. So one of them told him, don't dream of joining the Cloud Hall. And Sheng said, the problem is. So Zion replied to him and said that their current goal, which he is required to focus on, is to be among the top 100. And when Sheng went out of the hall, he said to himself that his sister reached the second place in the clan competition without help and raised her value among all the peaks. And he said that he would surpass his sister, and that he has a difficult task ahead of him that he must be well prepared for. And when he returned to his room and opened the Heavenly Map, he began to feel dizzy. And suddenly he found himself standing in front of the sun, which was about to burn him. So he imagined the moon, and found himself on the ground. And he saw a star approaching him. And he looked in the other direction, and saw another star approaching, and the two were about to collide. Then he woke up to the sound of the door knocking. And when he opened the door, he found someone telling him that he was his new teacher because Teacher Su was on vacation and it was time for the competition, and all the students were going there. And a student asked Zion, how many students are participating in the competition from Dew Peak? So he told him, the number is not important, but the type of participants is. So the student said to Lu Sheng, Zion said, laughing, what type, my friend? You brought a child with you, or what? You are still in the second stage of the Heavenly Dao. So he told him that Sheng got 55,000 points in the test, even though he is in the second stage of the Heavenly Dao. And he told the student, how can you laugh and mock the first student of Dew Peak? So he told him that it was a game and that he was challenging some dolls, and that they would open when Sheng fought first. And Chi Jing Tian, the head of the Qin Qion clan, announced the beginning of the competition. And Sheng looked at him and said that he was a person with great prestige. A competition schedule was distributed, and in the ninth Heavenly Dao level, Lu Sheng fell in the path of Chao Tong, whose strength is said to have reached the tenth level. And Zion met Hai Ming in the peak of Jing Chang, who is one of the tenth level Heavenly Dao disciples. And as they were on their way to the arena, the students could not believe that a student from the second level of the Heavenly Dao would participate with them. And they saw him as committing suicide, and that he was doomed to die. And the clan head, Chi, when he saw Sheng, asked what brought a boy in the second level here to the competition. So the attendant told him that he is a candidate student from Dew Peak. So President Chi said, perhaps he has skills that compensate for his strength. So Chao told Sheng that his first round would be easy, and that he would not even sweat. And he told Sheng that they had fought fierce battles to reach this competition, and you are coming here to turn into dust, and your weak peak should not have participated in the competition at all. So Sheng told him, defeat me first, and then you can insult me. And Chao began the battle with the Binding Seal technique, which made Sheng stand still and unable to move. And Sheng's teacher said that this movement is from the Crystal Dao and should not have an effect on the Heavenly Dao. But Sheng is only in the second level, and thus his end is sealed, and our hopes of getting a place in the competition have evaporated. And everyone saw that Chao had won the round. And Chao threw a blow with two golden hammers at Sheng, but Sheng caught it with his hand and made Chao lose his memory from the shock. And the audience saw that Sheng's strength was very great, even greater than Chao Tong, his opponent, who was from the ninth level of the Heavenly Dao. And Sheng activated the Defensive Shattering Madness technique, which made Chao suffer in front of him, not knowing what to do. And the young man Bai stood watching, and his sister told him, what do you think of the strength of this little boy, Sheng's defense? And she told him that it is greater than his strength. So Bai told her that the sons of the great families rely on their spiritual strength in attack and defense. And he told her that Sheng is physically stronger than him, but he is nothing compared to him. And Su, after his hammers became like lollipops from Sheng's defensive strength, thought of another way before losing the match. So he used the side hammers. And when he came to hit Sheng with them, Sheng absorbed the blow with his hand and grabbed the hammer. And Chao tried to pull it from his hand, but he could not. So he continued to endure the blows of the Crystal Dao and told Sheng, hit now and show me yourself. And no matter how strong your body is, it will not affect me as long as it is without innate strength. So Sheng began to hit the arrogant Chao, who felt Sheng's great strength and was amazed, seeing that he was fighting a terrifying monster. And he screamed and told the president that he was withdrawing and that Sheng from Dew Peak was the winner. And Sheng could have made Chao a tennis racket. And Chao thanked God that Sheng had a human heart and stopped his blow before it reached his face. And the president greeted Sheng. And Sheng's opponent was Tuo. And his teacher told him that he had seen many geniuses in his life, but none of them had the potential like Sheng. And he warned him and told him, I want you to make me proud. So he told him, don't worry, I will finish him off ten times before he takes a breath. And the fighters of the second round prepared to enter the arena. And Teacher Wen was worried. And Sheng told him that his opponent, Zion, was a master of formations, and these are dangerous. And they have flags that increase their strength continuously, and their size multiplies many times. And on the arena, the opponent Zion stood laughing, and Zion was confused by the pressure on him. And the opponent began to attack, and black mist formed. And Zion attacked with his spear. And the teacher saw that the beginning was wonderful, unlike the assistant who said that the spear is Zion's trump card, and his use of it from the beginning is not reassuring. And the opponent cleverly managed to trap Zion and draw him into the illusion of the energy-raising formation. And the opponent laughed and told him, you want to destroy my formation flag? You are crazy. And he kept surrounding him with flags. And Zion tried to destroy the flags with his shining spear, but they were illusions. And the opponent circled behind him to kill him, but Zion was very alert and sensed the opponent and dodged his blow. And he began to attack him with the director's spear. And the opponent was going crazy and said, how did he locate me after the illusion trap I set for him? So the opponent told him that he admired his high combat sense, but he would see what would happen to him. And the opponent grabbed a fist of fire in his hand and formed a powerful weapon with it, attacking Zion and his colleagues. And they asked him to surrender, seeing that his luck was bad because the draw put him against Chi's formation opponent from the beginning of the competition. But Sheng saw that Zion was a very brave fighter and would not surrender unless his hand and leg were cut off. And the teacher asked Hao to stop hitting Zion and told him that they had withdrawn from the competition. But the opponent Hao told him that he could not withdraw in the name of the fighter according to the rules. And he continued to hit him until he fell on the ground and could not move. So the teacher told him that the peak of Jing Chang had agreed to kill Zion. And the president of the peak of Jing Chang stood up and threatened the teacher with the stick he had. And in the end, Hai Ming was announced the winner of the round. And the president of his peak congratulated him and told him that next time he should not use all the flag formations against someone as insignificant as from Dew Peak. And Sheng heard them while he was carrying Zion and taking him out of the arena. And he reacted to the word insignificant. So the president replied to him and said that the strongest fighter you have has been beaten. And he said threateningly, do you have any objection to you being insignificant? And Sheng went to the fifth level to give it to Zi. And the teacher, when he saw it, was surprised and told him that he did not know he was so rich. And Zion apologized to the teacher because he was weak against his opponent. And the teacher told him that they were in last place anyway, so they had nothing to lose. So he told him that his injury was severe and that he would not be able to fight again today. And he apologized to Sheng and told him that everything would be on his shoulders today. And Sheng wanted the peak of Jing Chang to pay for what they did to you. And we go to the third round. And the first opponent is Hao Tian from the Meng family. And Meng told Hao Tian, finally I will see you in the arena. And Teacher Wen told him that Tian was born into a poor family, struggling to eat, but he reached the peak of the Heavenly Dao at the age of 18. And he also reached the stage of enlightenment in sword intent and defeated someone before in the Crystal Dao. And he warned him that if he stood against him in the competition, he should withdraw immediately. And Sheng said, okay. And the second opponent is Xiu from the Shuji family, peak of the tenth level, who asked Tian to withdraw his sword. So Hao Tian told him that he did not need his sword to fight him. So he told him, I will make you withdraw your sword. And Xiu began the attack with the Savage Killer sword. And he attacked and attacked. And Hao Tian stood in place, only changing his position to dodge Xiu's blows, making him only circle around him until his saliva dried up. And when Hao Tian decided to attack, he only moved his hand, and Xiu surrendered and withdrew. And thus, the winner of the third round was Hao Tian, and the audience congratulated him and told him that he proved to everyone that the poor can be geniuses. And then we move on to the group stage. And Lu Sheng faced Hai, even though he wished he had faced Hao Tian. And Hai's teacher told Wen's teacher that they would always remain at the bottom of the peaks and that they had no one left to fight but Sheng. And Hai told Sheng to defeat him in three moves. And Sheng told them, and if you cannot defeat me in three moves? So Hai told him that three moves are too many for him, and if he cannot do it, he should withdraw. And his coach told him, this is what we expect from our strongest student. And Meng told them, we will see. The battle began, and Hai asked Sheng to withdraw his sword. And Sheng said, you want to hide your trump card from me? So Sheng told him, finish it, man, the three blows are not more than four. So Hai began his attack with the Wind Vortex. And Sheng told him, is that all you have? And he dodged the vortex. And Hai told him, I did not expect you to get through it, but you will not get through my grip. And he activated the final Wind Vortex and moved towards Sheng with a punch. But his hand hurt. And when it hit Sheng, Hai could not believe himself and said, surely there is a trick. And Sheng said, no, man, we are done. You have one move left. And the Dew Peak team was happy and cheered Sheng. And they told him, the poor Hai, what will he do to Sheng with one fist? So Hai withdrew his sword and activated the Cursed Devil Fist technique and attacked Sheng. And Sheng was very surprised and activated the Sword Intent Defense technique and blocked the blow with ease. And Sheng told his opponent Hai, you have lost, teacher. So he told him, how did I lose, old man? Have you seen anything yet? So Sheng told him sarcastically, I remember someone said he would withdraw after three attacks. Then he said, wait a minute, I remember, you said that. The audience said, you are a failure and you must be a man of your word and withdraw. And Teacher Wen told Teacher Hai, were you not present at the agreement, teacher? But his teacher told him, forget this ridiculous agreement and do not leave the arena until you win. And the audience of Dew Peak began to taunt the audience of Tian Peak with words. And the audience of Tian Peak replied that they are a peak at the end of the ranking and should not open their mouths and talk. And the referee asked, what is it, guys? And they told him that Hai promised to withdraw after three attacks and broke his promise. So someone from the audience stood up and said, Hai told Sheng that this competition is important, as his teacher told him, and that he will not leave the competition because of a promise with a trivial person like him. And he began the fourth attack, and the fifth attack. And Sheng counted his attacks until he reached the 100th attack without even touching Sheng. He told him, you are a trivial person, and I need one blow to finish you off. And Sheng gave him a punch that sent him flying 20 meters. So he got up and ran, screaming, I surrender, I withdraw. And thus, Lu Sheng was the winner. And the audience celebrated in the hall and jumped, thanking Sheng for teaching the opponent a lesson he would never forget. And Hao Tian saw that Sheng's strength had doubled.

It is frightening, and he wishes he could fight with him. If Sheng gets tired of the lack of work and sits aside, waiting for the next one, and the masters of the Dew Peak are feeling themselves on their peak from which six fighters were eliminated from the competition in the first round, and God bless them that they have this Lu Sheng, and Sheng's next opponent is Hai Ming, who crushed Zion in the first round. Sheng's master tells him, "If you find yourself unable to defeat him, withdraw before what happened to Zion happens to you." Sheng and Hai Ming, oh my. The battle begins, and Hai says sarcastically to Sheng, "One from the Dew Peak in front of me. Aha, didn't you see what I did to Zion, the strongest of you? Come on, my dear, surrender and don't waste my time." So Sheng says to him, "Do you think you are strong enough to make me afraid of you and surrender?" Hai says, "Do you think, you insect, that because your strength has increased a little, you can defeat me? You are dreaming, my son." He draws his weapon and begins his attack on Sheng. The weapon's formation begins to surround Sheng from all sides, trying to subdue him with illusions, just as he did with Zion. But Sheng stands, looking at the weapon, and says, "I'm not comfortable with you, I don't know why." He draws his fist and says to Hai, "I will break your weapon and see what the master of formations will do without his formation." But Hai laughs sarcastically and says, "If I had a 1% doubt that you could break a high-level weapon, I wouldn't have approached you like this. Sheng, do you think I can't do it?" He then punches the weapon, breaking it in half, and it falls to the ground. This, of course, paralyzes Hai. The Sky Banners begin to appear, and with them, he forms the Heavenly Fire formation. This surprises the Sun God, who is the master of formations, and he says to the old man, Hai's rival master, that he did not expect his disciple to use the Heavenly Fire formation. He says, "You seem prepared this time, old man." The old man replies, "It is true that the disciple used the formation, but the difference between his use of it and your use of it is like the difference between earth and sky." The Sun God replies, "This student will be the strongest user of formations in the clan in the future." We return to the arena and see Hai, who tells Sheng that he did not intend to use the formation with him, but he brought it upon himself. He begins to pressure Sheng with the formation. Master Wen sees that this formation is meant for killing and that whoever is inside it will have their soul destroyed. Sheng finds himself surrounded by flames and fire from all sides, thinking how he will get out of this predicament. Hai gloats over him, saying he is happy and enjoying seeing the fear of death in his eyes. But Sheng says, "If I am in an illusion now, then the fire I see around me is also an illusion." Suddenly, he sees giant beasts emerging from the lava. Sheng passes the group stage with his physical strength alone, but it is clear that he underestimated this opponent. Then he says that these beasts are rocks that he can easily crush, but when he gets close to them, he feels a very high heat coming from them. Hai says, "Show me now, what will you do against statues made and made from the heat of new celestial meteors?" But Sheng advances and punches the statues, destroying them. Hai screams in pain. From here, Sheng knows that the statues are connected to Hai's soul. So he decides to destroy the rest to see what will happen to Hai. Hai draws on his soul energy and his celestial meteor flames, creating a great mass of fire, and throws it at Sheng, saying, "Do you think because you destroyed a few statues, you will get out of here alive? And even the fighters of the first crystal levels cannot break the Heavenly Fire formation, and you are just a trifle in the first heavenly level." Suddenly, Sheng emerges from the fire as if he were bathing, which drives Hai mad because he came out of the fire without a scratch. He attacks again with all his might with the statue beasts. Sheng's strength was indeed great, but it was nothing against the Heavenly Demon Fire that he absorbed in the battle of the ghouls, and his body is completely immune to any kind of fire of this level. He begins to fight the army of burning stones he launched at him, destroying them and saying, "Explode, explode!" Hai, driven mad, loses his mind and says, "I swear by God, I will kill you. I swear by God, I will burn you." He then detonates all the statues in front of Sheng to create a mountain of fire to burn him. Sheng is very cautious if he meets anyone from the peak of the heavenly level again, and it is clear that they will have a very difficult time with him. Sheng stands in front of Hai and says, "Are you done? Okay, let me start the attack now." Hai, stunned by what is happening, says to himself, "The energy difference between me and Sheng is huge, not to mention he is a master of formations. Despite all this, Sheng was able to withstand all his attacks and escape them without a single scratch on his body." He says that Sheng might have entered the crystal world, and tells them that he is still in the second heavenly level so that the opponents will lower their defenses. He answers himself and says that if he really had that, the referees would have discovered him. He says to himself that he is fighting a ferocious beast. Sheng is enraged and summons his innate strength and rushes at Hai like a beast, terrifying him. He screams and says, "Someone stop him, everyone! Someone save him from us before he reaches me!" Indeed, the soldiers attack Sheng, who summons the power of the blue dragon and keeps hitting them until the place is flooded with their blood. Zion says he does not regret losing to Hai Ming because competitions like this are made for comparing strength and discovering students' abilities. But if Sheng cannot win this round against Hai and qualify for the next round, he will feel guilty towards the Dew Peak his whole life. President Kom Tian says that if Hai can win this round and advance to the next round, he will include him in the elite and train him himself. His master replies, "Training under a god is a great honor, but Hai is only focused on training formations and not on other martial arts." He says he can easily improve his combat efficiency. He says, "Let's follow the fight and see Hai emerge victorious from the battle." Suddenly, the formations disappear, and we see Hai lying on the ground, his teeth fallen out, his face covered in blood. His master stands looking at him, looking like he died of fright for his disciple. Sheng beats Hai ferociously because of what he did to his friend Zion. Hai says, "Why are you hitting me, you scoundrel? The fight is over, and I was about to admit defeat." Sheng keeps hitting him until he says loudly that he surrenders. But every time Hai says, "I surrender," Sheng hits him in the face before he can finish. Even Zion noticed this and said, "Why is Sheng doing this?" His master replied, "Have you lost your memory? Did you forget what he did to you? Look, Sheng is doing to Hai what he did to you." Master Wen calls out to Sheng, saying, "Give him more, give him more!" Zion thanks Sheng, of course, for the favor he did him. Hai's master asks Sheng to stop hitting him and says, "My disciple has already lost, leave him alone." So Sheng says, "Now you have a voice, old man? Why were you silent when he was hitting Zion? Didn't you think to tell him to stop?" The old man says, "I told you to leave him alone. Don't you know who this is? He is a student from the peak of Ji Sheng." So Sheng says, "Did you break my eyes with something so that I wouldn't get justice for our students from you?" The old man says, "Do you think you won against our strongest students? We still have many students much stronger than him in the tournament." He says he will inform all the tournament students to do to him what they did to Hai. So Sheng says, while stepping on Hai's face with his shoe, "Are you serious? Well, I am eagerly awaiting you, Ji Sheng family." The president sits on his chair, looking at Sheng with respect and admiration. The teacher hugs Sheng and kisses him. We go to the Dew Peak headquarters, especially the students watching the competition on the screen. They cheer for their fellow student Sheng and are happy with the lesson Hai received from Sheng. We go to the next round, which will be between the first contender, Yu Chi from the Fight Qi Peak, Crystal World, and the second contender, Hao Tian Meng from the Tian Yi Peak, Heavenly World. Yu Chi asks Hao to draw his sword, and Hao says, "You are not the person for whom I will draw my sword." Hao Tian's supporters confirm all his words, seeing that Yu Chi is no match for Hao, unlike Yu Chi's supporters who believe their lineage always dominates the first places and that he will teach Hao an unforgettable lesson. Sheng stands, very focused, watching with his coach. Yu Chi tells Hao, "Draw your sword or don't draw it, you are free, but I will not watch you because you are unarmed." He then begins his attack, saying, "Ride the highest of your horses." He also says that he is not the strongest for him and that he does not want to show his best now. Yu Chi activates the Heavenly Dragon Charge technique and attacks Hao. Hao tries to evade the blow, and Yu Chi says, "Do you think you can evade a technique from the crystal world, you fool?" Hao Ming's supporters admire his steps, movements, sword, and the power of his intent. Sheng is very focused on Hao's movements, as if he is sure of his victory. He memorizes his movements very well so that when he faces him, he not only does that but also fights with him, moving his sword with him as if in a confrontation. He tries to evade his blows to the point that those present in the arena notice him and say, "What is Sheng doing?" Some of them see Sheng imitating Hai's movements and are surprised because Sheng has not held a sword for long. The battle heats up, and Sheng sees that it is about to end. Yu Chi activates the Heavenly Dragon Killer technique, standing and looking at him as if to say, "Strike, man, if you are going to strike, let's go!" Yu Chi, after finishing his attack and not being able to touch Hao, says to himself, "This attack was the strongest, but what's the use if I can't locate the opponent due to his many movements and dodges?" Yu Chi is intimidated and surrenders as soon as Hao touches him from behind. Sheng is amazed and says that he must try it in a real fight. Hao Tian Meng wins, and the audience supporting Yu Chi is sad and disbelieving that someone from the Heavenly World Peak can defeat someone from the Crystal World so easily. The next round will be between the first contender, Lu Sheng from the Dew Peak, Second Level, Heavenly World, and the second contender, Chu Ji Qi from the Chu Ji family, Crystal World. Master Sheng sees that this is their last round, and Master Chu Ji says it will show the little mouse Sheng his true size. Chu Ji says to Sheng, "I have heard bad news from my family and your bad luck, and you have fallen into my path." Sheng says, "I will teach you a lesson, my daughter. If you want to kill, go ahead. If you are here to talk, then get out of the arena." Chu Ji, who is in a hurry for the fight, begins her attack early on Sheng, saying, "I will teach you the difference between heaven and earth." She attacks him with her sword, but Sheng surprises the audience by knowing the sword movements so well that if they didn't know him, they would say he is Hao Tian. When Hao Tian saw Sheng's sword movements, he said that Sheng was copying his movements exactly and was very surprised. He says that Sheng acquired the sword intent very recently, and yet he can copy his movements. Not only the audience and Hao Tian are noticing Lu Sheng's abilities, but the president also notices this and asks Elder Chu Chang if he noticed anything strange about Lu Sheng. The elder's reply is that he is indeed noticing something stranger than imagination about Lu Sheng, who was just a moment ago imitating Hao Tian's movements next to the arena and was able to use them with such mastery so quickly. This is maddening, of course, Mr. President. The president then asks about his predictions for this round. The elder says that Sheng is very talented, but unfortunately, his energy is limited against his strong opponent, and he sees that he will not be able to withstand him. But the president disagrees with the elder, seeing that Lu Sheng will be among the first 30 competitors, which surprises the elder and makes him wonder that the president himself sees that Sheng can defeat elite disciples. We go to Chu Ji, who started attacking early on Sheng, whose attacks she easily dodges. Chu Ji sees that Sheng is only defending and does not deserve to be on the same ring with her, but Sheng is not interested in her words and is focused on his movements. He sees that his familiarity with sword movements has increased more in reality. Chu Ji continues to provoke Sheng, saying, "Do you think you can win by defending alone?" She begins to activate her offensive techniques, which puts great pressure on Sheng. Coach Wen sees that she is using deadly techniques and is afraid for Sheng. His disciple reassures him, saying that Sheng will find a solution. Chu Ji says to Sheng, "I will kill you because you are an enemy of the family, and we all hate you." She activates the Twin Chaos technique to deliver the finishing blow, saying that this technique does not affect directly but will trap him inside until it kills him. She traps him inside the vortex of Twin Chaos and says, "Come on, do your sword movements and show me how you will escape." Sheng says, "Escape from what exactly?" He summons his innate strength and feels his body become light, and begins to fly. The audience is stunned by Sheng's body because the flying technique is only used by the crystal world, to the point that Chu Ji's supporters see that the wind is lifting him up like a leaf. Chu Ji is going crazy and understands that Sheng used his speed and exploited her vortex to fly. She says that someone with such cunning deserves to win against previous opponents. She thinks about changing the direction of the wind, but she has never tried it before and doesn't know what might happen, but she will try it anyway. She tries it, and Sheng gets dizzy and can't control himself. The audience sees that this is great pressure on Sheng and says that he should surrender and not be stubborn, since he is in the group stage and still has chances to qualify even if he loses once or twice. Sheng says, "There is no escape from attacking." He says to himself that he will not admit defeat and that if he surrenders just because he encountered a problem, he does not deserve to be a fighter, and this is not his way, nor his style, especially since the storm has only torn his clothes but has not yet affected his body. Coach Wen screams and asks Sheng to surrender, saying his life is more important. The storm ends, and Sheng appears with his well-defined muscles after his clothes were torn, which drives Chu Ji crazy that he came out of the vortex unharmed. The president is impressed by this Sheng and still looks at him with respect and admiration. Chu Ji's supporters lament their disappointment. Bai says to him, "At this rate, your Golden Pill technique will do nothing to Sheng's muscles, and I want to grab him and pierce his body with my needles." He says, "If the Golden Pill doesn't defeat Sheng, then all the needles in the world won't do anything to Sheng." So she says, "Enter the ring with me, and I will show you what I will do to him, because she is not like the fool who is hitting him now." We return to the battle, and Sheng, standing with his body like a wall against Chu Ji's attacks, has gone mad from what is happening. She surrenders, and Sheng begins his attack on her. She runs away from him like a chicken and asks him to leave her alone, saying to herself, "What more can I do to him? I attacked him with all my might, and he stood in place, not even thinking of dodging the attack." So she lunges at him to attack him instead of running away from him, but he meets her with a punch to her face and throws her out of the ring. Thus, Lu Sheng is the winner with minimal effort. His coach congratulates him and cannot believe he can defeat a warrior from the crystal world. We go to the betting hall, where they lost by betting on Chu Ji. Some people think he won because Chu Ji was weak, and some think he won with the strength of his body without even touching her. Bets begin on Hao and Sheng and their upcoming rounds. Those who bet on Sheng believe he is the strongest. Those who bet on Hao believe Sheng is an insect that Hao will crush with his foot. Those who bet on Sheng say he defeated everyone before him without drawing his sword. They say, "If you are so sure, why didn't you bet all your money on him?" His response was that he not only bet all his money on Sheng but also borrowed money to bet on Sheng. He says that he has always bet and lost more than he won, but from today on, he will bet on Sheng in every match he enters. Coach Wen tells Sheng that the group stage is over, and there is only one competitor they have not defeated so far. They are all from the crystal world except Sheng and Hao. He tells him that the upcoming rounds will be very difficult for him and that he must surrender when he feels danger. Sheng says, "Don't worry, I know my limits well." We go to the next round, which will be between the first contender, Lu Sheng from the Dew Peak, and the second contender, Shao Down from the Jin Gang Peak. The bet is that no matter who the opponent is, he will fight with all his might until the end without surrendering. The coach apologizes to him, saying, "I should have more faith in you." In the arena, Shao asks Sheng to surrender, saying that he loves his master very much and saw him being insulted by everyone after hitting a student from their side with extreme rudeness. His master asked him to take revenge and restore his honor. Sheng says, "Why are you telling me this?" He replies, "Because I see that my colleague was wrong and deserved what happened to him." So Sheng says, "You are not going to take revenge for your colleague?" He says, "No, I want to kill you." Sheng pays his respects to Zhao for his integrity and says he will not surrender, but if he loses, he hopes he will give him a chance to surrender. Zhao says, "As you wish, my little brother." He immediately begins his attack, turning his internal energy into ink, which surprises Sheng and he says he will not be defeated easily, especially since he has not used his internal strength yet. He calls out the blue dragon within him and attacks as well, but Zhao seals Sheng's left hand, making him unable to move it. So he uses all his physical strength and tries to break the seal with his right hand, but it has no effect. So he strikes again with all his might, breaking the seal and knocking Zhao to the ground. Zhao gets up again and attacks him with a formation of five seals, saying to Sheng, "The fifth seal will withstand five consecutive attacks from you, no matter how strong they are." He also says that he has sealed his left hand and that he will not be able to use it again. Sheng says, "You explained your attack plan to me." So Zhao says, "The seal will disappear in two hours." Sheng says, "I will still wait two hours." With his innate strength, he easily breaks the seal from his hand, which drives Zhao crazy. He says, "It is clear that I underestimated your strength." He then surrounds him with a killing formation of brown seals and says, "Show me now, what will you do?" Sheng says that he felt the killing intent in his current attack, which was not present in the previous attack. Sheng begins his attack, but Zhao delivers a fatal blow, knocking him to the ground. The audience supporting Sheng sees that Zhao really intends to kill Sheng and is hitting him with cruel and fatal blows, unlike Zhao's supporters among the bettors who are happy and want Sheng to lose so they can win the bet. Zhao tells Sheng, "Move after the blow you took." He tells him to surrender, but Sheng says to himself that he can no longer stay silent and gets up from the ground at once and attacks Zhao with monstrous strength. Zhao sees that Sheng's body is so hard that he is not sure he can defeat him. Then Sheng uses his spiritual energy after his patience ran out with Zhao. The audience is amazed that he is still going to use his spiritual energy, to the point that they almost forget that Sheng has not used his skills at all in the first competition. The president is very impressed and says, "What do you think of Lu Sheng?" He says that the aura around his arm is from the power of demons, and not just demon power, but the Devil God Fist skill, which only three students have obtained in the last 100 years. Two of them could not learn it, and the third was prevented by the elders from learning it, and since then it has not appeared again until today, but he never imagined that the day would come when he would see it again. The elder says that he heard long ago about the power of the devil, that humans cannot withstand it due to its harsh nature compared to the weak human body, and he wants to know how the naughty boy was able to endure it. The president replies, "In the past, humans could not learn the power of the devil, but the modern world today is full of surprises, and anything can happen." He urges Zhao to use all his trump cards, even those he had set aside, to use against the elite. This makes Sheng angry and he attacks Zhao with the Devil God Fist and breaks through the formation Zhao created, knowing it could destroy a spiritual weapon. This makes Zhao say to himself, "What is Sheng planning to do by throwing himself into my formation like this?" Zhao sees that he is wasting his energy and wasting time with the cunning and tricky Sheng. He says to himself that he must finish him off now. He asks Sheng to surrender and says, "You are still a child in the second level of the Heavenly World and you don't know what brought you here among us." Suddenly, he finds his formation shattered. Sheng, with his immense, branching spiritual power, was able to absorb Zhao's offensive formation and control it. He screams, saying this is cheating. The top three in the Tai Tian 99 sect are talking about Sheng's move, asking each other how he did it, and they don't know. Hao Tian says that this skill is stronger than their world and says that they live in a small continent among five continents that make up the world, but strange things always come from the sky, and to understand them, we must travel from earth to sky. He wishes to become strong so that when he grows up, he can be the elder of the clan. We return to Sheng, who is enraged and attacks Zhao, who has no choice but to attack one last time with another seal. He tries, but the seal does not move from its place due to Sheng's immense aura. Zhao thinks about preserving the remaining strength he has and surrendering, but he says to himself that he can never surrender to someone smaller and weaker than him. He uses his maximum speed and attacks with all the seals he has at once, creating a magnificent wall of talismans and seals. Sheng is surprised and begins his fierce attack on Sheng, but Sheng's spiritual power shadows are able to withstand Zhao's immense attack with ease, to the point that Zhao cannot believe that Sheng has indestructible spiritual power that renews itself. He decides to destroy all of Sheng's skills and creates the indestructible sacred text formation. Indeed, Sheng's aura begins to fade, but he is able to gather it again and destroy the formation once more. Zhao has no choice but to kill Sheng himself to be able to defeat him. The maneuvers between the two begin, the push and pull. Zhao does everything he can and attacks with all his might, but he cannot even touch Sheng due to his incredible speed and even faster reaction. So he waits until Sheng gets close to him and delivers the finishing blow, smiling and saying, "I didn't expect to win against him due to his mistake." But he is surprised to see Sheng standing silently in front of him. Here, Sheng decides to seize the last opportunity and lunges at Zhao to deliver the finishing blow, but he stops the blow and suddenly tells Zhao that he has a chance to surrender. Zhao does not refuse the chance and immediately surrenders. Thus, Sheng is the winner of the round, a great shock to the audience who cannot believe that someone as strong as Zhao could surrender so easily to Sheng, who is much weaker than him. On the other hand, we see crying in the betting hall from Zhao's supporters who lost their crystals, unlike the other supporters who bet on Sheng with all their might and thank Sheng for not letting them down. Coach Wen congratulates his champion and tells him that he has become the number one star of the Dew Peak in the history of competitions. The students are now very eager for him in the peak after the tremendous abilities they have seen from their heroic champion Sheng. The big surprise is that Sheng won the next two rounds by default because two competitors from the Ayan Peak surrendered before entering the battle simply because the draw placed them in Sheng's path. Sheng's coach asks him to focus on what's next because he will be facing the elite. We go to the next round, which will be between the first contender, Wang Yun, an elite disciple from the Heavenly World, and the second contender, Bu Sheng, an elite disciple from the Crystal World. However, the contender Wang does something strange and tells Sheng, "You be my opponent in this round." Of course, Sheng's coach does not like this and tells Sheng to refuse. Sheng says he has another opponent in the ring. Wang provokes Sheng, saying, "If you are afraid of me, come, and I will not kill you with my full strength, and I will descend to your Heavenly level." Sheng replies, "I am not afraid of you, and I can defeat you easily." Of course, the audience will not miss this verbal match and will heat up the atmosphere between them. At the end of the discussion, Wang tells Sheng, "Try not to lose the next round, and we will meet anyway." Bu Sheng, Wang's opponent, does not like Wang's words and says, "Be careful with your words and don't underestimate me." He begins to attack Wang using spiritual weapons, but Wang easily destroys the net around his neck with his demonic skills that deceive his opponent. He prepares to strike Bu with a finishing blow, but Bu decides not to give him a chance and decides to attack him with the Divine Golden Fan. Of course, the arrogant Wang will not stand idly by. He begins the transformation technique into a demon form, which, upon seeing it, Bu immediately surrenders. Sheng says, "He was not just talking." He says to himself, "This is not just talk." The competitors for the next round are announced, which will be between Lu Sheng and Wang Yan, who annoys his sister Yan, and it looks like it will be a fierce confrontation. Lu Sheng stands, contemplating. His colleague notices and asks him what's wrong. He finally smiles and says, "Everything is fine." He begins to show off, saying, "I am very excited, and there is an old score between me and my next opponent." Mo arrives, who does not like Wang's boasting and showmanship in the fight and wishes to meet him to tear him in half. Wang says, "Three years have not passed between them, so I don't need to try to kill him because he won't be able to." He says he will hold himself back in front of him. Sheng looks at him and says, "No, my brother, don't hold yourself back." He laughs and says, "The comedic part has arrived, hasn't it?" Wang asks, "What do you mean?" Sheng replies, "You are not capable of your words, and today I will make you forget about marrying my sister because you don't even deserve her dowry." Wang replies, "If you want to make me angry, then I am indeed angry, and I will make you pay dearly for every word you said." The president is focused on them and calls out to Elder Chu, saying, "Am I working as a matchmaker here or what?" The elder replies, "Forgive me, sir, why do you say that?" He says, "How did I not hear about Sheng before and his immense talent? And he turned out to be Lu's brother too." Elder Su stammers in his words, and the president asks him to find out if Sheng went to his sister in the Purifying Mountain. We go to the arena and see Wang, who has started the battle very heatedly and begins to make a lotus bridge towards Sheng, who is very excited and wants to absorb Wang's lotus power and turn it against him. Sheng has already begun to absorb the lotus, and when Wang shouts at him this time, he says he will not let him do it again and will draw the lotus power and use it against him. Wang begins to use his powerful aura to fly, which puts great pressure on Sheng, making him lose his strength. He says he wouldn't have done this if it weren't for Sheng's long tongue. Sheng says, "I will show you how I will destroy your skills with ease." Wang scoffs at his words and stabilizes himself with one finger, saying, "Okay, let's try it." Sheng begins his attack on his gravity, and Wang, standing confidently, says, "Show me now, where is the confidence you were talking about? Come on, hit me and defeat me. I haven't even used one finger against you yet." But Sheng replies calmly, "Say what you want and do what you want. I have never felt this warmth before." The enraged Wang keeps shouting at Sheng, saying, "Come on, bring out your flying knife, attack me with your spirit fork, come on, show yourself, and let me enjoy it." The audience, hearing their conversation, remembers that Sheng has not used his weapon yet and says, "What is this flying knife?" We go to Lu Sheng, who tells Wang that he admits he is not the strongest here, but he is sure he is stronger than him. If he thought that mere gravity would stop him, he is mistaken. Wang says, "Sheng, you talk a lot, but you do nothing. You only know how to run away." So Sheng jumps at him at once and says, "Who told you I only know how to run away?" He then flies at him with a punch. Wang defends himself with the lotus power that Sheng is absorbing and controls it, to the astonishment of the crowds who have never seen anyone with the skill of absorbing others' abilities and using them as a weapon against them. But Wang is not shaken and says he knew he would do that and that he is not stupid enough to give him his skills, and this move will not work with him. So Sheng replies, "And I don't have anything. Show me how you will defeat me." Wang says, "Do you think you are immune just because your body is a little strong?" He draws the Noble Sword, from which immense energy emanates, and says, "We will see if your body is really strong or not." So Sheng says, "Come on, with your old sword, show me what you will do." Wang begins to attack Sheng, who moves away from him with the speed of lightning, making Wang see him everywhere. He asks himself how someone still in the second level of the Heavenly World has the speed to challenge him like this. Lu Sheng runs in front of him, and Wang runs behind him, saying, "Where will you run from me?" Elder Su asks the president to stop the fight to save Sheng, but the president says, "No, because Sheng is trying to escape, but there is no expression of fear, panic, or helplessness on his face. Let's wait until the end and see what happens." We go to Wang, who has caught Sheng and hits him with the sword with all his might. We see Sheng blocking the sword strike with his bare fist. This action provokes the audience, who see Sheng as exploiting his arm and preferring death to surrender. Wang notices Sheng's energy burning in a circular motion around his fist to shake his arm as soon as it collides with it. He says to himself that he will cut off his hand before it reaches his arm. The president says to Elder Su, "Did you see what I saw? Wang is so strong that he cannot activate the lotus shield." Sheng continues to punch him until his face is full of blood, and he screams, "Do you think you will defeat me like this with just your fist without a weapon?" Sheng tells Wang that he has not used his lotus shield yet, and if he gets close, he will draw it. Sheng replies strangely, "Do whatever you want, and I will give you time until you bring out everything you have." He forgets to surrender and says, "You may not have used your shield, but I also haven't used all my strength." Wang says, "How can I accept defeat from someone still in the second level of the Heavenly World? How can I call myself a genius after that?" He says he did not expect Lu Sheng to be so strong before the competition. Wang's coach, seeing his disciple's defeat, says that Wang is the closest disciple to his heart and he is afraid that he will lose confidence after the defeat. Sheng, after winning, tells Wang, "I will consider that I did not win and will wait for you in three years for another battle." He tells him to try to work hard, and if he sees that he cannot face him then, it is better for him to die now. Wang's coach tells Sheng, "Enough hitting him, consider yourself the winner, and he has withdrawn." Sheng looks at Wang with contempt and says, "Come on, dad, get off my ring. Go and train well." But Wang surprises everyone and reaches the enlightenment stage. His coach is surprised and says, "How, in this condition?" But the president has a different opinion. After looking and seeing that Sheng was protecting Wang with his strong words to get him out of his state of despair, he says, "We should not underestimate this boy." We go to the second ring, and we see the big surprise from Wang, who tells Sheng that now he understands why he lost to him and that he was indeed too young before meeting him. He thought that the competition of the peaks would be a stroll for him, and when the draw placed him in his path, he thought he was lucky and would defeat him without effort. He pays his respects to Sheng and bows to him. Then he leaves the ring and tells his coach that he will not continue the rest of the competition and will return to the peak to train well. His coach tells him to do as he wishes, with great regret for him and what happened to him in front of Lu Sheng. Tian, who says the Purple God Ji Sheng is making remarkable progress in the competition, and if they don't get rid of him now, he will take revenge on them for what they did to his sister Yan. So Tian tells the Purple God Ji that no one in the competition can stop him. So he says, "We have Jin Gushi. If he meets Sheng, he will kill him on the ring." But God Ji says that Jin is a disciple and if he kills Princess Su, she will be held responsible. So God Tian replies and says that the princess has problems in the royal palace and is not focused on us. So he says, "Okay, we trust in God." They then ask Jin to kill Sheng on the ring. We go to the next round, which will be between the first contender, Meiyun Shen, of the Cheng Yun sect, Heavenly World, and the second contender, Xuan Jiaoyan, of the Yunuo Peak, Heavenly World. Mo, the fierce one, tells her older brother Bai that she does not like to cut girls because they are weak. The audience sees Mo as the strongest and that she has defeated Xuan twice before. The unlucky Chen from the Dew Peak is bitten by his tongue. Unlike the fierce Mo, who comes out to the ring, she immediately goes down to him and says, "Can you say that again?" He says, "It wasn't me." She says, "I am sure it was you who cursed me when I came out." She says she will pluck his eye out. He apologizes to her. She says, "I will not leave you until you bite your tongue." The coach apologizes to him and asks Chen to apologize to her, but she does not accept their apology. So Chengh enters and tells her that he was wrong, but he apologized, and she absolutely does not accept his apology and wants to cut off his tongue or pluck out his eye. He tries to appease her a lot, but she is stubborn and insists on taking his eye. So Sheng tells her, "If you lose your round, then that's it. If you win, you will take your right from me." She agrees, but before she leaves, she reaches out to Chen's body and tries to pull him. Chen tries to move away from her, but she...

He cut off a piece of his body and made his heart visible. This makes Sheng admire her speed and strength greatly. She goes back into the ring, and the competition begins with a verbal battle between the two girls. The gist is that Mu hates men, and Chen hates girls. The battle starts from Chen's side, who trained day and night to reach the peak of Yun for glory. We see a very strong and fierce attack between the two, as if they weren't girls, but Mu is very fierce, and Chu is afraid of her and surrenders to her for the third time in her life. But Mu tells Chen that if she loses to her a fourth time, she will be executed. We move to the next round, which will be between the first contender, Lu Sheng, the peak of Dew, and the second contender, Jin Guixi, from the Yun sect, an elite disciple of his. When he learns that he is a disciple of the immortal Ji and it seems he understood the hint, the fight begins. Sheng uses a technique that merges illusion and assassination on Shi, who is disguised in his body. He knows that he is hiding among his copies for camouflage. Trainer Yun knows that this type of fighter is used for killing and assassination and begins to feel that Sheng is indeed in danger. Shi tells Sheng, laughing, that all the contenders are afraid of him, but he is not afraid of him because he will kill him today in the ring. So Sheng tells him, "So you can laugh, and I thought you were mute." He gets angry at Sheng and starts the attack immediately. Sheng says to him, "Even if you know my location, you are no match for me." So Sheng says, "And when I am not your match, why are you attacking me while you are hidden? Come out and show yourself." He sends Shi, but he tries to hold himself back well. He tells the referee that Shi is not attacking, so he can take a break. He goes and sits on the ground in a provocative way, and the audience reacts to Sheng's words, telling Shi, "If you are not up for the fight, surrender and don't waste the man's time." Mu is very excited to face Sheng. Bai, her brother, sees that Sheng is very cunning and that he was able to anger Shi among the shadows and make him provoked. Shi appears and jumps with all his might towards Sheng, who is sitting with his eyes closed, plotting. Shi tells him, "You look like you're thinking of a trick, but no matter what you do, you'll never be able to defeat me." He draws his sword and launches a spiritual attack on Sheng, who does nothing while sitting in his place. This surprises Shi. Sheng activates the Soul Thorn technique and asks for the flying dagger in one breath towards Shi, who is surprised and the flying dagger falls from the sacred sword to the ground. The president notices that Shi has entered the ring and intends to kill Sheng and says, "There must be something between them outside the ring." At this moment, Elder Chu brings the president the information he requested regarding Lu Zheng. The president knows that Sheng was able to master the sword intent for the first time on the platform of the Star Dou Sword. The elders were going to send a report on Sheng's capabilities, but the immortals Tian and Ji prevented them. We return to the ring again and see the cunning Shi, who is circling Sheng, who is sitting on the ground, thinking of a way to get rid of him. He sits cross-legged, waiting. We return again to the president, who understands the game and knows that the two immortals have played a trick in the competition and arranged for Shi to meet Zheng to kill him in the ring. Elder Chu asks him to stop the match, but the president tells him there is no need because it is clear from Shi's appearance that he is no match for Lu Sheng, so let's see what happens until the end. Sheng activates the Demon God Ghost technique and throws the flying dagger again at Shi, which hits his sacred sword and breaks it. This makes Shi afraid and he wants to surrender. His master asks him not to surrender. He tells him, "If I don't surrender now, Sheng will kill me in the next attack." So he tells his master to attack him from outside the ring, and he must remain inside the ring and pretend to be the one fighting so that no one discovers their secret. He tells him that the referee is watching them. So he tells the trainer that the referee doesn't care about such things. The unequal battle begins this time from outside the ring. Shi starts the attack, and Sheng counters him with disruption. The audience is amazed by Shi's strength and says, "Where was this strength from the beginning?" They see that this strength is unnatural and much greater than Shi's abilities. Chen reveals the game and knows that this attack originates from the immortal Tian. Sheng gets angry and activates the Demon God Ghost technique and attacks him as well, but the attack of the two immortals on him through Shi is much stronger. Sheng takes a risk and attacks him with his flying dagger, but to no avail. The audience is impressed by Shi's strength and says it is very frightening, and that even the referee does not possess such strength. Shi strikes a powerful blow towards Sheng to finish him off, but the referee intervenes, saves Sheng, and defeats Shi and Sheng. The referee calls out to the immortals Tian and Ji and tells them, "How could you forget yourselves and try to kill someone in the peak competition?" The audience is surprised by what is happening and says, "How could the two immortals violate the rules and try to assassinate the peaks?" The two immortals blame each other in front of the referee and try to pin the blame on each other. The immortal Ji flees when he feels the referee will kill him, but the referee strikes him while he is flying, knocking him down. He tells him, "I will forgive you and not kill you, but I will imprison you in the Purifying Mountain for the rest of your life." The referee then looks at Sheng and tells him, "You are a strong fighter." The audience cannot believe their ears as they hear the governor of the entire Eastern Province praising Sheng. The governor surprises everyone and tells Sheng that his body is damaged from the sonic waves that were directed at him a moment ago and gives him a pill for his body to recover. He asks him to show him his true strength in the arena. Elder Chu tells Sheng that this pill not only heals wounds but also strengthens blood and qi, and that Sheng is lucky to receive such a gift from the governor. Lu Sheng is announced the winner, who sits aside and takes the pill he received from the governor. The next round is announced between the first contender, Lu Sheng, of the Heavenly Level Dew Peak, and the second contender, Zhang Fu, from the elite. The elder remembers that Sheng is still eating the pill and is afraid he will lose. He quickly runs to tell him to postpone the fight after the round, but Sheng tells him not to worry, he has eaten the whole pill. So the elder says, "Let's go to the platform." As soon as Chang steps onto the platform, the contender surprises everyone, raises his hand, and announces his surrender. The next round is between the first contender, Bai Tian, from the elite, and the second contender, Shi Yun, from Tian Peak. The verbal battle begins from Shi's side, who tells Bai that you elite disciples are arrogant and puffed up for nothing, thinking you are everything, and you are just wind that can be blown away. I will defeat you and show you your true size. The contender Bai tells him, "You are right about what you want to say and what you have said, and I am indeed arrogant, and that is something I cannot change. And because I am arrogant, I will use only three moves against you to defeat you." The audience begins to shout and react to the verbal war between supporters and opponents. Shi laughs and tells Bai, "Show me how you will defeat me in just three moves." The battle begins between the two sides, with back and forth. It is clear from Bai's attacks that he is reluctant, or doesn't want to win, or is postponing his victory to the third blow to increase the excitement, until Qi becomes greedy in the match, and then he defeats him with a defensive move and tells him, "I hope you have learned your lesson, father, so that you do not underestimate the elite disciples again." We move to the next round and the anticipated battle between the first contender, the well-known Lu Sheng, and the fierce contender, Mu, from the elite. As usual, the war of words begins before the war of swords. We go to Mu, who tells Sheng that she has waited a long time for this moment to see how Lu Sheng will escape from her. As for Sheng, he tells her that he is not eager to fight her because he knows what he will do to her after he defeats her. She tells him, "Are you sure you will defeat me?" He says, "Yes." She gets angry and tells him, "When I defeat you, I will make you a horse with four legs and ride you." The audience is reacting and afraid that Lu Sheng will become a horse and be ridden. The fierce Mu begins the battle with an attack from the technique of a thousand feather stab, from which she creates many copies around her. We go to Sheng, who quickly understood that these copies are not just illusions that will disappear, but a technique. He tells her that her technique is not as stable as Shi's technique and he can easily determine her location. Indeed, he determines her location and is able to direct a defensive blow to block her attacks with ease. Then he tells her that her attacks are useless against him because he is much stronger than her. This made her angry and she said that she had a technique she was saving for an emergency, but the time has come to use it. Her teammate Bai calls her from outside and tells her that this is just a match and warns her against using the technique. She tells him that she will lose if she doesn't use this move. So he tells her, "What's the problem if you lose? Don't be afraid, Sheng won't do anything to you if he defeats you." So she tells Sheng, "He won't be lenient with you." She thinks for a moment and then says, "You are lying." She begins to activate the Green Phoenix Body technique and transforms into a huge eagle, telling Sheng, "I will teach you an unforgettable lesson." Sheng draws his sword, and as soon as the audience sees it, their eyes bulge out of their sockets because it is a sacred weapon. Thus, they know that Sheng has not used his full strength in all the previous rounds. Hao Tian is surprised that Sheng is a swordsman and now understands why he was saving his moves outside the ring and is very excited to face him in the ring. The president says, "Teach her she is stupid for activating the Green Phoenix so quickly." He says he did not expect Lu Sheng to be a swordsman and is eager to see his sword aura and know its level. Elder Chu tells the president that although they are old, their sects are full of talent. The president asks him, "Who do you think will win, Lu Sheng or the Phoenix Body?" Before the elder can answer, the president says, "I have a feeling that Lu Sheng is always capable of achieving miracles." The old man tells him, "Indeed, Lu Sheng has performed many miracles that no one can repeat." Sheng asks Mu, "Tell me, do you hate me?" She tells him, "I hate you, period, for no reason, and I want to defeat you." He tells her, "Okay, show me then, you clever girl." He begins to show her his sword aura, and as soon as she approaches him, he activates the Body Protection Sword Aura technique, but she manages to reach him and stab him in the shoulder. She tells him that she was going to give him two stab wounds in his body, but she changed her mind and pierced his entire body. He tells her, "Okay, fine." He laughs, and she tells him, "The more you laugh, the more you will suffer." He tells her, "Okay, come on, show yourself if you can." He keeps laughing while she counts the stab wounds she will give him. The president is watching Sheng intently and plotting. The audience is going crazy over Sheng, who has drawn a sacred sword but is using ordinary sword techniques. Some of them think this is a credit to him for using ordinary techniques in peak competitions, and some think that Sheng is only using the sword for defense. Fighters from other peaks are surprised and don't understand. Some think he's crazy for fighting the Phoenix with ordinary sword skills, and some think he did it intentionally so that no one would know his true sword abilities. But Hao sees his sword swings in the air and says it's not an ordinary sword swing. Mu tells him it's not for her and activates the Green Phoenix Claw technique and tries to finish him off, but Sheng cuts off her claws with a single sword strike. Everyone can't believe how Sheng's ordinary sword can defeat the Phoenix. This makes the crazy one want to burn her Phoenix Core. If she does that, she will kill herself. Bai tells her not to do that and asks Sheng to stop her. Sheng tells her that he doesn't care if she lives or dies, but he will not allow her to make any move that increases her power, and if she tries, he will kill her. Bai sees that Sheng is lying to her to scare her into retreating, and she cries. Sheng tells her to surrender, and she indeed surrenders. The referee announces Chen's victory. Bai goes to thank Lu Sheng for being merciful to his sister. Trainer Yun receives Sheng, saying to himself that his greatest ambition was to be among the top 100, but he did not expect Lu Sheng to fly him into the sky of Qun. He wishes that Princess Su were present to see her dear disciple achieve her ambitions. His disciple tells him that Sheng can help Princess Su and that if Sheng continues his victories like this, he will reach the highest clouds, and he will talk to him about her after the competition ends. Thus, the qualifying rounds end, with only five remaining: Lu Sheng, Hao Yitian, Bai Tian, An Guoyun, Mu Chen. The next round will be between the first contender, the well-known Lu Sheng, and the second contender, Wang Yun, from the elite. The verbal war begins with the elite contender, Wang, who tells Sheng, "What is written cannot be escaped, Lu." Sheng says, "I will escape from it." He tells him, "Maybe you won't try to escape, but you are definitely afraid of him from within." So Sheng tells him, "Didn't you tell me you would reduce your power to my level when we meet? So I am afraid of myself." The audience, as usual, plays its role in heating things up and reacts to the conversation. Then Wang thinks for a moment and says to himself, "This scoundrel wants to embarrass me in front of people." He tells Sheng, "I offered you, but you refused." So Sheng tells him that he did refuse, but he thinks he will win even if he is at his full power. So Wang gets angry and transforms and tells Sheng, "Your tongue is sharp even in the face of danger. It looks like your day will be black." He tells Sheng, "I don't need my sword." So he tells him, "If you don't use your sword now, you won't be able to use it later because you will be dead." The fierce attack on Sheng begins, but Sheng is smart and manages to get under Wang, who gets angry and tells him, "You passed me this time, but don't think you can stop me with these simple moves of yours." The fierce attack begins again, and when it reaches Cheng, he finds many copies of him. So he stops and looks for the real copy. Sheng, before the fight, and the always reacting audience see that Wang is not Wang when he is hungry and that he is tired of fighting Sheng's shadow copies. Sheng identifies his location and attacks him. The audience sees that Sheng will go crazy if he faces Wang directly and sees that this is too much confidence for Sheng, but he continues on the path of confrontation and is close to collision. Suddenly, he activates all the Dragon Scales and blocks it and falls to the ground. The disciples see that Sheng has become so terrifying that if he increased his speed a little, he would have killed the disciples around the ring. Some are surprised by the strength of his body, which is like iron. Wang sees that Sheng is very dangerous and wants to defeat him with multiple advantages, and that he has many good qualities, including the strength of his body. Sheng tells him, "What's wrong? Do you still want to play? I have no one else but you today, or what? We can play until the end of the day." So Wang tells him, "You are clearly not easy, and I underestimated you." So Sheng tells him, "You can say you acted like a child." Wang says, "I was indeed like that." He tells him, "You are testing my true strength and making you regret it." He pulls out a dragon's spine and tells him, "You will have the honor of being the first one to be hit with it." Sheng's trainer sees that the spine Wang has might not be as strong as a real dragon or even as strong as the Green Phoenix, but the fear here is that Wang will use his full power. Wang begins to summon the dragon's power. Sheng tells him that it wants to devour the spear in Wang's hand and tells them that without them, he would not have been able to hold on until now. He remembers when he was choosing techniques in the sacred library and when he was fighting ghosts in the immortal palace. He tells them, "But how will he devour the spear without provocation?" Sheng begins to activate the Dragon Terror technique and says that all creatures have no choice but to kneel before dragons. He asks Lu Sheng to kneel. The spear's aura reaches outside the ring and knocks down some disciples. The president sees that this competition is strange and full of surprises. Elder Chu reminds him that three years ago he said that Asma loved Wang, but the president sees that Lu Sheng is smarter than Wang and definitely has a trump card he is saving for last. Elder Chu tells the president that the dragon's aura has affected the disciples outside the ring and that he is going to intervene. Despite all this, Lu Sheng stands firm like a lion. Wang tells him that he has exceeded his expectations, but how long will he be able to hold on? He begins to put pressure on Sheng with the dragon's power and asks him to kneel at his feet. The students are amazed by Wang's power. Although Elder Chu shielded them from most of the roars caused by the dragon's aura, some of them are still bumping into each other. The trainer says that psychic attacks affect the mind, not the body, which is the opposite of what happened to Sheng. His disciple saw Sheng biting his tongue to stay awake, and blood dripping from Sheng's mouth after biting his tongue. He tells Wang, "You want me to kneel, and you don't even deserve Lu Sheng to bow to you." He tells him that he surprised him again that he is still conscious, but that does not negate that his mind has been severely damaged. Wang tells Sheng that if he tries to attack him with force, he will die. He asks him to surrender. Sheng says, "You think so? Then don't blame yourself for what will happen now." But Sheng activates the Demon God technique and many illusory copies emerge, attacking Wang from all sides and creating a black cloud around him, making Wang say to himself, "What is Sheng planning for me?" The disciples outside can't see anything from the fog and say, "What is Sheng planning to do, and why isn't the cloud moving?" They say Sheng must have done it intentionally. Wang tells Sheng that he knows that demonic energy can absorb the energy of others within it. He says, "I don't know what you're trying to do either, but I'll tell you that this won't work with me." Sheng says, "Now, no one can see the ring, right?" He draws his sword, which he always tries to hide his abilities from everyone. Wang draws the Dragon Summoning Spear. When the disciples see it, they say he is finished, and that for a long time there has been no one as talented in Dew Peak as Sheng, but his end will be at Wang's hands. But Sheng's teammate tells his trainer not to listen to them and that Sheng is capable of miracles and surpassing Wang. The trainer says he knows that well. The students outside the ring have started to fall from the power of the aura in the ring, and the elder moves to save them. The president is watching in silence and contemplation and asks the elder, "What is happening inside, and why is there such a strong roar?" He tells him that Wang is amazing and managed to use the dragon spear until the dragon itself appeared. Most likely, Lu Sheng is alive. But the president has a different opinion and says that this type of dragon cannot be born from a spear, no matter how strong the spear holder is. He sees that what he is hearing is a real dragon. The elder says, "Impossible, because real dragons are just myths and legends and cannot exist in reality." The president tells him that ten years ago, in the battle of the clouds, he saw the dragon Wyvern, but this dragon's roar is something else entirely. He tells him that this aura resembles the aura in Wang's spear and is annoyed because he cannot see anything from the mist that Sheng created. Suddenly, the mist ends, and Lu Sheng appears, collapsed like a lion, and Wang is lying on the ground. Trainer Yun screams, "Lu Sheng, Lu Sheng!" The disciples are in shock and say, "So Lu Sheng is standing, and Wang is on the ground." Then Sheng retreats in his memory to what happened inside the mist when he summoned the blue dragon and finished off Wang. Then he took his spear and turned it into a purple dagger with his dragon and tried to repair Wang's destroyed spirit. He tells him, "I don't know how you will react after this, but I will leave it to your conscience." Finally, the referee announces Lu Sheng's victory. The referee saw that Sheng's aura was unaffected. Chu asks Sheng what happened in the ring that made Wang fall to the ground. Sheng says, "The end of the fight must be someone on the ground, naturally. If it wasn't Wang on the ground, it would have been me." He tells him, "That's an irrelevant question, but can you tell me what happened?" Sheng tells him, "I don't remember either, but what I saw was that Wang ran at me with his spear and let out a dragon's roar, and rainbow rays appeared, and then Wang fell to the ground, and I felt power after this dagger covered my body." The president says, "Could it be the light of the Seven Star Grass?" He answers himself, "Impossible, because the Eastern Provinces do not have this type of sacred herb." Wang tells them, "That's enough, what happened has happened. Just reassure me about Wang." But the elder doesn't believe Sheng. Sheng tells him that he will help Wang regain consciousness and then ask him what happened. As soon as Wang wakes up, he asks for his spear. His trainer tells him, "Did you put it in the spatial ring?" He says, "No." So he asks him, "What happened when you were fighting Lu Sheng, and what was that dragon's roar we heard?" He tells him that he only heard a dragon's roar and then lost consciousness. So he tells him, "Maybe the spear destroyed itself and made that sound." He says, "Your words are logical, my friend." Elder Chu asks Wang if he saw rainbow rays entering his head. He tells him, "What are rainbow rays?" He tells him, "Do you feel that your spirit has become stronger?" He says, "Yes, even though the spear has disappeared." The president stands looking at Sheng as if he knows exactly what happened. We go to Mu from Tian Yi Peak, who looks at Sheng and says his name, asking what advantages Princess Su gave him. He says if he had known this would happen, he would have done everything he could to include Lu Sheng in the Tian sect. We go to the final battle. The referee sees that Lu Sheng will win first place, and the rest of the committee says it's difficult to judge the first-place winner now, especially since Hao Yitian and Bai Tian have not lost yet. The students of Dew Peak are happy that their sect will compete for first and second place at the peak level, and their training expenses will increase, and their fame will return as before. A student from Yun sect says that at this exact time three years ago, Lu Yan, Sheng's sister, reached Yun Peak in second place by herself. Who would have thought that her brother, Lu Sheng, three years later, would repeat the same miracle? Finally, we reach the end of the competition and the final round, which will be between friends. The first contender, Lu Sheng, from Dew Peak, and the second contender, Hao Yitian, from Tian Peak. Lu Sheng stands on the ring and tells Hao Yitian, "Finally, we will compete. I have been waiting for this day since we fought." Hao Yitian tells him, "I have been waiting too, but I see that you have improved a lot more than I expected." The audience listens to the conversation of the champions and says, "What is this? They know each other very well." Some want to see Hao Yitian's sword, and Sheng says that he intended not to use his sword throughout the competition. He tells the audience that he is thirsty to see you holding the sword. So he tells him, "I told you before, I won't draw my sword unless I need it." So Sheng asks him, "Well, now?" Hao Yitian replies, "Of course I will use it." He puts his hand on the sword and draws it. The astonished audience, as soon as they see the sword, finds it rusty, and a commotion occurs in the place. We hear them saying, "How has Hao Yitian been carrying this piece of junk with him for so long?" Some say, "This cannot be Hao Yitian's sword," and others say, "It cannot be an ordinary sword because of Hao Yitian's fame and strength." But Lu Sheng sees something different from the audience and tells Hao Yitian that he saw his sword before in the battle of Lian Shi's techniques, and that this sword absorbs blood, and that the bloodstains on the sword will not disappear even after a thousand years. Lu Sheng draws his sword and tells Hao Yitian that its name is Flowing Light, and it is a low-grade immortal sword made recently. Hao Yitian tells him that this sword was made by Qi Duoji and not completed. He asks Sheng who helped him complete the sword. Sheng tells him that he made it himself when he was at the peak of Ju last time. Hao Yitian is astonished and tells him, "What are you saying? You made it yourself?" Sheng tells him, "I can't wait any longer. Let's start the fight." The elite audience and warriors are incredulous that Sheng also makes swords and think he is lying because no matter how strong a warrior is, there are limits, and Sheng's limits will never reach sword making. In the Jian Ji sect, they go to confirm the truth of Lu's words, but the president, who admires Lu, sees no need for investigation because he already believes Lu Sheng and says that he has many surprises that make him believe that he made a sacred sword himself, let alone believe him if he told him he was an immortal in his past life. Elder Chu sighs when he hears the poem the president is reciting. Lu Sheng and the president continue their conversation, telling him it was a joke, don't take it to heart. But Lu Sheng has proven his abilities. If he is helped a little, he will have a great future in the Cloud Hall. We go to the sword arena to hear and see the sound of panic and fear, and hear Hao Yitian telling Sheng that he reached the heavenly realm when he was 16 years old, and since then, no one has been able to stand against him in the entire Eastern Province. He started training with the sword when he was six years old, and he learned a little about sword aura when he was ten years old and was close to mastering the sword aura completely when he was thirteen years old. That's why I defeated Bai Tian before you. Now it's your turn, Lu, and I will use all my energy to win first place. Sheng says, "Let's start fighting instead of talking." He begins with the sword steps he is famous for, and Lu focuses on them, acknowledging that Hao Yitian's swordsmanship is better than his. The exciting display begins from Hao's side with the cheers of the audience, who call it brilliant and wish they could learn the sword steps to be like Hao Yitian. We go to Hao Yitian, who continues the show in front of Cheng, who is focused on him as if he were a student learning, not a warrior. He draws the Tian Chuan sword and Sheng says he draws his power from the sky and feels its immense power, but he sees that he can deal with the sword's power because it is borrowed power from the sky, not original. Lu Sheng draws his sword and begins the display with light hand movements. The audience is enjoying it and sees this match as an important training session in sword fighting techniques from which they can learn a lot. They are counting his moves in the ring. Hao Yitian, who is proficient with his sword and very confident, believes he can defeat Lu Sheng with just his sword moves. He activates the technique of merging the four swords: the Heavenly Virtue Sword, the Heavenly Star Sword, the Heavenly Jade Sword, and the Heavenly Pearl Sword. This causes a great commotion among the warriors in the elite hall, who see that Lu Sheng is in big trouble. For 800 years, no one has been able to truly master this technique, and very few can train in heavenly sword techniques in the world. Hao Yitian begins the terrifying display with his miracle sword, with cheers and gasps from the excited audience. Lu Sheng sees that the next blow will be very powerful and there must be a way to deal with it. Despite the borrowed power, the blow is very strong and renewable. After thinking for a short while, Sheng reaches the way he will face the powerful incoming blow through the power of striking the stars and basic sword movements to create the strongest sword attack. Indeed, Lu Sheng begins to show his sword aura and directs the finishing blow towards Hao Yitian's powerful sword strike. Each of them shouts, "I am the winner! I am the winner!" Their swords collide in a purely heavenly encounter, which ends with Lu Sheng's incredible defensive ability to block Hao Yitian's unbelievable and irrefutable sword attack. The audience's minds fly into the sky with the heavenly swords, not believing that Sheng was able to block the merged heavenly sword attack. They see that Lu Sheng has become terrifying and is a strong contender for winning the match. Hao Yitian is still in shock and cannot believe that Sheng possesses the power of the stars, which is not just borrowed power, but internal power originating from within Sheng himself, which no one has ever possessed in the Eastern Province. Before this moment, he thought his only opponent in the Eastern Province was Baiyan, and he sees that the battle is even and that he still has opportunities to win the round and break through the crystal world. He sees himself as too great for the Eastern Province and that he must become the strongest in the entire world. Before achieving this dream, fate has placed Sheng in his path, so he sees it as a gift from heaven and must defeat Lu Sheng. He sees that he must not underestimate Lu Sheng and attack him with all his might. Hao Yitian says that when facing the illuminated swords, his sword splits the sky in half, and he begins to split it. A storm descends from the sky, causing the audience to writhe in pain from the strong winds. But Lu Sheng, who is very confident, tells himself that his fighting skills are no less than Hao's, and that he also wants to see the peak of the world of martial arts. The sword aura begins to appear on each of them at the same time, but the excited audience is impatient and dislikes the verbal war between the two, and is eager to see the sword fight. Bai sees that Mu was right when she said that Sheng and Hao have indeed reached the full sword aura. The president is surprised and says, "How did both of them acquire the full sword aura at the same time without us hearing a sound?" He sees that they attacked each other very quickly in a way that absorbed sound, and then sat down to contemplate the sword intent. The audience can no longer comprehend what happened due to the speed and keeps asking, "What's going on? Who won against whom? Why are they sitting down?" Then Elder Chu comes and tells them to stop making noise, because if he hears anyone's voice, they will be expelled from the hall to give Sheng a chance to focus on reaching the enlightenment world. We go to Sheng in the heavens, which are full of swords, and he asks himself, "Where am I? What are all these swords? What will happen if I use them all at once?" He answers himself, "It seems that all the dragon scales within me have been awakened." Suddenly, he gets up and tries to pull them, but he cannot. He hears a voice saying that he is currently in the Sword Sacrifice Mountain, and that this is the sacred place for all swordsmen, and that he is lucky to have come here. The swords he sees are reflections of other swordsmen's swords, and no matter how hard he tries, he cannot remove the sword from its place. So Sheng asks him, "Who are you?" He laughs and tells him that he has been in his mind all along, and he didn't notice his presence. So Sheng tells him, "Then you are the Green Dragon." He says, "Yes, I am the Green Dragon inside your mind." Sheng then begins to contemplate the Sacrifice Mountain and says, "What are the laws here?" The dragon replies, "Sacrifice is not always for evil, and it can be used to achieve justice if used correctly. Your mission is to climb the mountain and plant a sword on it." He tells him that this world is much bigger than he imagines. If he had the ability to reach here, how far he could reach will depend on his own abilities. Sheng begins to climb and tells himself that this is easy, but the dragon laughs and tells him, "Okay, show me then." The higher you climb, the greater your reward will be. As he climbs, he sees sword auras of the Shining grade and knows that some people have mastered sword aura at the marrow solidification stage. He pays his respects to the swords and continues on his way. He sees shining objects flying around the swords and asks the dragon about them. He tells him that they are sword spirits, to give the swords freedom of thought. He says that these spirits build themselves gradually until they reach a certain level, and his sword will grow and have a body. Sheng tells himself that he has obtained a lot of sword spirit essence and that he has easily climbed the Sacrifice Mountain. The dragon tells him that he was able to climb easily because his sword aura is high, but his end will be halfway up the mountain. He tells him that it is a good result for his first time here. Sheng tells him that he will not plant his sword here and that he will climb to the summit of the mountain. Then he sees a woman sitting there. He asks, "A sacred sword?" But the dragon tells him that it is a complete sword spirit and that he must kill it to obtain more sword spirit essence. The spirit begins to attack Sheng, and the spirit begins to show its sword aura, which transforms into tiger, snake, and crocodile monsters. The spirit tells him that he is not bad and has reached the halfway point. It tells him to plant his sword in the ground to merge with the Sword Sacrifice rope and receive many invaluable rewards. But Sheng tells her, "No, I want to plant my sword on the summit of the mountain." The spirit gets angry and tells him, "No matter how strong your determination, power is the measure here, and your power does not allow you to go further." He tells her, "I will try." He looks ahead and sees a sword of the Xuan grade. He shouts and tells himself that a swordsman reached the halfway point of the mountain with a Xuan grade sword, so how can he not climb to the summit? The dragon replies, "No, because the owner of the sword is from the Yao clan, and they have immense power that enabled them to reach the halfway point of the mountain with a Xuan grade sword." The dragon says, "When a child is born in the Yao clan, he receives a heavenly level fighter's qi because they are born with natural spiritual power." Sheng is surprised that they are born with natural spiritual power. The dragon tells him that the world is very big and difficult to imagine, but he should not discourage his determination with his skills and luck. The dragon says to himself that despite everything he told him, Sheng still has a strong will, as if he hadn't said anything. It seems I underestimated him. Sheng tells the dragon, "You told me I could achieve great things in the Qin Yun sector even though I was born with a low status, but I will not look back and say I did this and that. I will only look forward." The dragon says that Sheng has become interesting and that he will awaken the third dragon within him, but he will wait a little longer. Sheng continues on his way and takes advantage of not encountering any spirits, telling himself, "Maybe because my sword aura is strong." Suddenly, he sees his sword shaking and transforming into a human form, and a beautiful girl emerges from it. He tells himself, "Who is this? I have never met her before in my life. Why did the spirit that came out of my sword in the form of a girl look strange?" The dragon tells him that she might be the owner of the short sword from the Yao Yi clan. Sheng replies, "She is more beautiful than the Yao warriors and even more beautiful than the Bashir." He asks him if she is dead. The dragon tells him that every sword has an owner who is alive in reality, and when the owner of the sword dies, the sword sinks into the mountain. He tells him that as long as this girl and the sword are here, the owner of the sword must be somewhere. Sheng continues climbing until he sees a sacred sword with a slightly higher power than other ordinary sacred swords. Suddenly, the sword materializes in human form and tells Sheng, "You are from the second rank of the heavenly realm. What brought you here?" Sheng tells him, "What is this?"

The spirit of the sword is speaking, or did your master leave you a part of his spirit? He says to him, "I don't know how you got this far, but I advise you not to take another step forward." Shang says to him that he will not stop until he reaches the summit of the mountain and continues his way. The spirit of the sword says, "When I came here, my goal was to reach the summit, but he couldn't take another step further than here." He says to Shang, "Do you think you are better than me?" Shang replies, "Fight me and you will see." The duel begins. The spirit says to Shang, "This is primitive, but he has developed it. Unfortunately, he is still in the world of the sky." Shang replies, "So you will feel your strength when you say this to me, for example?" He says, "You are just a spirit with a part of your master's spirit, but I am the spirit of a sword with its owner, with his full spirit. If you thought you could stop me, you are dreaming." The spirit says that he has been training his whole life and that he can destroy him. He then unleashes the Frost Dive technique on Shang. Shang tests his new sword spirit and unleashes it on him. He makes a mistake, disbelieving himself, and says, "Where did you get this power from?" Shang continues his ascent. After a while, he stops and says to himself, "My sword spirit turned out to be stronger than I imagined." He thinks about burying his sword here. The dragon says to him, "You have achieved a great feat by reaching this point, and you will not be able to defeat the sword in front of you." He carves and buries his sword here. Shang says, "Winning against this sword is indeed difficult, but I will try." He pulls out his sword, and the dragon screams, "My son, do you know what this place is? Are you not afraid of what might happen to you here?" But Shang succeeds and triumphs over the sword. The dragon transforms into a fox made of ice. He says, "What is happening here?" Shang reaches the summit of the mountain and buries his sword. The dragon congratulates him and tells him to make the most of this opportunity. Then the dragon excuses himself to go to sleep. The impatient audience calls out to Lu Shang, who is coming to sleep here, and they say, "Get up, man!" Shang gets up, but he is still lost in his meditation. Lightning winds swirl around Hua Tian. Shang has acquired the lightning attributes. The audience sees a big difference between the two after they woke up, because lightning winds appeared around Hua Tian, but Shang remains the same. Shang says to Hua Tian, "I have been gifted by heaven." Hua Tian tells him that he attacked him with all his might before meditation, but he admits his defeat. But now the situation is different, and he wants to challenge him again. Shang says, "I will not refuse your request, and let the next round determine the winner." The supporting audience is afraid that Hua Tian will kill Lu Shang because they have bet their money on him. Suddenly, the beautiful girl Shang met on the Sword Mountain appears in the arena, on her sword spirit. Master Wen is impressed by her beauty. Mu asks, "Who is this woman?" and remembers where she has seen her before. The veteran president, as soon as he saw her, knew she was a sword spirit in the form of a girl. Mu asks Bai about her and says she feels she is not human. He tells her she is a sword spirit. She says, "So what? What's new? We've seen a lot." Hua Tian is surprised and says he thought heaven favored him because it gave him the lightning spirit, and he didn't expect it to give Shang a human form. The shocked audience is surprised that this beautiful girl is a sword spirit and says that a warrior needs three to ten years of meditation for a sword spirit to appear. Hua Tian says that when he entered the Sword Technique Pool, he didn't see Shang there and asks where Shang went during meditation. Shang says to him, "If you don't tell me what you're hiding, I'll excuse you." Shang replies, "I have nothing to hide from you. I was in the Slaughter Sword Mountain." Hua Tian is surprised and says, "You are the only one I feel weak against, and I always feel like I can't catch up to you, but you always make me want to follow you, because that will make me stronger." He thinks about the surprise and tells Shang that he knows he lost this battle before he even entered it, but he wants to finish it to the end. Shang begins his attack, and his terrifying sword aura appears and transforms into a demon. The audience falls to the ground in surprise when they see the aura transform into a demon and wonder what happened to Shang when he was meditating. The fierce battle begins with a volcano of rage and demonic fury from Lu Shang, forcing Hua Tian to retreat and surrender immediately. This leaves Hua Tian paralyzed with shock. The audience in the hall dances and cheers for Shang, shouting, "First, first!" and Coach Wen stands looking at Shang with pride and admiration. The audience shouts from the arena to Shang, "What are you doing, man? You are first, first! You are the strongest, dude!" But he deals with it objectively, saying to himself, "I am not the strongest yet. We don't know Bai Tian's true strength yet." The next round begins between the first contender, Bai, and the second contender, Mu. Shang is the real contender, but Mu teases Shang and sticks out her tongue at him. Shang is the opposite partner. We move to the next round, which will be between the first contender, Hua Tian Ming, and the second contender, Bai Tian Yao. Shang is enjoying himself and sees this as a true fight. We go to the arena and find the verbal war has begun. Bai has been waiting for this moment for a long time, and he has also been waiting for this moment for a long time. We get straight to the point, and the battle begins between the two sides. We see the wind, the waving, and the audience, who are always with us, seeing that his body is very strong, even stronger than Lu Shang's body, because he uses the great Thousand Hands technique and blocks all the blows from Hua's sword with his palm. The audience is living the role and says that Bai is just warming up and hasn't started the real fight yet. Despite Hua making several attacks from Buddhist origins, even though there are no Buddhist temples in the Eastern Province. We go to Bai, who is ready to get serious and begins his first moves, but Hua's response is very quick, and he attacks with the Heavenly Sword of Polar Lightning. Bai tries to stop him, but Hua says, "Do you think you can stop the power of the heavens so easily?" Hua actually succeeds in breaking Bai's defenses easily, but Bai surprises him with a Buddhist fist. The audience can't believe it and says that to deliver such an attack, he must have Buddhist blood. They see that Bai might have re-divided himself to have all these Buddhist attacks. But the stubborn Hua says, "Is this all you have? Well, today I am either a killer or killed, and I will not leave the arena unless I am victorious or dead." The attack begins, and as soon as he reaches Bai, he withdraws. Shang is surprised and says, "Is it possible that Hua lost so easily?" Bai tells Hua that although he hasn't entered the Crystal World yet, he has forced him to show his true strength and asks him not to lose heart and continue his training, because soon he might not be able to defeat him. But Hua says that he lost and that this is not the end of the world, and that eventually they will meet again. Bai admires his personality and says that although he has been defeated twice in a row, he is confident and maintains his composure. Bai leaves the arena and says to Shang Shang, "Do you want to meet now, or should we schedule it for three days?" Shang replies, "Without your strength, it will not be an honor for me, so I will wait for you." A date is set for the final match after three days. Then Shang goes to the clan leader and asks to visit his sister. He tells him he will pay her bail of 200 million crystal pieces and 100 million points. The leader is shocked and says, "How did you gather all this money?" But Shang says, "It doesn't matter how I gathered it. What matters is that I want to redeem my sister with all this money." The leader tells him that even if he pays these huge amounts, he will not be able to free her, and that the matter is not that simple. He tells him that his sister was his best student and that if the problem was with the Yan family, who wronged their son, he would have wiped them off the face of the earth to protect her from them. But no one can get her out of the Purifying Mountain. He tells Shang that he is currently very weak and that when he reaches the Crystal World or the higher worlds, then he will be able to save her. Shang asks him what happened to her to be thrown into this situation. He tells him that his sister Yan has a special type of body, the negative violet, and that he is the one who gave them this body, so their strength is greater than others. Shang says, "So you mean someone wants to take my sister's body?" The leader tells him that the negative violet cannot be extracted from the body, but the owner of the body itself can be extracted. He tells him that in the Central Province, there is someone building a huge heavenly demon array, and to build it, he needs three girls with the negative violet body who have reached the realm of the God's Land. Shang gets angry and says to the leader, "So this cursed person wants to use my sister in a demonic array?" Then he tells him that his sister has not reached the God's Land at all. He told him, "That's why we say she is weak, so we don't hand her over to them." Shang gets very upset and says that he still needs more strength to be able to free his sister. Then he asks the leader to let him see her at least. The leader agrees and asks Elder Su to take him to her. He rides with him on a leaf boat. The elder warns Shang, telling him that he knows the extent of a man's feelings for his sister, but he must be patient until he has enough strength to free her. Shang tells him, "Don't worry." We go to Yan, who is thinking about Shang and says, "I wonder if Shang participated in the summit competitions or not." She says she is afraid they will prevent him from participating due to his low level. Then she comforts herself and says, "At least he is strong within his summit." Suddenly, she sees him standing in front of her and runs to him, throwing herself into his arms, crying. Then she asks him, "How did you get here? And why did Elder Su bring you himself?" He tells her that he participated in the summit competition. She asks him about his ranking in the competition. He tells her he still has one round left that will determine his rank. She sits and thinks, but the elder tells her that her brother will play in the final in three days. She doesn't believe it and says, "How? You were in the second level of the Sky World." He tells her, "That's right." Then she thinks for a moment and says that she knew her brother was the best and asks him to let her see him and support him in the final. He is shocked and his tongue is tied, not knowing how to react in this sad situation. Shang has been imprisoned for a long time, and he is waiting for the opportunity, and she will be disguised in a mask, hopping like a child. She says, "I want to see my brother's brilliance in battle." The kind elder's heart softens, and he agrees. The awaited day arrives for the summit competition and the final round. The security organizes the entry of spectators, and Yan is very happy seeing the large crowd coming to watch her brother. Shang notices and asks who she is and why she is wearing a veil. He tells him she is wearing it to hide her beauty. The disciples feel her great beauty even with the veil, as well as her strong state. Mu says that if Shang chases girls from now on. We go to the battle, and the audience thinks it's hard to predict the winner yet. They see that although Bai defeated Hua Tian more easily than Fu Shang defeated him, they expect Fu Shang to defeat Bai. On the battlefield, we see Bai thanking Shang for waiting three days for him and telling him that if he had faced him then, he would have had difficulty winning. Shang says, "There's no need for thanks, because I waited for you to satisfy my fighting spirit." Bai is impressed and says, "I have never seen anyone with your ambitions or skills before." Shang says, "Enough talk, because I am in a hurry to win." He summons the Dragon Guardian and starts the attack this time. Bai activates the defensive Golden Gourd technique, but Shang destroys it with his fist on the first blow. The audience is shocked by Shang's power, which destroyed Bai on the first blow, and they renew their bets on Shang, asking him not to disappoint them. Bai says it's the first time he's been angry in front of an opponent and that he's going to make Shang's life hell. He asks Shang, "Where did you get all this power from? And why is your fighting power so much greater than your level?" Shang says he still has enough power to attack him. Bai thinks, "Shang surpassed me in the first attack, even though it wasn't his best." Shang stands in his place, and the audience is shocked and says, "Is Shang going to surrender or kill him with his bare hands?" Yan is very happy with her brother's strength, which is challenging his strong opponent in physical strength. The fight begins with bare hands. The audience is surprised that Shang is silent despite receiving several punches from Bai, any one of which would have destroyed a mountain. They see that Shang will not last long, unlike Yan, who hears them and says to herself, "One blow from my brother is equal to three or four punches from his opponent, and that's why he doesn't feel the punches." Bai hits Shang and is surprised that he is happy because he is hitting him. Shang realizes he was wrong to think he could defeat Shang with his physical strength alone. So he summons the Buddha. The audience sees that the Buddha this time is much stronger than the last time in front of Hua and Shang. He tries, but the Buddha wipes the floor with him. Shang summons the Night Fairy Sword Spirit to finish off the Buddha, but Bai surprises him and creates a tornado. Shang wonders what this tornado will do. The president is nervous, and the fight looks very enjoyable. The audience is engaged with the beautiful fairy and says, "How could Lu Shang let this beauty fight for him?" He tells him that if Shang hadn't been there, they would have summoned her just to watch her beauty. Yan is very surprised and happy with her brother's strength. Hua Tian is preparing the move and says that Shang is far superior to him in strength. Bai, who is starting to get angry, tells himself that he must remain calm and focused, no matter how much the world shakes around him. He summons the Buddha again and activates the Green Flame technique, asking him to turn the sky to ash and the earth to hell. He attacks the fairy with it. Shang's limited power is exhausted, and he asks her to retreat. Shang's coach, seeing the great green flame dominating the battlefield, says that if Shang doesn't get out of here alive this time, the audience's eyes hurt just from looking at the green flame from afar and say, "What is Shang doing inside this fire?" Yan tries to climb into the arena to save her brother, but Bai's coach stops her and tells her that the fight is not over yet. She defies him and wants to fight him. The audience is going crazy and says, "How can this beautiful girl have all this strength?" They say that even the beautiful women around Shang are very strong. The fire begins to subside, and Shang is happy that his brother is okay. Bai can't believe it, and the shock will kill him. Shang tells him, "Of course, you have a victory you didn't expect." He points to his body and tells Bai that this is his spirit weapon body at a high level. Bai can't stand the surprise and surrenders immediately. The referee declares Lu Shang the winner. Shang goes to Bai and tells him that his power is immense and that he is lucky because he has the natural counter to his moves. Bai congratulates him and congratulates him on his victory, telling him that he knows he is trying to console him and that he will not give up after one loss. Shang looks at the sad Bai, who is looking at Shang with admiration. The elder calls out to the audience to announce the ranking of the summit competition. Suddenly, someone appears running from afar and says that the competition is not over yet and that he wants to participate. Everyone is surprised, including Lu Shang himself. Joe appears from the Cloud Peak, level six of the Crystal World, who is Bai Tian's older brother, who just lost to Shang a little while ago. Joe asks Bai why his face is sad. He tells him he lost because his opponent was stronger than him. Joe doesn't like the calm way Bai is talking after losing to someone from the second level of the Sky World and wants revenge. But Bai stops his brother Joe and tells him, "This was just a competition, and he lost it. I don't want revenge." The elder asks him why he stopped his training and came. Joe says he has advanced three levels and reached the sixth level of the Crystal World during his training. The elder says, "Excellent." He returns to continue his talk about the summit ranking, but Joe screams, "Please wait! My name is registered on the Cloud Peak list, and I have the right to participate." The audience is excited and calls out to the elder, telling him to let him fight, and he goes with the flow of the crowd. He tells the elder that the audience wants to see him fight. Shang calls out to Joe, and he says, "What is this? What are you doing here?" Before she can say her name, she threatens him, "Don't forget the pact between us." He tells her he hasn't forgotten. She says, "Yes, that's right." The students' audience, when they see Joe bowing to her, know she is Yan, Shang's sister, because Joe lost to her before, and since then, every time he sees her, he must bow to her and call her "My Lady." Yan tells Joe that if he fights her brother, he should only use his sword and not energy attacks. She tells him that Shang is 14 levels below him, and if he defeats him with his full power, it will not be an honorable victory. The elder sees Yan's suggestion as a good one and says that both of them will fight with swords as their primary weapon. Joe challenges Shang to a sword fight and says, "Shang is an easy opponent for me." The audience sees Joe's magnificent weapon and offers condolences to Lu Shang. Lu Shang sees this as an opportunity to test his sword skills against a true swordsman. The verbal battle begins between the two. Shang draws his sword and says, "Joe, show me what you've got." Joe objects to Shang's stance and says, "You are underestimating me, and I will not fight." Shang cunningly says, "If you don't want to fight, surrender." Joe says, "Impossible to surrender. Stand however you like." He tells Shang, "If you force me to draw my sword, I will call you 'Grandpa'." The audience finds the conversation very entertaining and says that Joe is playing with fire with Shang. Shang says, "And don't forget me." The attack begins, and Joe attacks, who is very flexible and dodges Shang like a snake. Shang touches him but causes him fatigue. Joe, the evasive one, calls out to the elder and says that Shang is using non-basic sword techniques. The elder tells him that the restrictions are only on energy attacks, not on techniques. Shang tells him, "I didn't say I would only use basic sword techniques. You are making things up." The elder tells them to stop talking and continue fighting. Joe is surprised and finally draws his sword. The audience, who has now memorized the situation, doesn't miss a beat and starts teasing Joe, who said he wouldn't draw his sword, and tells him that he has lost the bet. Joe stands in front of Shang, sweating and with a red face, and says to Shang, "Grandpa." The audience cheers, "What grandpa? Grandpa!" Yan, the kind one, laughs and says, "He forgot. My brother is his grandpa." The audience laughs at her words. Joe tells Shang that he underestimated him and that the real fight will begin now, and he will know who Joe Shi is. He tells him that his old sword style is a bit strange, but it's nothing special, and tells him to watch him destroy it with his style. Joe begins a very complex and fierce attack that makes Shang say, "How will I stop this attack?" Shang begins to defend desperately. Joe says, "You have already lost. How long can you defend?" The elder sees that Joe is far superior to Shang and that Shang cannot withstand this attack with ordinary sword skills. Shang immediately defends. "Well, will he lose here?" Suddenly, Joe's sword appears, breaking it in half. Joe is stunned, looking at the rest of the sword in his hand. The beautiful Yan continues to laugh. Joe goes crazy and asks the master to lend him his sword. The master tells him not to take swords. He calls out from above the arena to the disciples, his peers, "Is there anyone here who will lend me his sword?" No one answers him. He tells them that if he doesn't join the Cloud Hall, he will be their elder and make their lives miserable. He goes to Yan, and she returns his Cloud Sword, which she took from him when she defeated him here three years ago. She tries to tease him and says, "What sword do you have with me?" He tells her, "The sword I lost to you in the bet." She says, "No." But Shang asks Yan to give him the sword so he has no excuse when he loses. She agrees, and the fight begins again. Joe says, "Shang, show me how you will block this attack now that I have my Cloud Sword." He asks him to accept defeat and says, "I thought you knew your place when you were defending against me and broke my sword, but it just happened by chance." Shang attacks with all his might, forcing him to retreat until he is almost falling out of the arena. Yan watches, sad for him, and is afraid her brother will fall out of the arena and lose the battle. Shang takes steps until he reaches the edge of the arena, but the King Shang surprises him with a fierce attack and turns the tables, bringing Joe towards the edge. Joe understands that Shang wants him to lose his balance and fall out of the arena. He thinks about moving away from the edge quickly, but he can't. He says, "Without using energy, it's impossible for me to create distance between myself and Shang." The audience is engaged and optimistic, changing the course of the battle in their favor, saying he won't be defeated easily and that this match is truly worthy of being the final. Yan stands looking at her brother with pride and admiration. Shang corners Joe in the corner of the arena. Joe asks Shang to move back a bit and give him a chance to attack. Shang gets angry and unleashes the Mountain Cutter technique, but Shang knocks the sword out of his hand, sending it flying to the ground. Joe says, "No, I'm not convinced by this. How can I lose to you, you guy?" The referee asks Joe to accept defeat. Joe tells Shang, "If we were using energy, I would have defeated you in three moves. We will meet again one day, and I will defeat you again." Then the elder declares Lu Shang the champion of the competition. The audience cheers and shouts Lu Shang's name. The elder goes to Shang and tells him that the president wants to meet him. He also calls for Hua Tian and Bai Tian and tells them that they must go with him to change their clothes first. Yan, the cunning one, goes to provoke Joe and tells him, "Why didn't you go with them?" He tells her, "Because the president doesn't like me like this," in the voice of a five-year-old child. Yan tells him, "You did this to yourself because the last time you went to visit him, you fell asleep on the way." Lu Shang and his friends arrive at the president's palace after changing into their formal attire and pay their respects. The president tells Shang that he has the right to choose a magical weapon, which pleases him. He thinks to himself, "It would be nice if I had a magical weapon for the Night Demon." The president asks him to step forward to choose. Hua Tian focuses on Shang, who says he must choose a mid-level weapon, of which there are only three. He goes to the first weapon and says it's good for healing the spirit but doesn't suit his style. The second is suitable for violent combat but is too heavy and also doesn't suit his style. He goes to the third sword and asks the president its name. The president tells him its name is Blood Drinker. Shang says, "I expected you to choose it, but I warn you, this sword is for killing, and you will pay a great price if you use it." He asks him to think for a moment. Hua Tian, who is focused on Shang, says that the president doesn't know that Shang has reached the Sword Mountain and can use the mountain's aura to suppress the sword's evil energy. Shang actually chooses the Blood Drinker sword. The president says, "As you wish, and Blood Drinker is now yours." Then the sword bearers walk away. Hua Tian is sad that they left because he also wants a sword like Shang. The elder tells Shang to come and receive his second prize, which is a King Shu pill. He gets on the arena and says that after entering the Crystal World, one faces difficulty controlling the increase in power, and this pill's purpose is to facilitate the use of power, and that many elders cannot obtain this power. He says that Shang has a long way to go to the Crystal World and regrets wasting this opportunity. Then the president calls three fighters to talk to them about the trial path. He tells them not to worry, and that the trial path in the Eastern Province is not difficult compared to other regions, and that each of them is considered a genius among their peers, and he guarantees their success there. Hua Tian asks the president, "Is this path a literal path?" The president replies, "No, but they call it a path because it is a series of tests. If they pass, they will obtain membership in the Cloud Hall." He tells them that whoever succeeds in entering the Cloud Hall will have a higher status than the emperor. Then, when Shang hears about the Cloud Hall, he remembers Prince Su and apologizes for not attending the Cloud Hall trials, telling the president that he has a priority he must attend to. The intelligent president immediately understands and says, "I knew you were a good boy and wouldn't forget Princess Su." He tells him that he needs more power now to be able to help her. He reassures him about the princess and says she is part of his clan and he won't let anyone get close to her. He tells him that he must prepare for the trial, which will be in a month. Shang thanks the president very much. Then Lu Shang returns to the Dew Summit headquarters. As soon as he enters, he remembers the princess and vows to become strong to protect her. The disciples of the Dew Summit welcome him, as his presence has raised their status among the peaks. Outside the summit headquarters, Su says she will return to the Purifying Mountain in a month and will spend this month enjoying it with her brother. Suddenly, they see a huge figure looking at them from the sky, his face covering the entire Eastern Province, so much so that people think it's God. He is a very powerful person and begins to shout, "Come out now, Shi Keng Tian Ying!" Hua Tian is surprised by the immense power and asks himself how far away this person is. He is still calling for Shi Keng Tian Ying. Then he says to the president, "Where is Lu Yan, whose power is supposed to be increasing in the Purifying Mountain?" He says he hasn't seen her energy in the Purifying Mountain for three days. Of course, the president is silent and doesn't know what to say. Shang looks at him with hatred. Yan, his sister, runs to hide behind her. He says to himself, "So this is the power of the masters of the Central Province that the clan leader told me about." He tells him that he has one month to bring her to him, otherwise it will not be good. He asks if he has found a way to increase her level to the God's Land quickly. The people in the street see Lu Yan as lucky because someone like this wants to help her, according to them, and any of them would dream of reaching this level. They also see the Lu family as lucky because they have two geniuses like Yan and Shang. Shang tells her, "Don't be afraid, as long as your brother is by your side." The heavenly boogeyman tells the president that if he doesn't bring him Yan within a month, he will wipe the Tuo clan from the face of the earth. He stands looking at Shang until he disappears completely. The poor Yan waits for her brother Shang and tells him she is scared and doesn't want to go. He tells her, "Don't worry, he can't do anything to you before you reach the God's Land." He tells her, "Just wait for me until I kill him." She sees that it's impossible for anyone to kill him. He asks her if she remembers when he met her in the mountain last time, did she think he would reach the power he has now? She said no. He said, "Then keep believing in your brother." He tells her to look him in the eye and then says, "I swear by the heart of my martial arts that I will kill him." She is shocked and says, "No, you shouldn't have made such a big oath, because she knows he is a fighter. If he breaks his oath on the heart of his martial arts, he will never be able to increase his power again." Then President Shi appears in the sky and tells Shang that he is very brave and must be so because he is from his clan. He descends and says to Shang, "You heard the man's words yourself, and you surely saw his power and knew that I could not protect your sister from him. I hope you will not blame me for my weakness in front of him." Shang says, "Of course, Mr. President." The president prepares and tells him that there are several people of his strength in the Central Province, but none of them can kill him. Shang says he will increase his power as soon as possible and asks the president not to worry, because he will kill him soon. The president is happy with Shang's words and tells him, "You are the pride of my clan." Before leaving, the president asks Shang to prepare, because the path will open soon. Shang will be with his sister in the Purifying Mountain for a month. The president agrees, and the beautiful Lu Yan laughs and is happy. Then Lu Shang and his sister fly to the Purifying Mountain. The president stands looking at them and blames himself for not being able to protect the clan members. We go to the Purifying Mountain to see Shang continuing his training, and the beautiful Yan watches him and encourages his efforts. He tells her that he still has a long way to go to reach the level he wants. She tells him that she used to love training like him, but now she is content to watch him. He tells her that her talent is greater than his and asks how far she has progressed in the past few years. She tells him that she has been hindering her growth and that she is not a genius now. He asks her to fight him a little to see her level for himself. The fight begins, and a great aura appears around Yan, indicating that she possesses great power. She uses her sword style like her brother. Yan runs and throws herself into her brother's arms, telling him that she forgot how to fight when she stood in front of him. He pats her and tells her that he will finish the trial path to the end to become strong enough to protect her. After a month, the clan leader stands with the top three and tells them that their clan is the strongest among all the clans in the Eastern Province, yet they can only send three people on the trial path, unlike other clans. He tells them that each of them will carry the clan's name to the Cloud Hall and asks them to do everything they can to reach the end of the path. Yan bids farewell to her brother and tells him that she hasn't seen him for 10 years and that this time the world will separate them again. He makes the famous sign they used as children, which means "Don't be afraid, and wait for me to return to you." She laughs. Then the president takes the three and they leave. As soon as the mountain opens, Hua Tian says that the laws of space are abnormal in this place, and they enter the trial path. Shang is on the ground everywhere. Hua Tian tells him, "But we can't read it." Shang tells him that this stone is the highest rank of energy stones, and one stone is equal to a million ordinary energy stones. The president tells Shang that the reward for releasing Lu Yan is 2 million stones, which is the price for one person to enter the trial path. Shang says, "The magic circle." The president tells him that it will transport them to the real trial path, which is 1000 miles away. He tells them that it requires a large amount of energy, so it is not widespread, and none of them have heard of it. He says it is widespread in the Central Province and asks them to get used to it, as they will see it often in the future. He asks them to enter the circle with him and asks them to stay close to him, as this is their first time riding it. As soon as energy comes out of the stone, Lu Shang's body begins to absorb it. The president tells him that absorbing the energy of the stones will increase his growth speed, but this energy is for travel. He asks him, "Will you travel or absorb the energy we will travel with?" They leap towards the sky. After an hour, they encounter a huge void storm. The president asks them to stay behind him and uses his immense energy to overcome the storm. In the trial path arena, we see the sects and the large numbers participating in the Cloud Peak. The disciples of the Xianyun Sect notice the delay of the Qingyun Sect and ask for the reason. In the Cloud Hall, we see Elder Fai Han asking if the Qingyun Sect encountered a void storm. The president of the Lu Yun Sect, Master Wai Yulun, replies, "Perhaps bad luck has befallen them today." He asks, "What kind of people will Shi Keng bring us?" Master Fai says that no one from them has entered the top ten rankings in 100 years. Elder Long, president of the Qingyun Sect, sees that the disciples of the Cloud Hall are always strong, and her strongest disciples reach the eighth or ninth level. Elder Fai hopes that the Qingyun Sect will make some progress this time. We go to the Qingyun Sect, which is facing the void storm. The president still asks the disciples to stay behind him, but Shang is busy with something else. Bai asks him what he is looking at, and he is lost in the heavenly realm, not responding to anyone. He tells them that he has understood void storms and the laws that govern them. The president is surprised and asks him how he understood the laws behind void storms. The dragon inside Shang's mind wakes up, and the third dragon wakes up and tells him that Shang is indeed a genius, but he is not convinced. He tells him, "We will see how far Shang develops on the trial path." The president calls his team to prepare to enter the Cloud Hall. Finally, they reach the hall, and Shang notices that the number of people is more than he expected. Master Wei tells them, "We just brought you in a moment ago." He tells President Chi, "You finally arrived, and you brought a small number of people, and their levels are also low. Only one of them is in the Crystal World, and one is still in the third level of the Sky World." President Chi tells him that the number of his disciples is indeed small, but they are the best three disciples in his entire clan, and he believes they will achieve something good. The participating disciples laugh at him for bringing only three participants, two of whom are still in the third level of the Sky World, and say they will perform well. They say, "Is he here to joke around?" Wei begins to tease Lu Shang, and Hua Tian tries to intervene, but the president stops him and tells him, "I don't want you to underestimate us." He tells him, "The student in the third level of the Sky World that you don't like is the first in my clan. From his short journey in the sky, and our arrival, he has discovered the laws of space." Wei tells President Chi that he doesn't believe this and that he clearly brought him along to be the clown of the tournament. But President Chi asks Shang not to take his words to heart and tells Shang that soon he will show them his true level. Shang replies, "Understood. And please, let me show him now." Student Qiu from the Lu Yun Sect replies, "Behave yourself when you speak to the president." But Hatan tells him, "You don't deserve to stand in front of Lu Shang, and I will teach you manners." The disciples of the Lu Yun Sect encourage their colleague and ask him to teach him manners. Hua blocks the first blow from Qiu. Qiu says, "Don't be happy, that was just a flying sword." He attacks him with the Rax sword. Hua is surprised by the weak fighting style and unleashes the Thunder Sword technique, making Qiu cry out in fear. He attacks again with a stronger energy, the Sky Piercer technique, but Hua counters him with his sword, and he falls to the ground, his sword flying from his hand. Elder Fai says to himself that this student is number three in their power ranking and has reached this level of sword intent without even entering the Crystal World. This is amazing. He says that if this is number three, then what about number one? Qiu surrenders and admits his defeat, asking Hua how he did that move and envying him for it. Hua tells him that when he reached the peak of his sword intent, he entered the Sword Pool, where he was able to merge lightning with sword intent. President Chi congratulates Hua on the fight and tells him.

The president presented a good offer, and President Qi told President Wei that he surely now knows the caliber of his students well. President Wei asked everyone to be calm so he could open the path for them. He told them that their leaders surely informed them of the dangers of the path and that they would rely on themselves from now on. He began to open the gate, and the stones started to release their energy. Lu Sheng counted the stones and broke them down into crystals while standing. He told them, "Oh, sons of the song!" When the path of the quest began to open, Sheng told him, "I'm coming." Everyone was amazed by the path of the quest, seeing it as a world of its own. Lu Sheng told them that the one who built this path was an ancient clan and that there were many secrets that no one had yet discovered. He said that when the Hall of Clouds found this path, they used it to train their students and the students of the four powers. A student came forward and told Sheng that his words about the path excited him and that he would try to meet him inside. Wu saw himself on a large screen in the hall. Wei was still mocking Sheng. Hao and Bai, and President Qi gritted his teeth. Elder Fei asked them to be calm and told him that he was optimistic about the three students. He asked Hao to talk a little about Lu Sheng, the first-place holder. The president told him that what appeared on the screen before him now was Lu Sheng, the first-place holder, even though he was still at the third level of the Heavenly World. He told him that he had a sword intent like Hao's, but he surpassed Hao by entering the Sword Mountain within himself. Elder Fei was impressed, but Grandma Yong did not believe it, saying she saw nothing special in him. President Qi told them, "There is no point in talking. Sheng is in front of you on the screen. See what he will do." Shanghai and Shanghai were judged to increase his speed. President Qi asked Grandma Yong, "What do you think of our genius now?" She sputtered, and the words escaped her. Elder Fei said Sheng was wonderful and praised his steps. He told President Qi that if Lu Sheng reached the top five, he would give him a Tai Xuan pill and reward him greatly for introducing him to Sheng. Al-Haj, the one with yellow hair, swallowed his tongue in anger and said to Elder Fei, "Yes, you want to give him a Tai Xuan pill? What did he do for all this?" We go to Shanghai, and every path has a test. He chose the path in front of him immediately. The fog was dense, and he couldn't see ahead. He felt something strange playing around him. Suddenly, he found the tree binding him with its branches to eat him. So he stayed put, cut the tree's branches, and stood in front of its mouth for a while. He said, "This place is not normal, and I need to be more careful." Suddenly, he found everything green around him attacking him until he got out of the entire place. He continued walking until he found a sea of fire, and he was supposed to cross it. Lu Zheng was in front of the great sea of fire. Students from other peaks came, and student Yang called him in an arrogant tone to go to him. Of course, Sheng disdained this ridiculous way of his and said to him, "Are you talking to me?" Yang became very angry and said to him, "Yes, you are the champion of ridiculousness, come here!" Why are Shanghai and these people doing this? The girls that Yang is with are mocking Sheng because he is only from the third Heavenly level, and they feel he is weak. Shanghai is only focused on what he came for and doesn't want to make enemies with anyone because his path is still long. So he politely stepped forward and said to Yang, "What do you want from me?" Yang pointed to the fire and told him that in a little while the fire would open a path, and he would be the first to cross in front of them. At that moment, Sheng said to himself, "How will I cross this sea?" It turns out the fire will open a path for us to cross. The girl told Yang, "Be gentle with the man so he doesn't get scared of you." Yang said to himself that when he becomes an elder in the Hall of Clouds, he will prevent young people at the Heavenly level from entering the path of the quest. The girl went to Sheng, embraced him, and told him not to pay attention to Yang's words, that he was just joking. The fire receded and opened a path. Yang called Sheng to be the first to cross. Shanghai and Yang saw that Sheng was very fast. Shanghai wished Yang hadn't forced him to go first. Suddenly, fire demons began to appear before him, so he activated the Heavenly Devil Mirage technique, creating many copies of himself. He began to attack the demons and easily overcame them all to continue his path. Behind him were Yang and his team, who were happy because they let Sheng cross the path before them. Instead of thanking him for getting rid of these hellish demons, he said that Sheng won because they were weak, but the path did not end there. Suddenly, a red fire snake appeared before them, and everyone was dying of fear. They decided to unite their strength to overcome the snake. But the cunning Yang saw that they should wait first to see what Sheng would do and how he would deal with the snake. The kind girl told him, "You must be joking, Yang. What can someone like him do alone against such a ferocious beast?" So he told her, "No one forced him to enter the quest, and he is already weak. Are you afraid for him? Let him die." Sheng, who was focused on the enemy, saw that the snake was not easy and thought about how to get past it. He found that there was no solution other than to use the Phoenix Crystal. Sheng began to fly and jump on the snake's body. Yang and his team were surprised by Sheng's speed and saw that with his speed, he could easily escape the snake. Yang, who was hateful of Sheng from the beginning, thought the snake was weak because of its large size, but at the same time, he did not deny Sheng's speed. He observed that Sheng used a secret technique inherited from his family and saw that his journey on the path was short and he would die no matter what he did. Shanghai himself and the group were going crazy and saying, "How can this weakling jump this high?" Sheng passed the snake and continued his path. It was now the turn of the bullies. The snake was annoyed when it couldn't get Sheng and went towards them angrily. The solution began with her attack of Frostfall and Wind Cutting technique. On the other side, Sheng was standing, having finally finished with the snake. He asked, "What did the people behind me do with the snake?" Suddenly, he found the fire starting to rise, and he was still in the middle of the path. He thought about how to get out of this predicament. He saw a very high rock and said, "No matter how high the fire rises, it will never reach the top of this rock." He flew quickly towards it. When he reached the rock, he found many people on top of it, all with wounds and bruises. They fought the snake and asked him, "How did you get past the snake without a single scratch on your body?" He told them he kept jumping until he managed to escape the snake. They were very surprised by Sheng's thinking and the people behind him. He asked, "What happened to them?" Suddenly, he saw them coming and called them to reach him before the fire reached them. He helped the girls ascend. Yang, as soon as he saw him, became very angry and furious because he was able to reach this point. Not only that, but he also drew his sword and began to attack Sheng. When Sheng asked him, "What are you doing to me? Are you crazy?" Yang told him that he made the snake angry and brought disaster upon them so they could pass him. Sheng told him, "You abandoned me and left me to face the monster alone. When I escaped the snake, you came to me. What is my fault? What do I care?" The arrogant Yang told him that this was the law of the jungle, and as long as he was the weaker party here, he had no right to object to anything done to him. Shanghai, the weaker one, decided to put Yang in his place and drew his sword, saying, "Let's see now, master, who is weaker?" The fight began. As soon as Yang saw Sheng's sword intent, he was startled and said, "How can such a weak person have all this sword intent?" He confirmed that he was in a big predicament and would not get out of it safely. But Yang's companion intervened and asked them to stop fighting, saying that the rock might collapse from the fight and they would all melt in the sea of fire. The girls asked Yang to back down and told him that Sheng was not his enemy to do this to him. Shanghai and Yang were silent. He told him, "It is clear that the girls are more sensible than you." Then he noticed that the fire was starting to subside again, so they prepared to reach the next stage before the fire rose again. But before they moved, a giant batfish attacked them. When they thought of defeating it, they were surprised to find an army of them. They began to attack the batfish, and one of them cut off the fish's tail. Shanghai thought he would kill it with his sword, but Sheng pounced on the fish's tail and cut it in half before attacking Yang. He told Sheng that he didn't know the tail could attack after being cut off. They thanked Sheng for saving them, and then they all united against the monsters. But Yang was still annoyed that Sheng was still alive and wanted to kill him. Shanghai fought the fish monsters with his mighty sword, splitting in half anything that came in his way. Everyone was united, fighting the fish monsters, but suddenly the fire began to rise again, and they felt exhaustion and despair. But suddenly, a nearby island appeared before them, and they quickly reached it before the fire caught them. This island was exactly in the middle of the sea of fire and had a special test. But if they could pass the test, they would receive many advantages and benefits. Shanghai wondered what the test was. The girls did not want to take the test, saying it was not important. They thought about continuing their path. Yang looked at Sheng and said, "The weakest of us wants to take this test. It seems he wants to kill himself." Shanghai, when he found a cave with two guards, said to himself, "This must be the test." He stepped towards them, but they stopped him and told him that only members of the Hall of Clouds could enter. They asked him to leave. He told them that the path of the quest was open to everyone and that no one was better than anyone else here. One of them laughed and told him, "This is only in appearance, but the reality is different. Don't forget yourself." Sheng put his hand on his face and said to himself, "Do I go everywhere and find these beasts who think they are better than me?" He decided to teach them a lesson and activated the invisibility technique. In the blink of an eye, he was standing in front of him, grabbing him by the neck and lifting him off the ground. He said, "A little while ago, you told me you were my master." Sheng said, "Let me down right now!" But Sheng said, "Are you sure about what you're saying?" He was standing on the edge of the sea of fire and told him, "If I let go of one finger, you will die burned." He told them that he was stronger than them, which meant he was their master and could enter the cave now. He said, "Okay, okay, let me go, and we'll let you enter." As soon as he let him go, they drew their swords and prevented him from entering. He said, "I expected this," and drew his sword. When they saw his sword intent, they fainted from fear. Then he told them, "Stay asleep then, because I don't want to be disturbed while I'm inside." All of this was witnessed by all the elders and leaders of the Hall of Clouds. Elder Fei became angry and said that the tests were open to everyone and threatened to punish these two. But President Qi approached him and tried to calm him down. Grandma Yong said that Sheng acted arrogantly because he met ordinary students from the Hall of Clouds. She said, "We'll see what he does when he meets elite students, and surely then they will break his nose that reaches the sky." But Elder Fei calmed Qi and told him not to take her words to heart, that she said that because Shu Bufan was her daughter's fiancé. President Qi thought about Sheng and began to underestimate him. Lu Sheng ran at full speed, thinking to himself, "I will find the test at the end of the path." When he reached the end of the path, he found a large forest. When he saw the cut trees, he knew someone had entered here before him. Suddenly, a giant spider attacked him, and he was surprised and disbelieving. He said, "This is the first time I've known that spiders can reach this giant size." He drew his sword and attacked the spider monster, splitting it in half with his sword. Then he said, "Thank God I killed it easily." But before he finished, he looked ahead and saw an army of giant spiders standing before him. He said to himself, "We've fallen into a trap." He drew his sword and began to attack them, cutting through them, but he saw the numbers increasing against him. He said to himself, "We'll never finish this, and I have to find a way to escape them." Suddenly, an army of students appeared and burned all the spiders with fire. Shanghai thought they had saved him. Young Master Shao came forward and said to Sheng, "I allow you to enter." Sheng replied, "And who here can prevent me from entering?" Shao said, "It's clear you are arrogant." He asked his Wind Killing formation to teach him a lesson. Sheng looked at them and said to himself, "Is this the killing formation that will teach me a lesson?" He activated the Super Protective Energy Shield and said, "It seems they don't understand reason." He tried to bypass them quickly so as not to waste time with them. They tried to stop him, and he flew after them, activating the Sword Step technique and the Invisibility technique. They searched for him everywhere and couldn't find him. He was standing behind the rocks, watching them. Young Master Shao told them, "He must be hiding in the rocks. Gather around, and I will draw him out immediately." He moved towards the wind and destroyed all the rocks except the one Sheng was standing behind. He was surprised and asked one of his team, "Why isn't this rock being destroyed?" He told them, "Because it's not an ordinary rock." He looked behind it and found Sheng standing there. Behind the rock, they found a secret passage and realized that the spiders were just a diversion so they wouldn't know the real location of the test. When they entered the cave, they saw colorful boxes and wondered what was in these boxes. Shanghai understood that the boxes were arranged from smallest to largest, and that red was the most numerous, and black was the least numerous but contained the best treasures. There were also empty boxes, meaning someone had been here before them. One of them said he heard in legends that each person had only one attempt. The first person began to climb the wall to reach the boxes. The genius Sheng stood thinking that although the path of the quest was entered by many disciples each year, only a few boxes were open. Suddenly, the student who climbed fell before reaching the box. When he fell, he got up and tried again. But suddenly, as soon as he approached the wall, it turned into a volcano of fire, because he only had one attempt. Shao thought that each person had one attempt and must use it without haste. He called the next person to climb, but everyone stood silent and afraid to climb, wanting to wait until the end to see what would happen to whoever ascended and learn from them. Suddenly, someone entered and began to climb. Shao was surprised by his climbing speed and asked the students to surround him so he wouldn't escape with the treasure if he managed to take it. He laughed and said, "You want to steal my treasure, and you are just a bunch of failures who can't reach the boxes and take your treasures?" He reached the box indeed. We go to the Hall of Clouds and find Elder Fei very impressed with this young man, saying, "Who is this, and from what clan?" One of them told him his name was Maple, and he was a member of the Xiong Clan. He told him he was just an ordinary person. Elder Fei replied, "Don't underestimate him, because he reached the red box, which no one else could reach, not even the head of the Hall of Clouds, whose limit was the silver box." Elder Fei said that he reached the silver box, but no one after him could reach the silver, nor the gold, nor the black. President Qi said that these boxes contained things beyond expectations and he was eager to see what was inside. Grandma Yong thought that the red box was useless and that the blue box was what mattered. Elder Fei told them that the blue box would not be easy at all. Maple, ambitious after opening the red box, thought about going to the blue one and opening it. But to reach the closest blue box, he had to stop at the cave there for a while. He was afraid it might be a trap. So he picked up a stone and threw it to see what would happen. Then he reached the cave entrance. When he entered, he found a very large fire and was surprised, saying, "What is this fire doing here?" But the fire attacked and pushed him out of the cave. He said that if he failed, it would be as if he had done nothing. Shao told his disciples, "As soon as Maple falls to the ground, attack him." But Maple clung to the rocks and heated up from Shao. Everyone fell silent. Maple put on the Super Energy Shield and entered the cave again amidst the fire. Shao was annoyed that he had a pill from a high level and said, "Where will he go from us? He will fall anyway, and then I will teach him a lesson myself." But Sheng surprised him by climbing and said, "Excuse me, I have an appointment with the year above." Shao became angry and said to Sheng, "If you think you're a man, come down and face me." Sheng replied, "If I think you're a man, I'll come up and face you." At that moment, Maple reached the blue box and saw Sheng coming towards him. He said, "It seems someone will ruin our chance for the box." But he knew that the path above was full of dangers and that someone would have to go ahead to explore the path. So he stayed with him for a little longer. Maple told Sheng, "The wind will attack." Sheng asked, "How can I avoid it?" Maple told him, "No, thank you for your services. I also have my own secrets." When Sheng reached the door of the fire cave, he activated the Heavenly Devil Shadow technique and entered. Maple, when he saw him, was very impressed that Sheng must have used a combat technique energy shield to open the path for himself. Sheng reached the first box and opened it. He found that Maple was calling him, wanting to know what he found inside the box. But Sheng knew that this person was trying to distract him. Maple told him that he heard what he said and that he was Maple the romantic, loved by the Xiong Clan. He offered them to be friends. Sheng replied, "I am Lu Sheng," and extended his hand to shake his hand, saying, "We can be friends, but that doesn't mean we are not rivals until this test is over." Maple stopped in his place and said, "You come to me so the competition can be fair." He went up to the cave. Maple told him, "If I were you, I wouldn't underestimate this cave." Sheng stood at the entrance of the fire cave and entered the fire, disappearing. Maple laughed and said, "I wish you had listened to my advice and not entered. The competition between us is over now." But Sheng surprised him and came out from the other side, only his shirt was burned. As soon as Maple saw him, he screamed, "What am I seeing? A human against fire?" Sheng told him, "It was indeed very strong fire, but unfortunately, it wasn't enough to burn my body." Maple sat stunned and said, "Tell me, my friend, how did you do it?" Sheng said, "That's a secret." Then it was his turn. He began to move to the next cave. Maple stood behind him, saying, "I'll go ahead and explore the path for you, but I don't have a problem with that. But I warn you, my speed is very high, and you might leave here with empty pockets." Maple said, "Let's see, man." He stood behind him to catch up. When they reached the top of the rock, Maple stopped and pointed something out to Sheng. When Sheng looked, he saw that the mountain above them was flat and no one could climb it. They had no choice but to enter the cave in front of them if they wanted to continue. But the cave was dark. Maple and Sheng saw something shining coming from inside. When they reached it, they found a huge puppet monster. Maple was terrified and told Sheng, "You are supposed to be a heroic fighter. Come with me." When Sheng approached this puppet monster, he felt a very dense killing intent. He took advantage of the fact that it was coming from a mere puppet. Suddenly, the puppet attacked, and he tried to dodge its blows, which, when they hit the ground, caused fire. Sheng asked Maple to retreat. Maple said, "Let's get out of here quickly, I'm telling you!" But Sheng drew his sword and flew towards the puppet, saying to himself, "No matter how strong it is, it's still a puppet, and it must have a weak point." He said he would try to hit it in the gap in its middle, but the blow was deflected without even scratching it, and the sword was unaffected. The puppet attacked Sheng instead, but Maple ran quickly and saved Sheng. Then Sheng thanked Maple and asked him, "What made you save me when you were afraid?" He told him it was a matter of principle and that he didn't try to fight someone stronger than him, but he trusted his skills, the best two of which were escape and saving people at the last moment. Shanghai told him, "You are a very strange person." Then Maple asked Sheng to look for another silver treasure and told him that if this puppet kept hitting the cave walls like this, it would collapse on their heads. But the stubborn Sheng said, "No, I've decided to take this box. If I keep running away from every problem, I'll never progress." Maple said, "You want to risk your life for a small box?" Sheng thought for a moment, then asked Maple to lie on the ground. After a while, they stood up again, and Sheng said to Maple, "I have a plan to get the monster with the box." He told Maple that the monster's secret was in the chain tied to the box, and it might be its weak point. Maple said, "You might be right, but how will you get past the monster to reach the box?" Then Sheng whispered to him, and after a while, Sheng thought and said, "No problem, we'll do as you said." Then Maple said, "Let's lie on the ground." We go to the Hall of Clouds and see the old man thinking that the young men are in real trouble with the puppet monster. Elder Fei said that this puppet was made of the finest known materials and was impossible to destroy directly. President Qi replied, "It might be attacked if the chain between the puppet and the box is cut, although this will not be easy at all." Grandma Yong said, "Two boys want to reach something that no one else could reach except our master. They deserve what happens to them." President Qi became annoyed. Before he could reply, Elder Fei grabbed him by the shoulder and said, "Excuse me, let me handle it this time." He told him, "I know you are worried about Sheng, but he surely has a plan." He said, "You are right. We have no choice but to wait and see what happens." The old man said, "All we can do is pray that they get out of there safely." We go to the cave quickly because the young men have started to implement the plan they agreed upon. Using the Heavenly Devil Shadow technique, he created many copies of himself, and they were all overwhelmed. It was Sheng's turn, and he stepped forward to engage the puppet and give Maple a chance to cut the chain. He began to attack the puppet indeed until Maple managed to reach the box, happy, and said to the puppet, "As soon as I cut the chain, your turn will be over, and the box will be ours." But before he cut the chain, Sheng suddenly said to him, "Don't cut it!" The monster noticed Maple and began to attack him with flying dishes. Sheng told him, "Watch out!" Sheng thought about killing the monster quickly before it finished Maple, but he didn't know how. Maple was next to the monster, so he saw a crack and jumped towards it at the same moment Maple thought he was dead. Suddenly, he found Sheng standing in front of him, saying, "Do you need something, brother?" The other was shocked by the surprise and said, "How did you get here? Well done!" Sheng laughed and went down to shatter the chain. Maple said, "I suspect there is a human soul inside this puppet." He told him that some fighters believe that if they put their souls inside a puppet, they will live forever, and they don't know that there are people who will control the puppet and force it to work with them like slaves. Before the puppet could leave the cave, Sheng called out to it, saying that he could free its soul if it wanted, but the puppet disappeared at once. Maple stood there, thanking God he escaped death. Sheng told him that his magnificent sword shattered half of it while he was breaking the chain, and you wanted to cut it with rotten fingernails. Then they laughed a little, and it seemed they had become very good friends. Maple joked with him and said, "Your sword turned out to be very soft. I'll buy you a better one." Sheng replied, "Thank you, I have another sword besides this one." Maple told Sheng that he owed him his life and would fulfill any request he made, unless he asked for marriage. They joked with each other for a while, and then they went to open the box. When they opened it, there was something wrapped. When they opened it, they found some ancient techniques, evil spirits, the Wheel of Life and Death, and a Saint-level technique. A message was written on the scroll: "I lived my life as an emperor of blood demons, and everything I understood in my life, I put into this technique. It can kill evil spirits and kill the 'Buzh'." Sheng asked, "How can I deal with evil spirits?" Maple asked him, "Are you going to take it alone?" Sheng looked at him, which made him say, "Okay, okay, because you saved my life and my sword broke because of me, I won't take anything from this box." Sheng was surprised and said, "Are you serious?" Maple surprised Sheng, saying that the path of the quest was a great adventure for him, and if he took his share of the treasure, he would still owe him and would have to continue with him, and he didn't want to continue. He left Sheng and walked away. Sheng called out to him, but he said, "Forgive me, my friend, my limit is here." When Sheng asked him why, he said that for him, it was an adventure, and if he died young, he wouldn't have other adventures and wouldn't see strange and beautiful things, and that was not good for him. Then he stopped and pointed to a beautiful scene and said, "If I had died a little while ago, I wouldn't have seen this wonderful sight." Sheng then burst into hysterical laughter from the humor of the beaten Maple. Then he stood up and said, "I came here to reach the summit, and that's why I will continue the path to the end." Maple said, "I knew you would say that because you have the strength to do it." He said, "We will surely meet again after we get out of here." Then he said, "Farewell, my friend," and went down the mountain again. Sheng stood in contemplation, looking at the mountain, and wrote that he had returned to his winding nature and could continue climbing upwards. Then he said to himself, "The next level will surely be difficult, so I must first learn the new technique I found in my box to use it when needed." As soon as he looked at the scroll and tried to read what was written, he felt something controlling him and causing him extreme pain, to the point of screaming from the intensity of the pain. Someone spoke, telling him that evil spirits come from the curses of dead living beings, and if these curses are not broken, over time he will become a dragon. He spoke to Sheng, saying, "In short, the Emperor of Blood Demons is a technique called 'Lu,' and he used it to expel or control the evil spirits he would encounter." Sheng asked, "Who is this Emperor of Blood Demons?" The dragon said that the scroll in his hand was called the "Soul Smelling Scroll," and its letters were written with spiritual power. As soon as he opened it, the words would enter his mind directly, and then he could use it without memorizing or even training. Sheng got up from the ground and found himself not feeling any pain, only a slight tingling in his body. Then the dragon looked at him and said, "Sheng, what do you want?" The dragon said, "Don't underestimate the Wheel of Life and Death skill, because it was the best skill of the Emperor of Blood Demons." He said that he could also activate the Blood Regeneration spirit within his body automatically, and from now on, any injury he suffered would disappear very quickly and be healed instantly. Sheng laughed and said, "This blood regeneration spirit is good." He continued his path, starting with climbing, and reached a new cave. He saw a golden box with no obstacles around it. He ran towards it, but stopped suddenly and said to himself, "This can't be that simple." He looked into the darkness behind the box, and suddenly he saw a large monster with fiery eyes and killing intent. A huge and terrifying fox began to emerge. As soon as Sheng saw it, he fell on his back, as if he were dead. The beast stood howling, its voice so powerful that Sheng couldn't bear it, covering his ears, his whole body trembling with fear. Even Young Master Shao and his companions below covered their ears from the force of the sound and couldn't bear it. They said, "What is happening above?" Shao asked them to use their energy shields and told them that the Royal Shadow Wolf had arrived and its roar was devastating. Shao, hateful of Sheng, said, "He has reached the golden treasure now, but it doesn't matter because the wolf will finish him." He asked the team to form the Wind Blade formation. They stood stunned and afraid. Shao told them that the best thing this person did was provoke the wolf and make it come out, and this was an opportunity to get rid of both of them. The young men said, "As you command, master." Sheng understood that they were below and moving towards him. He wanted to move from his place quickly, but what could he do about this black disaster standing there? If he even thought of approaching it, he would die. But he had to find a way and move quickly from his place. Suddenly, he found the wolf behind him. Shao asked them to attack Sheng. An idea came to him, and he activated his Super Protection Shield and dodged to let the wolf pass, which broke their attack with a single swipe of its claws. The dragon laughed at Sheng and said, "Why are you underestimating yourself so much? You want to use the attack of these young men to injure the wolf, even though your own strength is much greater than all of them combined." Sheng said, "Okay, fine. I will destroy this wolf with my special power." He thought about what to use with it and said to himself, "The Wheel of Life and Death technique is not suitable for this situation. So what, Sheng? Will you get rid of it?" He thought for a moment and said, "Yes, I found it. There is no other way but the Heavenly Devil Shadow." He activated the technique and created many copies of himself. They began to attack the wolf, and he moved up a bit and jumped with his dagger onto the wolf's eye to distract it for a moment. Then he drew his sword, jumped up, activated his full sword intent, and descended onto the wolf's neck, saying, "The neck strike of any demonic beast will be its end." But the blow had no effect. The wolf screamed and struck him, throwing him out of the cave. He was about to fall to the ground, but he used his sword and slowed his descent, stopping on a rock on the mountain and catching his breath. He said he would not give up and had to think of another way. Suddenly, he felt an earthquake and saw Maple in front of him. Maple told him that this test had a time limit, and since the mountain had started to shake, the test was about to end. Sheng looked at the mountain and noticed that the enchantments were starting to disappear, meaning Shao and his companions would reach him at any moment. But the stubborn Sheng still didn't want to give up and had the wolf in his mind. Maple kept calling him, saying that the fire had started to rise again and they had to leave. Sheng said, "Okay," and stood up. We go to President Qi in the Hall of Clouds. When he learned that the test had a time limit, he said, "That's why our master didn't reach the silver box." Elder Fei was very impressed with Lu Sheng, saying that what he had achieved so far proved that he was not just an ordinary person. But Sheng and Maple were the reason Shao and his companions achieved nothing, and Shao would not let this pass. The old man told him he was not worried. Sheng wrote that Shao and his team were waiting for him below and told Maple that he would not pass them easily and that they were waiting for him. So he asked Maple to leave him alone, but Maple proved the wisdom of the saying "a friend in need is a friend indeed" and told Sheng, "Come on, let's go. I'm not leaving here without you." He also told him that he had a secret weapon that, if used, would allow them to get out of here safely. He began to descend. Shao stood below, waiting for them impatiently and asked his team to prepare for the attack. Maple threw them a nice reward, energy stones that exploded at once, releasing smoke so they could escape. The smoke filled the entire place. Shao told his men, "Don't let Sheng escape you." The comedic Maple laughed and said, "What do you think of my hot pepper bombs, you idiots?" They reached the ground, he and Sheng. Sheng said, "This turned out not to be easy at all." Maple laughed and said, "Let's go." They continued their path in the sea of fire. Sheng found them and Maple said, "The Emperor of Blood Demons' legacy is here." Sheng replied, "No way." Maple said, "I don't know exactly, but I think the Emperor came here himself. When he felt he was about to die, he left his legacy with us out of respect for the ancient clan." Sheng, who was calm, said, "Maybe." Then he remembered the boxes and said, "Based on what you're saying, the golden and black boxes contain the legacy of the ancient clan itself." Maple smiled and said, "You only think about treasures and power. What do you want?" He told Sheng that he wanted to know everything about the ancient clan and asked him to explore with him. Sheng laughed and said, "No." Suddenly, the fire began to boil and shoot upwards, and a rain of fire fell on them. Sheng activated the Super Protection Shield. Maple felt insulted because the cat came to him and stood there joking. Sheng's expression changed instantly, and he said, "Okay, let's go to the next platform before the fire rises again." When they approached the platform, they discovered that others had reached it before them. The pleasant surprise was that Hao Yan Meng was with them, who was happy when he saw Lu Sheng and asked him, "Did you also choose this path?" Sheng replied, "My son, weren't you with Bai? Where is he? I don't see him." He told him that Bai had gone ahead of them to the path of death, and it was clear they would catch up to them. Sheng said, "What is this path of death? I don't understand anything." He pointed to the path ahead and said that the path was completely destroyed and they couldn't continue, and that's why all these people were standing here. But Maple said to Hao, "What about the path of stone pillars?" Hao said, "That's the path of death." Maple asked, "You mean everyone who walks this path will die?" Hao said, "I'm not entirely sure, but this path is known for its high danger." Maple turned to Sheng and said, "So what? What danger can this pose compared to the special test?" He said, "Let's go together." Hao said, "Sheng, who is your new friend? He looks very weak, but he seems brave." Maple shouted, "Who is weak, man?" Someone appeared and told them, "Do you think scoundrels like you can enter the path of death? Only Shao and his ilk, the geniuses of the Hall of Clouds, can enter this path of death." He replied, "You've made us even more eager to enter." Maple said, "Did you come here before?" Hao couldn't see a platform to rest on. The romantic one laughed and said, "Will this path of the quest ever end?" Then Sheng told Maple, "You're right, we won't find a place to rest here." Then he said, "You look like a jinx." Maple said, "What's it to me?" Sheng said, "Look at these strange drawings." He told them that these drawings were not on the pillars they walked on and that they didn't look reassuring. He stood on them and thought for a moment until they lit up beneath his feet. Then he said, "I understand," and asked them to follow him. Suddenly, the fire began to rise, and the romantic one screamed, "We're going to die! We're going to die!" He grabbed him by the scruff of his neck and walked him towards the abyss, saying, "If you scream like that again, I'll throw you in."

The blessing asked you where it went. You deal with it and tell her anything. This is your problem. So Shang hesitates a little and says to him, "No, man, she's savage, she might kill me." And suddenly Shang finds the blood disappearing from the blessing and starts shouting and says to the dragon, "I haven't agreed yet to you drinking the blessing." And he says to him, "Do you know what she'll do to me if she finds out?" And he asks the dragon to give him a reward for what she'll do to him as a gift. So he says to him, "What do you want, exactly?" And Shang says to him, "What do you have that you can give me?" So he says, "My son, you're taking advantage of the opportunity, it seems. You can't handle all the martial arts I possess. But I can teach you how to draw inscriptions." So he says that if he learns to write inscriptions, he will be able to make arrays and also upgrade his weapons and his grains. And he will also be taught the highest level of inscriptions in the dragon clan. So he agrees and says to him, "Teach me too," and he is very happy. Suddenly, she comes from behind him and says, "Where did you take the blood in the blessing?" So he says to her, "I absorbed it all." So she says, "Yes, you used all the blood in the blessing by yourself." And she says to him, "Didn't we agree that everything is split in half? And I took the garden in exchange for a sword." And she went on to say that she would take all the treasure chests in exchange for the blood blessing. He thinks for a moment and says, "I'll try the words the dragon told me with her." And he raised his voice to her and said, "You took the entire garden, and I saw you holding an ancient moon herb whose value alone is equal to the blood blessing. Do you think I'm stupid?" So she says to him, "Do you think you're a man? And she shouts, "Then cut the sword in half and come take half the garden." And she says to herself, "I didn't think this idiot would know the value of the garden." So he says to her, "Leave the talk aside, and let's open this year." And he starts opening this year and finds many things. Then he sees the soul essence of the blood of the nine-headed dragon. After that, he looks at his ring and says, "My storage space is very limited, and it won't hold all of this dragon's blood soul essence." So she gives him a ring and says to him, "Take this ring, its space is much larger." So he thanks her, and then he says to her, "But this is my daughters' ring, but I have to use it." And she says to him, "Respect yourself a little." And she says to him that she will take all the blood-smelling paintings they find in exchange for the ring. And he says to her that he doesn't need it because he has the wheel of life and death. And he says to her, "Only the golden chests remain." And he opens the first chest and finds a painting with inscriptions on it, and he is very happy. And she says to him, "Why are you so happy about the painting? This painting talks about the laws of space, and you won't understand anything from it." So he takes the painting and goes to sit aside. And she looks at him and says to herself, "Could this fool have actually understood part of the laws of space?" Then she answers herself and says, "What would make him kill the fire dragon alone? And it's not unlikely that Shang will be very famous in the future." And he reads the words on the painting and says to her, "I'm done." And he asks, "Were you talking about charcoal a moment ago?" So she hesitates a little, and then she opens a chest and says to him, "Come and see." And he says to her, "This is a high-level array." And she says to him that its defensive properties are very strong against large numbers and will be useful in the Temple of Clouds. And when he hears the words "large numbers," he says, "Who is this girl?" Then she says to him, "Only the black box remains, the only one we have." And as soon as she opens it, she is very surprised and happy. And he says to her, "Isn't this the oil lamp? Then what brought it inside the black box?" And Shang says to her, "Why is there a lamp like this in the black box?" And she tells him that this is the lamp of the immortal shrine. And Shang says to her, "I don't know what you're talking about, but what I know about this matter is that the immortal doesn't die. So how can he have a shrine?" So she says to him that the immortal's life has a specific duration that ends at a certain point, and his body goes through five stages of decline, and then he reaches the stage of desire and dies. And he asks, "Does this have anything to do with the lamp?" So she says, "Yes, and this lamp is the shrine lamp of Monk Tian Mao." And she tells him about Monk Tian Mao, that he was one of the most important and influential people in the world. And after his reputation and fame spread for 10,000 years, he felt that he was about to die, so he returned to his homeland and built himself a shrine. And she says to him, "A shrine like this will be filled with treasures." And she says that many people tried to break into the shrine, but they all failed. The attempts continued for about 2,000 years until they found a strange box in the desert with eight lamps, each of them engraved with the name Miao Tian from below. And each lamp had nine marks on the sides. And after research, they discovered that these lamps guard the shrine, and there is a legend that says if all nine lamps are lit at the same time, the shrine will open. Then people killed each other over the lamps, but six lamps have been collected so far, and those who collected them are from the two sects, the Spin and the Wu Bin. And no one knows where the last lamps are. And they say that they fell into the hands of very powerful and cunning masters to protect themselves. And for this reason, they held the lamp festival so that those who have the lamps would light them at the same time as the festival begins. And when the lamps are lit, the marks on the side light up. And at the last festival, three years ago, eight marks were lit, which means only one is missing, and Tian Mao's shrine will open. And she says to him, "Who would have thought that the last lamp is with the Blood Demon Emperor? And if she hadn't found the complete inheritance, she wouldn't have found the lamp." So Shang says to himself, "It's better to be a connection between the immortal's shrine and the immortal's origin, which is its owner." Then he says to her, "Who will take the lamp?" So she says, "Me, of course." And she says to him that he is now a member of the Hall of Clouds, just like her. And if he can light the lamp, she will contact him. So he says to her, "What do you mean by being a member of the Hall of Clouds? And how would I know that you are a member of the Hall of Clouds? I don't even know if 'Dai' is your real name." So she says to him, "Do you think I'm a bad person?" So he says to her, "A cunning person who hid her true features, and possibly her body as well, and hid her true personality, infiltrated the path of the quest, and also plotted to take the treasures of Bai Yin alone. And do you think if you were in my place, how would you judge her?" So she scoffs at him and says to him, "Since you don't believe me, take this." And she throws him a communication disk through which he can send her messages as long as he is inside the Hall of Clouds. So he says to himself, "This girl is not as simple as I expected. And she didn't just enter the path of the quest three or four times. No, she also has detailed information about the Blood Demon Emperor's inheritance. She prefers to give me such an expensive course instead of revealing her true identity to me. So I should stop asking so many questions." Then she rides on the dragon's head and says to him, "There's nothing else here. Let's go, I'll take you to the exit of this place." And he says to her, "Okay." And he stands with her, and the dragon starts to move, and he sees the magnificent view from above. And we go to the path of life and see Shao, who saw that he couldn't pass the path of life, and thus he couldn't pass this test. And we also go to the path of death to see Bai, who is standing and says to Huo, "There are no treasures here, let's go." And Hao hears the dragon's roar and looks up and says to Huo, "Isn't that the flood dragon?" Then Dai brings Shang down to the gate and says to him, "If you leave here, you will have passed your test." And he says to her, "Aren't you coming with me?" So she says, "No." And she bids him farewell and says, "Don't forget that what happened between us is a secret." And she takes the dragon and leaves. Then we go to the Hall of Clouds and hear a whirring sound, and the display screen is distorted. The elders and leaders are standing in a circle. And Elder Fei says, "Someone reached the end very quickly." Then he says, "It's clear I underestimated Shao's talent." And Bu Fan. And suddenly, Lu Shang enters through the gate and says to them, "Greetings." And President Qi, as soon as he sees Lu Shang, becomes young again from joy. And he grabs him by the shoulders like a proud father of his son's success. And Elder Fei says to them, "I didn't expect at all that someone from outside the Hall of Clouds would take first place this year." And of course, Madam Yun is standing there, burning with rage. She looks at Shang and says to herself, "He killed all his colleagues." And she attacks him with her cane and says, "Where is Hafe Jin, who was with you?" So he says to her, "How would I know? I wasn't with her at all." So she says to him, "You're a liar. I saw you with her right after you entered the path. Do you think I'm blind?" And she says to him, "Speak and tell me, what did you do to the rest? You probably killed them and stole their things." So Shang says to her that they separated halfway through the path, and he is not responsible for her failure. And he says to himself, "It's clear that this grandmother has a very important position here." Then the grandmother attacks him and says, "I'll teach you a lesson you won't forget." But President Ci attacks and says, "How dare you attack a student of mine while I'm standing here? What do you think I am?" So she says to him, "How dare you attack me? I'm not afraid of you at all." And Elder Fei finally enters and says to her, "Enough. Control your emotions a little more, because you are considered to be in the position of the clan leader." But she says to him, "My granddaughter Jin might have been killed, and if that happens, it won't end well." So he shouts at her and says, "Enough! You've reached this age and you're still the same, you'll never change." And he says to her, "If you don't back down, who will make her back down?" So she listens to him, but this matter will not end well. And Shang says, "What's wrong with this old woman exactly?" And Elder Fei asks everyone to calm down and asks Shang, "Why were you with six people from your group, and why are you the only one who returned?" So he says to him that he fell into a well on the path of death, and when he got out of the well, he couldn't find anyone. Suddenly, they arrive, and Mabel is the fastest among them. But Shao says that he won't let him reach him before him and take first place. And they rush with all their might. And Mabel notices him and says that he won't give him a chance. And he throws a smoke bomb and says, "So you can rush after me again quickly." And Shao pulls out his spear and runs after him. This gives Hao and Bai a chance to get ahead of them. And Hao Tian enters first. And Shao says, "If it weren't for Mabel distracting me, you wouldn't have been first." But Tian says, "I'm not first." And he points to Shang and says, "The man over there is first." And Shao gets angry and says, "Impossible, he must have used tricks." And he goes to Shang and says, "We saw you with our own eyes fall into the dragon's mouth, and you had the strange person with you. How can you be here before us?" And Elder Fei asks Shao to calm down and tell them what happened in detail. So he says that Shang should be dead because during the test, they entered a deep opening and there was a huge flood dragon chasing him. Then a strange person was with us, who pulled Shang and they both fell into the dragon's mouth. So Elder Fei says, "Despite what you said, not only did he escape death, but he also took first place." And Shao says to Elder, "Don't you think this is a bit strange, Elder?" And the Elder looks at Shang and says to himself, "The dragon's appearance was strange, and his actions were even stranger. All the secrets revolve around this mysterious young man." And he asks Shang, "Tell me about the strange person who was with you." So Shang says that he can't because he promised him to keep his secret. So he says to him, "I agree with you that a man must keep his promises. But since a strange man was able to hide and enter the Hall of Clouds, this is very important." So Shang says to them that he saw evidence with him that he was from the Hall of Clouds, but it didn't reveal his true identity. So Elder says to Shang, "I won't pressure you to talk, but I hope you will explain to us what happened exactly in the future." And Shang says, "Okay, Elder." And Shao is glaring at Shang. And Elder says, "Don't be lenient with this man. He doesn't like this matter to pass so easily, and it seems he's thinking of doing something." Suddenly, Mr. Shao, who is at the intermediate level of the hypothetical catastrophe level, arrives, and everyone greets him. And Bu Fan, his son, asks him, "What brought you here, Dad?" So he asks, "What place did you get?" And he is silent for a moment, then apologizes to him and says, "Third place." So he gets very angry and asks him, "Who is first place?" So he points to Shang. So he looks at Shang and says to his son, "How did someone still at the fourth level of the Heavenly Realm defeat someone as mischievous as you?" And he says, "I don't know either, but I'll explain it to you, Dad." And Mr. Shao goes to Shang and says, "So you're the one named Shang?" And Shang says, "Yes." So he says that he heard that he has something to do with strange things that happened on the path of the quest, and for the public interest, he must tell him everything in detail. So Shang says that what happened to him on the path of the quest was something that concerned him alone and did not affect anyone else, so he is not obligated to say anything. And Mr. Shao gets very angry and says to Shang, "Who do you think you are, you ungrateful person, to speak to me like that?" And Elder Fei says to Shang, "My son, just speak and be done with it." So Shang says to himself, "This man seems to have a great position in the Hall of Clouds, to the point that Elder Fei himself is afraid of him." And he remembers the communication disk that Dai gave him to contact her as long as he is in the Hall of Clouds. And he says that he will inform her of what is happening and see if she can help him in this predicament. And he says that her reaction might let him know something or two about her. And suddenly, Mr. Shao puts his hand on Shang's shoulder and says, "If you don't tell me willingly, I will search your memories and find out exactly what happened." And President Ci begs him to wait a moment and says that searching memories causes damage to the mind and soul. And he asks Shang to speak quickly. But Mr. Shao shouts at the President to step back and begins to search Shang's memories. Suddenly, a shining message appears and goes to his ear and whispers. And then there is a great commotion in the hall. And Mr. Shao says to Shang, "Strong, young man." And he takes his son, Bu Fan, who wants to know what happened, and leaves. And Elder Fei looks at Shang and says, "Who sent this message? For heaven's sake!" And Shang has a very high position in the Hall of Clouds, and she made the old man Shao retreat without saying another word. And the dragon replies to him and says, "Why don't you ask her yourself? You'll find her hiding among the students of the Hall. The third girl on the right." And Shang looks at her and says, "Is it possible that it's her?" And she sees him and says, "What is this? Is he looking at me? Is it a coincidence, or did he find something out?" And he looks at her, and his heart says to her, "What did you say to Shao to make him retreat?" And she winks at him, and he understands that she wants to say that she wants him to know for now that he is her man, and that's it, and he will know everything in due time. And a great commotion occurs in the Hall of Clouds. And Shang thinks and says, "This girl scared Mr. Shao, whom all the elders in the Hall of Clouds fear. So she must be much higher than him." And President Ci comes and says to Shang, "You were too hasty a moment ago, but I know you have your own way of dealing with things." And he says to him, "Opposing Mr. Shao is not in your interest." And Elder Fei says to him, "You have made a powerful enemy before you even joined the Hall of Clouds." And Shang says to him, "I had no choice but to do so, because it was a matter of principle, and I couldn't break a promise I made to myself." And Elder Fei says to him that he hopes Mr. Shao will forget what happened today. And the students in the hall are celebrating their rankings. And Elder Fei says that this means one more person did not come out of the path of death except for Zhu Xing, who was killed there. And Shao appears, looking tired and exhausted. And he says to himself, "I entered the path thinking I would compete for the first places, but in the end, I got trapped and don't know how to get out." And he says that if he hadn't grabbed the tail of the flood dragon as it passed overhead, he would be dead in the sea of fire by now. And suddenly, they enter the hall, and Elder Fei looks at him and says, "Last place is Shao Xiao." And Elder Fei announces the names of the elite who will join the Hall of Clouds, and they are four people: Lu Shang, Hao Yin, Shao Bu Fan, and Bai Yin. And he says to them, "Whoever heard his name, get ready, because we are heading to the Hall of Clouds now." And they arrive at the Hall of Clouds, and Lu Shang is amazed by the very high energy level emanating from the sky and earth there. And one of the elite in the Hall of Clouds doesn't like the new batch and calls them peasants. And Elder Fei calls his team and says to them, "Come on, elite of the Hall of Clouds." The entire hall is filled with the whirring of students who are amazed by the elite members. And the young people are very impressed by the natural scenery in the Hall of Clouds. And Elder Fei escorts them to the elite hall and assigns them to the elite of the clouds. And he tells them that this is the end for them, and the elite hall attendant will take care of them from now on. And the ordinary students in the Hall of Clouds are very impressed by the elite building. And everyone is preparing to receive their cards. And Romanzi's eyes fall on the colorful cards of the elite students, and he wishes he had one like them. And the hall attendant tells them that there are secret places in the land of the Hall of Clouds that only those with a certain level of authority can enter. And there are five colors of cloud cards representing five layers of authority. And he tells them that since they are new members, they will receive the lowest authority cards, which are the red cards. And Shang says to the attendants who serve the students there from the level of the Earth God. And the attendant tells them that they will receive their cards now, and they can move around the Temple of Clouds freely with them. And they can also enter secret areas and high-level training areas with them. And he asks them to take care of their cards. And he begins to call out the students and hand them their cards. And Shang says that it's similar to the card she gave him to contact her. And he remembers that its color was blue. And he asks, "What is the rank of the blue color here?" And the attendant calls him and gives him the box in his name. And as soon as Shang opens the box, the attendant discovers that the color of his card is purple. And he is surprised and says, "What exactly is happening here?" And the attendant distributing the cards says, "Is there something wrong?" And the attendant says to him that purple cards are given to a very small number of accomplished elders, and this might have happened because Shang took first place. And the attendant asks the attendant to confirm this for him. And the attendant goes and returns to tell him that he has confirmed that Lu Shang will receive a purple card. And the attendant is shocked by the surprise and can't believe it. And the entire hall objects at once, and everyone says, "How can Lu Shang, who just joined today, receive a purple card?" And the attendant calls out to everyone and says that the decisions of the Temple of Clouds are not subject to discussion, and if they don't shut up, they will all be expelled from the hall. And the students ask the attendants, "Who is this Lu Shang?" And the students tell them, "We don't know anything, just like you." And Lu Shang looks at his distinguished card with amazement. And the attendant keeps looking and says to himself, "Does Shang have anything to do with the Temple Master?" Then the attendant informs them of the laws within the temple grounds, the open and secret training areas, and the authority levels of each of them. And after he finishes speaking, he says to them, "You can leave now." And Hof stands in front of a map and calls Shang and says that he found a detailed map of the central region. And he says that the eastern region on the map is negligible compared to the area allocated to the central region. And Romanzi Mabel makes fun of them and says, "Welcome, masters of geography." And he is very impressed by the many details on the map about the central region and its power. He runs to see Romanzi reading every detail about the clans until he reaches the head of the Shui Ying clan, who has reached a great level of power, and there is only one person in the world who can defeat him. And when Shang sees him, he knows that this is the person who wants to take his sister Yan. And when he asks Mabel about his power, he tells him that he is the undisputed strongest in the central region. And he says, "Do you remember when I told you that there is only one person who can defeat the head of the Wu Bin clan? That person is Mr. Shui Shi." And Shang says, "I honestly didn't expect that." So Mabel replies to him and says, "He is a man known throughout the world. How do you not know him?" And Lu Shang says, "Well, I'll add to your information that this man wants to create a huge array and needs three beautiful girls with a certain physical strength. And if he can find the three beauties and the array succeeds, he will be the sole king of the entire continent and will rule the world for the next three to four thousand years." Then he gets annoyed and leaves. And Hao goes after him. And Mabel, who doesn't understand anything, says to him, "Wait, man, I haven't finished talking yet." And Hao shouts at him and says, "Shut up and stop blabbering." And Bai understands the matter of Shang's sister with this man, and he becomes sad and starts blaming himself. And Shang goes far away, sad, and thinks, saying to himself that Shui Shui is indeed the strongest in the world right now, but Shang will come a day when he will be stronger than him. And Bai says to Shang, "You have your abilities, and Shang says, "Did you really see that?" And he says that they are not whispering. Even if people call them crazy, they still believe that Shang will one day be the strongest in the world. And Shang thanks them and swears to them that he will never betray their trust and that he will surpass Shui Shui many times over. And we go to the Heavenly Mountains in the central region to see Mr. Shui Shui standing and contemplating, and his dragon is waiting for him. And the beautiful Xi, Mr. Shui's subordinate, arrives and tells him that he promised her a trip where she could enjoy the snow and taste the dragon's heart, and that the snow is about to melt, and he still hasn't fulfilled his promise to her. So he tells her that he didn't promise her anything, and she was the one who asked to see the snow, so he brought her with him. And he says to her, "Regarding the dragon's heart," and he reaches inside the dragon and pulls out its heart with his hand and presents it to her while it's still beating. And she is shocked and says to him, "Oh my, there's so much blood, how can I eat it?" So he throws it on the ground and says to her, "Okay, wait until I get you a cook." And she says to him, "I'll tell you something, don't be angry with me. Regarding the matter of you waiting to gather three virgin girls with the physique of a violet, I've been waiting for 30 years. And by the time you find the last girl, you'll find that I've waited another 30 years." So he tells her that he has already found Lu Yan, and she will soon reach the level of the Earth God. And he also tells her that he has found the third girl, and she will soon fall into his hands. And he tells her not to worry, he will make her very happy as soon as possible. Then he feels something strange and gets sick. And Xi asks him, "What happened?" So he frowns and says, "I just felt a killing intent." And she says to him, "Who in the entire continent has the power to unleash killing intent towards you? Aren't you afraid that he will follow your killing intent and reach you?" So he says, "Fortunately for him, this person is so weak that he can't determine his location." And he says to her, "But what would make an insect like this hate me?" She laughs and says to him, "It's just a useless insect, don't worry about it. Just think about me." So he says to her, "You're right. All those who wanted to kill me in the world, I killed them with my own hands." And he says to her, "But this time, I have a strange feeling, and I'm not comfortable with it." Then we go to Shang, who is practicing on the wheel of life until he succeeds in manifesting it. And he says that he will use the rewards he obtained in the Sword Mountain to train more on the wheel of life and death, even if it is the highest training rank that the Blood Demon Emperor went through. And he says that he still has a long way to go to reach the first stage of the wheel of life and death, but the important thing now is that he knows how to form it. And he thinks about merging the power of evil spirits with it. And when he does that, a tremendous amount of energy is generated. And when he tests it on the mountain, it causes an earthquake in the land of the Hall of Clouds, which frightens all the students and causes panic in the place. And a large hole is created in the mountain. And when Shang sees it, he can't believe his eyes. And the attendant comes out and calls all the students and asks them, "Who caused this explosion?" So Shang turns around and apologizes to him and says, "Next time I'll be careful." And the attendant thinks for a moment and says to himself, "He has a purple card, and I can't argue with him." Then he tells Shang to do whatever he wants, and that the ordinary training areas are not enough for him. And he asks him to go to the elite areas later. And he says that there he will find areas completely armored with the strongest metals, and even the first levels of the Earth God cannot scratch them. And Shang says, "You're right." And he thanks him for the advice. The students notice that the attendant's tone has changed when Lu Shang appeared. And Hao also surprises everyone with an explosion. And the attendant says, "Are the students this year so powerful?" And he asks Hao his name and says that he will repair the training room that was destroyed at his expense. And Shang says that he has affected the Tian room and asks him to deduct it from him. And the attendant is a little stunned. Then he says to himself, "You again? I haven't even recovered from the previous one." Then he tolerates Shang and says, "Okay, I'll let it slide this time because it's your first mistake. But be careful next time, and deal with caution in the training rooms." And he goes to Shang and says, "It seems I underestimated my new position here." And he says to him, "A few words from you to that man changed the situation completely." And Shang says to him, "It's not that much." Then Hao asks him, "What about your explosion? It's not normal." And he asks him if he has entered the Crystal Realm. And Shang says, "Yes, but I just entered now." And he congratulates Shang and asks him if he found a way to cleanse the demon blood from the poison. So he says, "Do you need it now?" He says, "Yes, because my training on the sword intent requires a great spiritual power, and this is putting pressure on me, and I need great spiritual support." So Shang says that he will try to find a way to cleanse the blood as soon as possible. And he takes out a box and says to him, "Take this now." And when Hao opens the box, he finds a treasure to strengthen the spirit inside. And he says to him, "This is too much for me, and I can't take it." And Shang hears a voice say, "You've been in the Hall of Clouds for a long time, and you haven't thought of visiting me even once. You'll make me regret giving you the purple card." And Shang is standing there, stunned and sickened by what he heard. So Shang replies to her and says, "First, I thank you for the purple card, but be careful, this won't compensate me for the Buzhou tree and the herb garden." So she says, "What would a weakling like you do with such huge things?" Then she says to him, "Okay, since the card doesn't satisfy you, I'll give you another gift." And he says to her that he is not reassured by this second gift. Then we go to the Ice Palace to discover that she is indeed Ning Gui, a noble of the Hall of Clouds from the Earth God level. And she asks the Dream Immortal, who is standing in front of her, to intervene now. So he says to her, "Virtual Catastrophe level, do you think this is a good idea at all, or is this normal for you?" So she says to him that this person should have been punished a long time ago, and we let him go, and a lot of time has passed without him being punished. We have forgiven him all this. And she says to him, "Just do what I ask you to do, and do as I say, and don't worry about it." And he says to her, "Your orders are my command, yes." And he actually gives the orders and says to himself, "She seems to be still crazy and hasn't calmed down to ask me for something like this. How could she ask me for this request now?" Then the Dream Immortal begins to carry out exactly what the noble asked him to do and does as she said. And Shang says, "You won't tell me what the gift is? Enough with this suspense. Get straight to it. I can't stand it anymore." And Shang feels something in his back that makes him scream in pain, and he also loses control of his body. And he says to himself, "What is this? What's going on?" And it makes him run on the path. And Shang finds himself unable to control his body and knows that she is the one who did this to him. And he says, "What does she want from me?" And we go to Shao Fei, who is training in combat with the students of his group. Suddenly, the hall door opens forcefully, and Lu Shang enters. As soon as Shao and his companions see him, they become very angry and say, "What impudence is this? How can an insect from the Heavenly Realm do whatever he wants, and no one is looking at him?" And Shang says, "What brought me here? Who are these people? And what is this gift she was talking about?" And he loses control of his hand, which makes a rude gesture to the students, and also his tongue, which insults them. And he calls them scum and says, "None of you is a man who can stand in front of me." And as soon as his body is freed and he regains control, he says to himself, "I've probably messed up, and I won't leave here on my own two feet." And he starts moving his hands and says, "I'm controlling my body now." Then he curses Dai for putting him in this situation with these people. And he laughs and says to them, "I probably came here by mistake, sorry." And Shao says, "Where are you going, sweetie? Do you think entering the bathroom is like leaving?" And he quickly closes the door before he leaves. And Shao says, "I can't believe this scoundrel is one of the elite students." And Shang apologizes to Shao and says, "It wasn't me who was talking. Give me a chance to explain what happened, but wait." And Shao's brother incites him against Shang and says, "This kid is the one who took first place in the test." So he says, "Then you're the one who spoke rudely to Dad." And he says, "I don't want to hear a word from you." And Shao Bu Fan says to Shao Fei, "Leave him to me. Don't dirty your hands with such people. Leave him to me so I can show him his place." And Shang says, "There's no escape from fighting today." And he says to Bu Fan, "Since you're the one who wants a fight, you brought it upon yourself, sweetie. And each of us will know our worth well." And Bu Fan says, "Your words are too big for you, and I'm afraid you're not up to it." And Shang draws his sword and says, "Words alone are not enough, but my sword will also have its say." And Bu Fan says, "Then show me what your sword will do." And Shang begins the attack. And Bu Fan activates the Air Needle, Circular Needle, and Spear Needle techniques. And he begins to attack Shang, who manages to evade each one. This makes Bu Fan angry, and he activates the Taoist Spear technique and says, "Show me how you'll dodge this one." And he begins to attack him with all his might. And the students in the hall say that Shang deserves to be an elite student because he was able to drive Bu Fan to this level of foolishness. But this last attack from Bu Fan will surely kill him. And Shang sees that the incoming attack is very powerful, and evasion and dodging are not enough. He must also attack. So he summons his Sword Aura and activates the Wheel of Death and attacks Bu Fan, whose body explodes within it. And everyone stands in awe of Shang's incredible power. And Shang says to himself, "It turned out to be more than I imagined, and it will benefit me greatly in the future." And Fei shouts at Shang and asks him to release his weak brother, or he will deal with him himself. And Shang says, "He doesn't have a tongue or hands like you to defend himself." And Fei begins to attack Shang with force to release his brother. And Shang says, "Shao's entire clan cannot accept defeat." And he leaves Bu Fan, and the attendant enters. And he is shocked by Shang's power and says, "How can someone in the Heavenly Realm play with the Shao brothers in such a humiliating way?" And this makes Fei very angry, and his eyes shoot sparks. And he grabs his spear with force and says to Shang, "I will kill you today, no matter who is behind you." And he begins to activate the devastating Death Spear. And the Dream Immortal, who is watching the fight on the screen with the noble, says, "The Death Spear might kill him." And the noble says to him, "Don't interfere. And if Bu Fan has the Death Spear, then the Wheel of Life and Death, which Shang possesses, is even stronger." And Bu Fan says to Shang, "Destroy everything. And it comes in your way. Show me how you'll absorb it from me." And Shang summons three evil spirits. And Shang is surrounded by them. And the students are very afraid of Shang and the evil spirits around him, and they cannot bear their heat. And the attack begins from both sides. And Shang activates the Wheel of Death of the evil spirits and absorbs the spear from Bu Fan, and also pierces his hand. And Fei says to him, "Do you think you're strong enough to block Bu Fan's blow and also destroy his arm?" So Shang says to him, "Excuse me, your brother attacked me, and if I hadn't blocked his blow, he would have killed us for sure." So Fei scoffs at him and says, "Who said you managed to escape death at all?" But Shang surprises everyone and flies up. And Fei is going crazy and says, "How can someone still in the Heavenly Realm fly like this?" And Fei gets very tired and begins to say to Shang, "Where are you going to escape from me? I will catch you and kill you." And Shang says to him, "All the elite members are scum. And I will soon return to test their trivial strength myself." And he flies out of the place. And all the elite students get angry and say to Shang, "We'll wait for you tomorrow to teach you a lesson." And Shang says to himself, "It wasn't me who was talking." And the noble says to the Dream Immortal, "Enough for Shang. Let him rest a little before he starts his mischief again tomorrow." So the Dream Immortal returns Shang to his normal state. Then he falls to the ground. And he says to Dai, "I've learned my lesson and won't mess with anything again." And he asks her to stop playing with his body like a doll. And she says to him, "I'm just resting you a bit before you start your new adventure tomorrow." And he screams from exhaustion and can't stand it. The next day, she wakes him up very early and says, "Come on, my dear, we have work to do." And he says to her, "It's too early. Okay, at least give me a chance to go to the bathroom." Then Shang arrives and speaks to them sarcastically and says that he has come to beat them. And Bu Fan and his companions can't believe that Shang accepted the challenge and actually came. And they say that they must teach him a lesson he will never forget. And Liu from the peak of the Crystal Realm asks about the crowd today. So one of the students tells him, "It's good that you came. Haven't you heard about Shang and what he did yesterday? He's Shang. Please hit him and get rid of him for us." At that moment, Shang is standing looking at his huge body and is afraid of it. Then he laughs and says to them, "Honestly, I think I'm a bit too much for him. And the difference between his strength and mine is huge. If I defeat him, I won't feel any pride in defeating him." But Shang replies to them and says that he doesn't want anyone to choose his opponent for him because he sets the rules here. And the students say to him, "Who will listen to you anyway? You want to kill me one by one. And why?" He says to the students, "Wait a moment so we can hear what this guy has to say." And Shang says, "I can fight three people every day, and I will choose them myself." But the audience says to him, "So you'll choose the weakest three?" Then

You will be tricked by yourself, and then Sheng thought for a moment and pointed to a plateau called Sheng Yuan. The students were very protective and defended Sheng so that he would go and hit him. He tells them, "I don't think he chose someone from the fourth level of the Crystal World to mock him." He asks Sheng to tell them that he is not mocking him. Sheng says to him, "They are right, and I will hit you with my hands." But Zhang tells him, "You know my name and you know that my title is the Iron Fist, yet you are crossing your limits with me and belittling me. Fine, I will kill you, you rat." And a halo of fire appears around him. Sheng was lucky that he made a large number of dragon scales yesterday, otherwise he would have fallen into a very big mess. The giant Cheng begins to direct the Sky Crushing Fist towards Shanghai. It was very huge and its power was tremendous. Shanghai transformed into the Phoenix and supported himself with dragon scales and attacked him as well. Then there was a collision between them, boom! After that, Sheng fell to the ground without even breathing and called for the next one. An arrow of God descended upon the entire hall, and not a single person spoke. Then a huge one came out and said to him, "I am the next one." He tells him that Zhang lost to him because he underestimated him and luck was on his side. He tells him that luck will not be on his side twice in a row. Sheng says to him, "Didn't you hear me when I was talking about the rules? Didn't I say that I am the one who chooses the opponents here?" He calls out to Yue Shui, who says, "No, man, I'm not playing with you. I'll choose someone else for you." But the elite students don't like Yue's response and defend him, saying, "If you are afraid of this insect, you are a disgrace to the elite students." In the end, he finds himself facing Sheng's sword. He accepts it and Sheng calls for the next one. Guan Yu leaps at him like a lion, but Guan meets him with a punch and defeats him. He tells them, "Your time is up with me today." Then the elite students don't like that he is dealing with them arrogantly. They tell him, "You are despicable, you choose the weak." They all attack him to take revenge on him, but he flies up and tells them, "I agreed with you on three fights, no more, and we'll meet tomorrow, God willing." One of the elites is very surprised that Sheng is flying and also acting unnaturally. Sheng returns to his room, opens his treasures, and his spiritual power increases by 30% after using the treasures. Then he calls the dragon and says to him, "Didn't you promise me that you would teach me how to draw inscriptions when I become strong?" The dragon tells him that the concept of inscriptions among dragons is similar to the concept of inscriptions among humans, but the level between the two is completely different. He tells him that inscriptions among dragons are the technique of the God's Line. Sheng is surprised when he tells him the God's Line. The dragon tells him that this is a style inherited from the beginning of creation and has been developing until today. Sheng becomes more enthusiastic and makes me want to start now. The dragon tells him that his spiritual power is still very weak, which means that the inscriptions he will learn will also be of a weak level. Then he asks him, "Are you sure you want to start now?" Sheng says that the journey of a thousand miles begins with a single step, and he wants to start his steps as soon as possible. The dragon says, "You are right, by the way. And the first thing I will do for you or teach you is to focus your spirit on the spirit of the brush." Sheng says, "Does it have a brush too? And also spiritual focus?" The dragon said, "What did you think you would draw inscriptions with, teacher?" He tells him that it's not just a little bit. He tried the spirit needle technique to compress his spirit and use it in attack. He tells him that it will be something like that, but instead of attacking, he will focus the power on the tip of the brush. He tells him that he will start teaching him from a book and asks him to prepare a black unicorn horn and many other things that he will tell him, by the way, to prepare them. The next morning, Sheng arrives for the third fight with the elite, and he will finish it quickly to catch up and buy the sack of many requests that the dragon asked him for. Sheng sees that the audience is a bit larger today, and the surprise is that Elder Fei is also present, who feels that Sheng's actions are strange and unnatural. When he focuses on him, he realizes that someone is controlling him and that no one can do that except the Dream Weaver. From here, he understands that this noblewoman is behind all of this. The fight begins and ends at the same moment with a single punch from Sheng, which he finishes off his opponent with. Sheng tells them, "Is this your last one? Wait for me tomorrow to teach you a new lesson." Then he flies away to buy the dragon's requests. The students curse him as usual, and Mr. Fei tells them, "What will you do when you know the truth?" Sheng goes to the market and reaches the treasure shop. When he tells the merchant his requests, the merchant asks him, "You want to draw inscriptions?" He says, "Yes." The merchant gets angry and says, "Do you think inscriptions are a game, or did you find yourself with some free time and nothing to do, so you came to me to joke around?" Sheng tells him that he wants to train in drawing inscriptions and gives him a paper with the requests he wants. The merchant takes the paper from him, reads it, and says, "You will take all these things for training." He is surprised. Sheng says, "What's it to you? Isn't this a shop for trade, or do you not want to work?" He says, "I don't want to work with children, and these requests can be used to make fourth-level inscriptions." He is surprised. Sheng says to the merchant, "Then what difference will it make to you, as long as I pay you money for what I buy?" He says, "I don't want your money." He then grabs his jade stone and says, "This is indeed an unexpected problem." The dragon tells Sheng that he can help him convince the merchant. He tells him that the merchant is currently holding a jade stone, and this stone has the ancient Phoenix tribe's language on it, and he is trying to read it but can't. The dragon tells him that he will translate it for him, and maybe then he will change his mind and sell him the requests. Sheng clears his throat and begins to translate the inscriptions written on the stone in the merchant's hand. The merchant notices Sheng. He was talking about the jade in his hand and respectfully asks him to continue what he was saying. Sheng tells him, "You don't want to sell to me, and therefore I will not continue." He says, "Then let's talk." Sheng turns around, and the man treats him with excessive respect, apologizes for his rudeness, and begs him to read what was written on the jade stone. Sheng agrees, but on the condition that the merchant gives him a 30% discount on the goods. The merchant thinks for a moment, then agrees in the end and asks him to continue the inscriptions. He says, "How did you learn the ancient Phoenix language, knowing that all of this tribe is dead?" Sheng says, "That's a secret I can't tell you. But if you have any language you don't understand, you can show it to me, and I'll read it for you." The merchant is shocked that a young man like Sheng knows all the ancient languages. The dragon tells Sheng, "Don't brag at my expense, man. And who told you that I know all the ancient languages? Damn you." Sheng says, "Don't worry, when the time comes, we'll deal with it, it's fine." The merchant brings the requests and also brings him a box of brushes for him to choose one from. Sheng tells the merchant that he will take the yellow one. The merchant says that only the great masters of inscriptions can control this brush. He tells him that the bill after the discount will be 580 medium energy stones. Sheng prepares the drawing tools and starts scribbling on the paper. The dragon tells him, "This nonsense you're doing is upsetting me, by the way." Sheng says, "If you don't like it, you draw it and show me." The dragon says, "Do you want me to draw a one-star inscription? That would be an insult to me, teacher. It's like asking the head chef to boil an egg for you." Sheng tries, but he won't like it. The dragon tells him he has a better idea. Suddenly, the dragon appears to him, and Sheng is surprised. The dragon tells him that what you see is a very small part of my spirit, it will help you until you learn to draw. The dragon goes around the pen, and then disappears. The pen starts to move on its own. The dragon asks Sheng to hold the pen and try again. Sheng is stunned and picks up the pen and starts drawing. The dragon asks Sheng for his opinion on the drawn inscription. Sheng draws the first inscription correctly. The dragon tells him, "To tell you the truth, you have exceeded my expectations in drawing it." He tells him that he thought when he helped him, he would need half a year to learn to draw something like this and draw it with these strokes. Sheng is good because I don't intend to stop here. Sheng starts drawing again on the paper. The dragon tells him, "This is the perfect brush." Sheng says, "What?" The dragon says that the perfect brush is formed when the artist distributes the drawing components in the best way possible on the entire inscription. It resembles the intention of the sword when every swordsman tries to achieve it, but only a very few swordsmen can reach it. The dragon says about Sheng, "We are just teaching him how to hold the brush, and he has reached the perfect brush for the first star inscription." The dragon says that this naughty boy seems to have been born to be a master of inscriptions. Sheng trains himself in inscriptions. The dragon tells him that he should use the ghost array, but he won't need it now. He tells him to pass his energy through it. Sheng passes his energy into the inscriptions, and then a great light fills the place. Then Sheng feels that all the fatigue and exhaustion in his body have gone. He says he didn't expect the first star inscription to be so wonderful. He says to himself, "How much is this inscription worth?" He says he will ask the merchant about it tomorrow. The next day, Sheng wins the fight as usual and rushes to learn inscriptions. The next day, the same system. Then this noblewoman says to him, "Why did Sheng suddenly start learning to draw inscriptions? Training in martial arts is better for him." Dream Weaver tells her that she doesn't see him doing anything wrong. He tells her that he sees him as a very intelligent young man and will stop him if he feels it is difficult for him. She tells him that there is no time for that and that he must quickly abandon the drawing and train to reach the Crystal World as quickly as possible. Then the noblewoman burns the inscription Sheng drew and says to herself that she can follow the same method with Sheng here. Then the noblewoman calls for Zuri. When Dream Weaver hears her, he says, "Are you really going to let Zong teach Sheng to draw inscriptions?" Then Zong arrives, who is at the level of virtual disaster. The noblewoman asks him how far he has reached in reinforcing the defensive array of the temple. He tells her that he is calculating the required resources and cost and will tell her soon. She tells him that she wants something else. She tells him that she will find someone who is overly confident and wants to learn inscriptions, and she wants you to destroy his self-confidence and make him forget about inscriptions completely. Mr. Zong is surprised and asks her, "What is his name? And what level has he reached in inscriptions?" She tells him his name is Lu Sheng, and surely you have heard of him. He is still a beginner in drawing inscriptions. He tells her, "This is the young man who was able to challenge all the elite students, and there is no one who hasn't heard of him." She tells him that he is going to the market now and asks him to catch up. He goes and sees Sheng and knows that he is in the fourth level of the Sky World. He says he will destroy his self-confidence so that he cannot hold the brush again. Sheng goes to the treasure shop, and the merchant asks him the reason for his visit. Before Sheng can answer, Zong enters and tells the merchant, "It's been a long time, guys. We haven't met Sheng for a long time." The merchant welcomes him and asks him, "Who is this young man?" He tells him, "This is Lu Sheng, he is new here in the Elite Hall, a beginner in the art of inscriptions." He tells Sheng, "This is Mr. Zong, the best inscription artist in the Cloud Temple. If you want to learn something about inscriptions, you have no one but Mr. Zong." Sheng tells him that he doesn't want to bother him and that inscriptions are not essential for him, and he has not reached the level of learning from an expert. If he needs to know something in the future, he can ask Mr. Zong. Mr. Zong says to himself, "What can I teach you? I came here to make you forget the word inscriptions." Mr. Zong tells Sheng, "Then let me see your work so I can give you my opinion." Sheng gives him the drawing he made. Zong is surprised, and the merchant is standing behind him. He says, "He just started yesterday, and it seems he has wasted expensive resources." Zong says to Sheng, "Let me ask you, what level has he reached?" Zong says to himself, "The noblewoman was right when she said that this boy is overly confident." Then Zong looks at the drawing and laughs sarcastically. He says to Sheng, "What have you done? Inscriptions should be small in size, and the lines must be connected to each other. This drawing has no relation to the art of inscriptions at all." He dismisses the idea of learning inscriptions, saying that this requires someone talented, and he has no talent at all. Sheng asks for his opinion. He tells him that Zong is the best artist here, and what he told you is correct. Sheng asks the dragon what is happening. The dragon tells him, "Have you lost your self-confidence so quickly? Forget these fools and get out of here, because they don't deserve to see your inscription." Sheng takes his inscription and leaves. Zong calls him and says, "Why did you take that paper with you?" He tells him, "Throw it in the trash and focus on martial arts, you have great talent in it." Sheng says, "There is something you have forgotten." Zong asks, "What is it?" Sheng replies, "I haven't activated it yet, so how did they know that this inscription is useless?" They argue for a bit. Zong tells Sheng, "Not every line drawn by a dog or a killer can be removed." He tells Sheng, "Do you want to convince me that your inscription can be activated?" Sheng says to himself, "It seems I need to enlighten their minds a bit." He raises the paper and activates the inscription, and a great halo fills the entire shop. Both of them are shocked. Zong says to himself, "This is the perfect brush we heard about in legends, and this is the first time I have seen this phenomenon with my own eyes while activating an inscription. I have spent half my life searching the entire continent for inscriptions drawn with the perfect brush and found nothing. The last one who was able to do something like this was Feng Guan Yu, and his greatest work was the defensive array for the Shuijing Wan sect, thanks to which the sect was able to withstand all the disasters it faced from the Xibing sect, becoming the only sect to reach the level of the Feng sect on the continent." Then Zong screams and says to Sheng, "Did you really draw this inscription?" Sheng replies, "Didn't I tell you that I drew it?" He says, "I don't believe it." Sheng says, "It doesn't matter if you believe it or not." The merchant goes and asks him, "Are you going to look at the inscription again and tell me how much it's worth, or not?" Zong looks at him and says, "How much? Wait, you can't sell something like this." Sheng stutters and says, "I mean, you don't need to sell it to the store as an intermediary. I'll offer to buy it myself." But the merchant intervenes and tells Zong that this is considered rudeness on his part, and Sheng has been his client for a while, and he cannot take him away so easily. Zong shouts at the merchant and says, "Have you forgotten yourself? I am in the Cloud Temple, where I can do whatever I want." A fight begins between Zong and the merchant. Sheng says, "Can you stop the fight for a moment? I have an idea." He tells them that he will hold an auction for it, and whoever pays more will get it. The merchant agrees and says that this inscription will not leave his shop. Zong tells Sheng, "How much do you want?" Sheng tells him that yesterday he paid 100,000 medium-level energy stones, and now he wants 20,000 stones. Both are surprised. He says to himself, "It's worth much more than that." He says to himself, "If Zong wasn't here, I would have made a huge profit from this inscription." The merchant starts the auction with 500,000 low-level energy stones. Zong says he will pay a super-level energy stone, which is worth a million low-level stones. Of course, Sheng is happy and never imagined that one inscription could bring in such a price. The merchant says he will pay five stones, and Zong says ten stones. The merchant then withdraws, saying that the inscription was sold to Mr. Zong for ten super-level energy stones. Zong takes the inscription happily and says to himself that he is lucky because he never expected to find an inscription with the perfect brush in his entire life. After leaving the shop, he asks himself, "What brought me here today?" We go to the noblewoman who is worried and hopes that Zong has succeeded in lowering Sheng's morale so that he forgets about inscriptions. Then the merchant asks Sheng where he got this inscription from. Sheng says that he drew it himself. He says, "Didn't I just buy the goods from you yesterday?" The merchant says to himself, "It seems Sheng is trying to protect the artist." He tells him, "If you can reach the great man who made this inscription, tell him that I am willing to buy large quantities of his inscriptions." Sheng laughs and says, "No problem." He takes out seven inscriptions from his pocket. The merchant's eyes pop out of his head in shock when he sees them. Sheng says, "I drew these drawings because I bought a lot of ingredients from you yesterday." The merchant says, "Surely you are lucky because you didn't complete the auction." The merchant offers to buy all of them for five super-level stones per drawing, and also gives him a discount on future purchases. Sheng sees them and turns into a devil of rage. He says, "This is unfair." He says to Sheng, "You sell me one for ten stones and sell him seven drawings for five stones each." Sheng says, "I didn't force you." The merchant says to himself that he can only blame himself and his heart fills with rage. He takes out a paper and a brush from his pocket and says to Sheng, "You said you are the artist, take these and prove that you drew these things." He tells him that if he cannot prove it, he is a fraud, and then he will take back his ten stones. Sheng says, "What if I draw one inscription in front of you?" Zong says, "Then I will be your student." Sheng laughs and says, "How can someone as humble as me be a teacher to the master of the temple? No, man, I just want one thing." Zong asks, "What is that thing?" He says, "If I pass the test, I will take your brush." Zong thinks to himself, "How can I risk my brush made of 1000-year-old fire bamboo? It is a great treasure, and its tip does not shake when drawing. It is also relied upon for drawing the defensive array of the temple." Sheng refuses to bet his brush, leaves him, and says, "If you don't want to risk your brush, I won't risk my reputation with you." Then Zong calls Sheng and says, "Wait." He tells him, "If you can draw an inscription with a perfect brush, I will give you what you want." Sheng says, "But you have to remember your words and don't forget what you said." He gives him ink from third-level inscriptions as well. Sheng says, "This is ordinary ink, because I am a beginner and not used to high-level inks." Zong says to himself, "How did he reach the level of the perfect brush when he only uses ordinary inks? Is this boy joking with me?" They bring him ordinary ink, and Sheng starts drawing. He manages to draw a shining inscription with the perfect brush. When they saw it, they were almost stunned by its magnificence. Sheng promises them that he will preserve it and says goodbye. "Don't forget the messages, okay?" Then Zong says to himself that what he saw is a great talent beyond their comprehension, and they cannot understand it. He must immediately submit a report to the Commercial Tek Tek headquarters. Then he remembers the noblewoman and says that he must inform her of what happened right now. We go to the noblewoman who is trying to concentrate to reach the peak level of the God's Land, but Zong arrives and asks for permission to enter. The noblewoman asks him, "What is the urgent matter that brought you here now?" She allows him to enter, and he rushes to her. She asks him, "What is the important news that made you complete your mission so quickly to come to me again?" He tells her, "My mission." She tells him, "Then what brought you here? Don't tell me it's about an important matter." He tells her that Sheng has an unparalleled talent for inscriptions, to the point that one day he will be better than the legendary Prince of Inscriptions himself, and there is no need to stand in the way of his learning inscriptions. He tells her that although he only started drawing yesterday, he was able to draw an inscription with the perfect brush, and it was the first time he had seen such a unique inscription. No one in the history of the entire continent has been able to draw an inscription like it. The noblewoman says, "You must be joking, Zong." He tells her, "Can I lie to you, madam?" She tells him that he invented this whole story to cover up his failure in the mission. He swears to her that everything he said is true, word for word. He gives her the inscription he bought from him. When she sees it and its halo, she can't believe it and says, "Is it possible that Lu Sheng really drew this inscription?" He says, "Of course." She says, "Then let him learn to draw. This will greatly help us with our defensive array." Then she says to herself that she will wait to see how far this naughty boy will go. The next day, Sheng wakes up, stretches, and is very happy that he is free and no one is controlling his body. He says, "Finally, she stopped controlling me, and I'm done with the daily challenges." Then he remembers the dragon telling him that there is a four-star inscription that, if learned, will allow him to train faster. Then he remembers that merchant Shang told him that the ingredients for fourth-rank inscriptions were not available at his shop, and he gave him an invitation to the Commercial Tek Tek itself to look there. He says to himself, "I'll try, maybe I'll find the ingredients I want there." Then he discovers that the inscription he made has made him capable of flying very fast. When he reaches the Commercial Tek Tek, the security prevents him from entering and tells him, "Even a boy from the Sky World wants to enter the Commercial Tek Tek? You look like you want to die, son, or what?" He shows them the invitation he has and tells them that no one can prevent him from entering. Mr. Mo Zong, the head of the Tek Tek Commercial Branch in the Cloud Temple, arrives and tells Sheng, "Young Master Lu Sheng has arrived himself. We welcome you. We apologize for not waiting for you at the gate." The security, of course, I don't need to tell you what happened to them out of fear. When they saw Mr. Mo treating Sheng with such respect, they were so surprised that their mouths opened 90 degrees. He asks him, "Who are you?" He tells him his name is Mo Zong and respectfully asks him to enter with him. The security is surprised that Sheng doesn't know that the person talking to him is someone important here. He tells him that they almost got into big trouble with this young man. Inside the temple, President Mo asks Sheng if he is here to sell or buy. He tells him that he has inscriptions and wants to sell them, but what brought him here is that he wants to buy and get some information. He tells him, "We are at your service for everything you request, hero." He gives him a golden card and tells him that they made it especially for him, and through it he will get a 20% discount on everything he buys from them. He also tells him that they will buy all the inscriptions he makes from him at a higher price than anyone outside. Sheng shows him the inscriptions he drew yesterday and says that their level is all one star, but when used, their level will be two stars. The president is very impressed with the inscriptions and says that it is indeed as merchant Shang said, and he can also sell these drawings at a good price. Then he asks Sheng what he wants to buy. When Sheng tells him his strange and difficult requests, the president says they are very rare ingredients, and to collect them, he needs at least 10 years. He promises him that he will send people to search for them in their branches and contact him. Then he tells Sheng that he knows some information about thunder bamboo and has a map of the place where it is planted. Sheng asks how much it costs. He tells him that he will give it to him for free, but the problem is that it is located on Mount Yin in the western region, and it is a dangerous place. He insists on going himself to find his ingredients. President Mo says, "How can the Cloud Temple let this scoundrel move alone without escort?" Sheng arrives in the western region and goes to a hotel. He is not comfortable with the people there. Someone from the restaurant comes and asks him for a dish of every type. The man says, "Right away, sir." It appears from their appearance that they are monsters or bandits. Sheng says, "Why do all these people here look so strange?" Then he says to himself, "I'd better eat and leave." The food was delicious. Then they attacked him fiercely. Then he finds them surprised and looks at them. He asks them, "What's wrong?" They say, "Nothing." He tells them, "I'll tell you. You're probably wondering why the poison hasn't worked yet." They are shocked. Their leader asks them to arrest him. He lets them tie him up as they please to get to the bottom of it and find out what they want from him. The leader says, "I don't know how the poison didn't affect you, but you were surprised by the direct attack." Then he tells Sheng not to try to escape, and also tells him that he is wearing armor resistant to the energy of fighters. Then he asks his men to take him downstairs and tells them that they have found a good pig today. Sheng says, "What are you looking at? You consider yourself dead, teacher." They take him downstairs to a place full of tied-up people. He asks them what they want from him, and no one answers. He hears someone say, "A new pig has arrived, guys." He says, "What's going on? Every time someone sees me, they call me a pig." Another says, "You've fallen into the trap." He asks him for his clan name. He says, "From the Cloud Temple." The other says, "How can someone as insignificant as you mention the name of the Cloud Temple?" He says, "Believe it or not, I don't care, but tell me, what does 'pig' mean?" He says, "Because we are all like pigs here, and we will be eaten by monsters soon." Sheng says, "I can save you, but I want to know some details about this matter." He says, "Save who, man? You save yourself first." He also tells him that his words are too big for someone still in the fourth level of the Sky World. Another says, "This place is for capturing fighters in the Sky World, and the mountain we are on has inscriptions that restrict the internal power of anyone in the Sky World or even lower." He breaks the ropes and says, "You mean like this?" Everyone's face turns red with surprise. They say, "How was he able to break the rope with just his physical strength, without even using his internal energy?" They ask him to untie them. He tells them, "Okay, but first tell me what's going on here." They ask him if he knows that thunder bamboo is planted in this region. He tells them that he knows. One of them says that Mount Yin is full of monsters, and the big clans hire the hotel owners here to capture fighters from the Sky World to be bait for the monsters. He tells him that thunder bamboo is a strange plant that is born underground and takes hundreds or thousands of years to reach the surface. But after it emerges from the soil, it grows very rapidly. He tells him that when the bamboo emerges from the ground, the sky is filled with lightning and thunder. But this happens with bamboo that has been underground for thousands of years. He tells him that a few days ago, purple lightning appeared in the sky in the shape of a dragon, which means that thunder bamboo, at least 1000 years old, has appeared. He tells him that this is why the villains capture people like us to be bait for entering the mountain, because if they encounter a monster in the mountain, they throw one of us to it so they can escape. Sheng says, "Okay, get ready to leave." He begins to free them one by one. Then they leave the warehouse to escape, but they are discovered as they try to escape. Giant figures appear to capture them and return them to prison. Suddenly, the villains arrive flying in the sky and say that they have gathered a large number of pigs, and it is time to move. Then they tie them all up again, including Sheng, who says to himself, "There are so many of them." He says, "Is it possible that all these people are here for the bamboo?" Sheng flies up and says, "I have to escape from here without these three seeing me." Mr. Young Master, the head of the clan, arrives and asks about the preparations. They tell him that they have gathered 1036 people. He tells them that he will give them a reward and takes them all to the forest. Sheng sees that escape has become very difficult with the presence of the leader from the last level of the God's Land. Then he stops them, and the leader begins to cast his spell on the mountain. Then he points them in the direction they should go. Sheng follows them like a herd in the forest. The dragon starts to laugh. Sheng says, "Why are you laughing when I'm in trouble here? You're so annoying." The dragon tells him, "You are not in trouble, and this might be a great opportunity for you." Then Sheng says, "An opportunity for me?" The dragon says, "Yes." He asks him not to try to escape and tells him that they will not use him as bait and will also protect him. He also tells him that if things go as he expects, he will reach the God's Land level on this journey. Sheng comes out and asks him, "What are they planning?" He tells him, "You don't need to know now, boy." Indeed, monsters begin to appear, and they kill them with ease. He says that the dragon is right and sees that they don't need bait to hunt monsters. He asks the dragon, "Curiosity is killing me. Tell me your plan." He tells him, "Look ahead." Sheng is surprised to see the dragon standing in front of them, standing on a tower. The leader says that these people think the lightning phenomenon is caused by thunder, but the very tall dragon tower is the real cause. He says that nothing will stand between him and his goal now. His followers congratulate him on his great achievement. The dragon looks at the people and keeps screaming. They are very disturbed by his loud voice and tremble with fear. The young leader orders his men to feed the people to the dragon until it is full. They begin to throw prisoners at it, and it eats them like gnats. Sheng says, "What will happen now? Or will you wait until the dragon eats me?" The dragon tells him, "When they throw you to the dragon to eat, run quickly towards the tower gate and leave the rest to me." It is Sheng's turn, and they throw him to the dragon to eat. The dragon inside Sheng suddenly appears, and no one sees it. It attacks the other dragon until it is scared and leaves Sheng, trembling. The leader says, "How did this young man let out such a strong dragon roar? He wonders if he was hiding among the pigs to get here." Then he says to himself, "Even if he can escape from the dragon, he cannot escape from the door because I have the key." Sheng reaches the ground and runs to the tower door and finds it locked. He says to the dragon, "What will I do now?" The dragon tells him, "Don't worry, I'll open it for you." He sends him a very small dragon that enters the keyhole and opens the gate. Lightning and thunder begin to work. The young leader is going crazy that Sheng was able to open the gate. He orders them to throw the rest of the pigs quickly so that the dragon can eat and be full, and then he can go down to this place. The dragon tells him, "Walk and be quiet." Sheng says, "Gorillas." The dragon asks him to bypass them to reach the top of the tower quickly, or all their efforts will be in vain. He tries to bypass the array and the gorillas, but he can't. The gorillas come and kill him so he can pass them. Then he absorbs the life energy from the monsters and takes advantage of the fact that this is happening with real monsters. He says to himself, "What is this place exactly?" He encounters a very strange array and stands in front of it. The dragon tells him that this is an array drawn with the God's Line inscriptions, and its level is far beyond him, and he will not understand anything from it. He asks him to continue his way to reach the top of the tower quickly. He says to himself, "What are these yellow spheres? And what is this strange feeling in the energy gathering area of my body?" The spheres enter his body, and he reaches the fifth level of the Sky World. The dragon tells him that he is lucky, and these are pure energy spheres from the dragon tribe, and they are very beneficial to fighters, especially those at low levels like him. Sheng says, "If I absorb these spheres, I won't benefit from them and I won't reach the God's Land." The dragon tells him that they are used with fighters whose level is below the God's Land level. He also tells him that the tower appeared recently and has not yet gathered a large amount of energy, and that he has absorbed most of the energy that was in the tower. Sheng continues to ascend and suddenly finds someone coming behind him. He says, "It seems the young leader has arrived." The dragon asks him to calm down and continue his way and not underestimate the array. Sheng says, "Why should I continue to ascend? And now what makes me continue to ascend?" The dragon tells him, "You will know when you reach the top." Sheng ascends and draws his sword and finishes them off. The dragon outside is finally full after eating 1000 people from outside. Suddenly, the Sky Soul Lady arrives. When she sees the dragon, she says that she knew that the bamboo could not be the cause of the thunder and lightning phenomenon. She says she did not expect to see the flying dragon tower. She asks the people standing outside if they are from the Xiu clan. When she learns that their leader has entered the tower, she tells them that she has heard before that their clan is related to the dragon tribe, and this has proven true. They tell her that their master arrived first with the dragon jade, and the tower now belongs to them. She tells them that she also has the dragon jade, and according to them, the tower now belongs to her as well. When she sees the dragon, she is surprised and says, "It seems it tired you out." The dragon, seeing her, flies from the top of the tower, and they think it was afraid of her, so it flew away. She says, "Since the dragon flew away, I'll go inside and see the tower." Suddenly, the sky is filled with crows, and the giant dark crow attacks her. He says, "It seems I'm a little late." She says, "I arrived here before you, and this tower now belongs to me." He tells her, "You are one of the masters of the continent, and this tower will add nothing to you." Suddenly, she looks at the sky and sees a flood dragon coming towards them. The crow tells her that it is a toy dragon and that he does not feel any life energy coming from it. The dragon comes with Noblewoman Diyi. The crow asks her where she got this toy dragon from. She tells him, "What's it to you?" She tells them that the tower now belongs to her and no one should think about it anymore. Lady Sky Soul says to the crow that even the Cloud Hall has intervened in the tower, and the matter has become complicated. The crow tells her that the matter has indeed become difficult and complicated. Suddenly, the Seven Strong Men from the Xiuling Clan arrive. The noblewoman says, "I knew they wouldn't miss the opportunity." The crow says, "It's good that their leader didn't come himself." He says that the Seven Strong Men are very powerful, yet he still sees his chance of getting the tower as strong. The leader's supporters.

The young man is afraid for their leader after three large clans appeared at once. The Raven tells them, "You're doing all this for just a soaring dragon tower?" Blood Poison tells him, "If you think it's useless, take yourself and leave." The Raven tells them, "If they all fight over the tower, a war of the four clans will erupt." The Raven talks about the powerful clans in the central region and the intense wars between them, the massacres, and also the seas of blood that the wars cause. He says that their clan and the Shuieng clan were the ones who stopped this war.

Shuan's hall is also reached to join the four clans in the dispute over the tower's ownership. The noblewoman thinks the talks here will take a long time. Shang Hai asks him to run towards the central region quickly. The young leader tries to stop him, but Shang laughs and runs until he reaches his destination. He stands on the circle, and the circle begins to work, emitting an energy. The young leader tries to run to catch up. The dragon laughs and says he made a small modification to the inscription on the circle. The energy bounces from the tower to the sky, which fills with purple. At this moment, the leader of Yu reaches the top of the tower, and thus he is on his way to the Supreme World. Noblewoman Su says that all the clans attach great importance to the Dragon Tower for two reasons. The first reason is that during the ascent, the fighter receives a very large amount of energy and experience. The second, and most important, reason is that inside the tower is a path to the Supreme World.

The young leader reaches the circle and stands on it. He says that the mischievous boy who was before him did not have the Dragon's essence, yet the array worked for him. He tries to activate it, and it doesn't work. When he tries again, it works, but it throws him out of the tower. They are surprised and wonder who then transferred to the Supreme World. He tells them that a trivial person from the sky world transferred. As soon as the noblewoman hears this, she immediately thinks of Lu Sheng and says, "It's impossible for it to be him, and it's impossible for such a coincidence to happen in the whole world." Shang Hai says to himself, "Where have I ended up now?" He finds many arrays and says that one of them is worth a huge fortune in the central plains. The dragon tells him that the fortune you're talking about is worth nothing compared to what their tribe possesses. He tells him that each of these arrays is linked to one of the ring dragon towers and is made specifically for the dragon men. The dragon men are a branch of the dragon tribe, and their bodies have a percentage of dragon blood, which allows them to practice dragon arts and their methods. They are found everywhere in the lower realms, and these towers were built to help them reach the tribe's land.

After that, one by one arrives, riding a very large eagle. He tells Shang, "Outsiders are not allowed to approach the void arrays." He arrests Shang and tells him he is sentenced to 1000 years in prison. Shang Hai tells him, "Don't forget that you don't carry the dragon blood essence in your body." He tells him that these towers were built only for the sub-clan members, and that any outsider who tries to use them will be severely punished. At his current training level, he will live for 300 years, so he will die in prison. The dragon tells him not to worry, because he is with him and will not allow anyone to approach him on his land, even if he doesn't have a real dragon body. He takes him to prison, and he sees inscriptions on the walls like those he learned. The dragon tells him that this is just a small city for the dragon men where they receive new arrivals, and it's not even worth him bothering to draw on. He also tells him that even their capital is not worth visiting. Shang says to himself, "It seems this dragon is at a higher level than I expected."

Shang reaches his cell and sees many prisoners. He says, "I wonder if all these people are here for the thousand-year punishment." He notices that among them are people of the virtual disaster level. Then he says to the dragon, "What will we do now? Surely you have a plan to get out of here." The dragon asks him to bring out the drawing tools. The prisoners are surprised when they see him, wondering how he can draw at such a low level. Shang draws the inscriptions on the paper, and everyone is impressed by the glow emanating from the inscription. They are surprised that he has reached the perfect brush. They talk to him, but he doesn't respond. They get angry with him from their cages, and their voices rise. The guard arrives to silence them. The dragon asks Shang to hand the inscription to the guard. He calls the guard, and the guard gets annoyed with him. He goes to him and asks, "What do you want?" He tells him, "Hand this to the prison warden." The guard bursts out laughing and says, "You don't know who the prison warden is, you scoundrel!" And that's without even looking at the paper. Then he asks Shang to go sit in his place and shut up, and that he will deal with him and settle it his way. Shang says to him, "Okay, how about you look at the paper and then decide?" As soon as he looks at the paper, he trembles and says, "This is the Godly Script technique. Where did you get it from?" The dragon asks Shang to tell him that he got it from the world of the underworld from someone named King Shuan, and that he gave him this inscription as a pass to meet them. He immediately opened his cell and asked him to wait here until he informs the warden.

Shang Hai asks, "What is the meaning of the inscription he made?" The dragon tells him that this city is not just a place for arrivals or their punishment. He tells him that he put a strand of his soul in the inscription, along with a message that he will not feel, but the warden, who is the ruler of the city, will see it. The dragon continues, saying that when this city was built, it was not for demons or foundlings, but for training the elite of the dragon men to join the main tribe. He tells him that this is happening now with people who have enough talent, and they are being trained at the highest level. He asked the ruler in the message to allow him to train here. Shang grumbles. The dragon tells him, "You will see for yourself in a little while." Then Shang says to himself that the dragon helped him a lot and he's annoyed that he doesn't know anything about him. He says to the dragon, "Since we've reached the end of your world, why don't you reveal yourself to them?" The dragon tells him, "What do I gain by revealing myself to them?" He says that there are many things that are not easy to change. Shang says to himself that he owes the dragon a lot and that the day will come when he will be able to repay his kindness.

The guard arrives and gives Shang an identification card from the ruler. He tells him that the ruler received the message and that he can train in the city as if he were a dragon man. They take him on the giant eagle and bring him to the training area. There, when the trainer sees Shang, he asks the guard, "Who is this? Why did you bring him here? He's not one of us." Someone with him tells him that he feels a flood dragon aura in his body and maybe he drank flood dragon before, but he is too far from being a dragon man. The guard tells him that the city ruler handed him an identification card and ordered him to train with them. The trainer says, "The esteemed ruler himself!" He tells him, "Come with us, then, to get the dragon blood essence first, and then start training with us." Shang Hai asks about the dragon blood. The trainer tells him that after accepting dragon men for training, their bloodline is strengthened with a single drop of dragon blood essence. Even though you are not one of the dragon men, since you are coming through the ruler, you deserve to get a drop. He takes his identification card. Shang Hai says, "Your kindness is so great that they gave me such a precious drop as soon as I joined them." The dragon tells him that this is a small thing and that the body of an adult original dragon reaches a length of 100,000 meters, and the amount of blood in its body could drown entire cities if it spilled. The trainer tells Shang, "Wait here, I'll get you a drop of blood." When he gives it to him, he tells him that there are many rooms here, choose one, then drink the drop of blood, and then look for him to train with him.

Shang goes to his room and takes out the drop of blood, very happy with it, looking at it. The dragon tells him, "Are you going to keep looking at it for a long time?" He tells him that if he doesn't drink it quickly, he will drink it. Shang takes it and is very excited. He feels his body burning and his skin burning. After a while, he wakes up and sees the trainer. He tells him, "You're better now, and you're one of us." He tells him, "Come with me." He takes him to the spirit pillars and tells him that the pillars are inscribed with all kinds of training methods, and that he needs to see them with his spirit, and then he will learn. He asks him to put his spirit into one of the pillars so he can see what's inside. He tells him, "If you feel you can't, don't try, because it might harm you." Shang stands in front of the pillar and gets close to touching it with his spirit from the outside. As soon as he touches it, he knows it's the pillar of space laws. He sees that this is the most suitable one for him. Suddenly, he finds himself stuck to the pillar and can't escape. Shang, when he found himself stuck to the pillar, took advantage of the fact that even though his spirit is not a physical thing, it got stuck to the pillar. He sees people climbing the pillar, so he realizes he has to climb like them. He begins to climb and feels a strange power lifting him when he moves his hand. He knows it's the power of space, and this is the method of training the pillar for the power of space. He continues and says to himself, "Let's see where we'll end up." He sees many people falling from the pillar around him. The trainer tells them that their spirits have been harmed by the pillar and that he will not allow them to try again.

Shang Hai climbs very quickly. Shang Hai is freed from gravity first. He knows that if he uses force to climb, he will be harmed. He realizes that the lines on the pillar contain the laws of space, and he says to himself that he must study them now. When he can understand them, he will be able to ascend to the higher level. He finds that the higher he ascends, the more difficult and important the laws inscribed on the pillar become. He thanks his luck that he actually took a step in learning the laws of space. He feels no gravity at all. The dragon calls him a true genius. Shang Hai descends, and it's very fast. Everyone around him looks at him with surprise. His trainer, when he sees him ascending so quickly, says, "It seems he has studied the laws of space extensively before, but if he relies on his past experiences, it will be very difficult for him later." Shang Hai returns again and says that he must study this area first before passing it. The trainer Wei tells him that he expected that to happen, but the height he reached is not bad.

Zhuo Ziyang, the deacon of the Fire Dragon Temple, arrives and asks Elder Wei about the number of elite fighters who graduated this time. Elder Wei tells him that none have graduated yet. He asks him, "How many have you graduated?" He says he graduated the students standing behind them, and they all come from famous clan branches and will be appointed as elites in the main branch. Elder Wei congratulates him and assures him that they will meet. They thank him for his kindness, but Elder Wei is annoyed and says that Zhuo is arrogant. He wishes he had students from the clans like him who could join the elite. Then Shang focuses and notices that he is still advancing. He says that since he has reached this stage without anyone guiding him, he surely deserves to be among the elite. He says to himself, "What are you thinking? You are already there." Then Zhuo sees him and asks his students if any of them want to try the space laws pillar. He tells them that he expects them not to lose to anyone else. One of his students, named Zhou Wang, comes forward and says, "I will ascend." Zhuo says, "Zhou will ascend." He asks him to overcome Shang and show his talent to everyone. Zhou begins to ascend. Elder Zhuo says that Zhou has studied the entire first level of space laws in his clan, and therefore he will be able to reach a long distance on the pillar with ease. The trainer Wei is annoyed by Zhou's ascent towards Shang, who reaches quickly and begins to annoy him. He calls him and says, "Is this your limit? Will you keep going slowly like a turtle, or do you intend to get stuck in place?" Shang says, "Am I holding onto your leg, man? The pillar is right there, and you can jump on it like a monkey." Zhou says to Shang, "If you're a man, catch up to me." He begins to ascend quickly. Shang is surprised and says, "Where did this jester come from?" Then he says to himself that he will not waste his time with him, and the most important thing is to master every inch of this area. He continues at the level he is at and begins to ascend. Zhou says to him, "Finally, you listened to me and are trying to catch up to me." But he is surprised. He will not allow himself to lose to him, but he is surprised by the understanding. He becomes afraid and raises his voice, saying, "It's clear that a name of an elite student will be written in my history." Elder Zhuo looks at him out of the corner of his eye, sticking out his tongue, unable to speak. He looks at his student Zhuo, who can no longer continue, and says, "It seems he has reached his limit." He asks him to descend himself rather than be humiliated. The students laugh at him and say, "You are still young and can challenge him again." Zhuo shouts at Shang with bitterness, saying, "Don't get overconfident. My mind is just not focused this time, but next time I will be focused and I will completely defeat you."

Shang Hai has gathered everything he learned on his way to the point he reached, such as the black lines he learned on the path of the quest and the events he encountered on the path itself during the distance. He tries to remember the origin of the void law and reaches the law. He says that if time is the noble in space, then space is the king. Thus, he has understood the law well. Void leaps depend entirely on understanding the law of space. He realizes that the barrier in front of him is a test of what he has understood so far, and he must leap through it into the pillar. He stops and is able to enter the pillar. The trainer Wei says that Shang started from scratch and was able to enter the pillar in just 12 hours, and that the word "elite" is too little for his talent. Elder Zhuo, when he hears him, says that this is the first time he has ascended the pillar and he can't believe it. He says, "Impossible." The trainer Wei tells him that if someone told him that this happened to him too, he wouldn't believe it. Suddenly, the pillar begins to shake, and everyone rushes to it. The trainer Wei sees that something is wrong and that he must get Shang out. Shang Hai leaps upwards, and a large energy begins to emanate from Shang. The trainer says that this is the phenomenon of space purification, and everyone on the pillar begins to fall. Everyone in the place screams and says, "What's happening? What's happening?" The trainer Wei says that he never expected to see the phenomenon of space purification in his life, and that whoever experiences this phenomenon can study the rest of the laws, whether in space science or other sciences, with ease. He sees that Shang is very lucky. Elder Zhuo tells him that they used to read about the phenomenon of space purification in history books. Zhuo is sad and says, "I should have been in his place." Shang Hai contemplates on the pillar and says that he feels all the pillars are calling him. His trainer asks him to do him a favor and tell him his name. Elder Zhuo is surprised that he doesn't know his name and says, "This means you haven't joined the Identity Dragon Palace yet." Elder Zhuo asks Shang to join the Fire Dragon Temple and tells him that there are 936 temples and 300 palaces for dragon men, and that the Fire Dragon Temple is ranked among the top 200 temples. He asks him to join the temple and promises him a brilliant future. Elder Wei tells Elder Zhuo, "Be patient, old man. We gave him a drop of dragon blood, so he is already half affiliated with us." He also tells him that he cannot act as if he doesn't see the Identity Dragon Palace with his own eyes. Elder Zhuo says, "That's why I thought the dragon blood in his body was insignificant." He tells Elder Wei that they gave him one drop of dragon blood and offers Shang to join him, and he will give him 10 drops of dragon blood at once. Elder Wei asks Shang not to listen to him and tells him that the last drops of dragon blood are not difficult to obtain and that he can also give them to him after submitting a report. Shang Hai says, "This is exactly what's happening, guys!" He also says that he doesn't want to join anyone. Then he thinks and says that the effect of dragon blood is tremendous on him, and that just one drop has made a big change in his body. He says, "What if I took more?" Then he apologizes to the elder for the delay in responding and tells him that his name is Lu Sheng and that he has also accepted the invitation to join. Elder Wei is very happy with Shang's words and tells him that his name is also beautiful. He congratulates himself and says that he has secured a seat for one of his students among the elite. He asks him if he will study the rest of the laws or move to another location. Shang Hai says, "I will stay here and study the rest of the laws." Elder Zhuo will explode with rage. Shang Hai is below, and we see Blood Poison saying, "How long will we keep talking and deciding who gets the tower?" She says it's better to start fighting. The Seven Guardians say that things like this are taken by the strongest, and thus they are rightfully theirs. The noblewoman Dai tells them, "Do you think if there's a fight, the Cloud Temple will lose to your clan?" They tell her, "Let's try." The West sees that there is no agreement between the parties and that war will erupt soon. The Trade Conglomerate arrives and tells them, "Do you think this tower alone will make you start a war that covers the entire continent?" He asks them to calm down and discuss. The noblewoman Dai tells him that he has come late and that they tried to resolve the issue through discussion, but to no avail. She asks them, "What brought you here to mediate between us?" They argue with her and say that she is from the Trade Conglomerate region and is no less than anyone else here, and if they want to resolve this issue, they must listen to them. Her brother tells them that the Trade Conglomerate is holding a martial arts tournament, and Blood Poison tells him that she knows about it and that it is held every ten years, allowing everyone to participate, whether they are from clans or free fighters, provided that the fighters are within the middle of the God's land. He tells them that their clan is using the tournament to communicate and have dialogues with other clans. He tells them that they will set a date for the tournament soon, and the winner of the first place will receive the Soaring Dragon Tower, and the second and third place winners will receive great prizes. The Seven Guardians tell him that the Trade Conglomerate is a neutral and impartial region, and they agree to this offer. Blood Poison also agrees, and Noblewoman Dai also agrees, and the West also agrees. The Trade Conglomerate tells them that since everyone agrees, they will move the tower to their capital city of End of the World to protect it, and the tournament will begin three months from today. The noblewoman Dai says to herself that a martial arts tournament will be a way for the great powers to show off their youth to the world. She says, "I wish this tournament was delayed by a few more years so that Shang could attend it, and I'm sure he would have amazed you."

We return to Shang Hai, who is finishing the pillars one by one. Teacher Wei can't believe his eyes and says, "He can't be human, because he reached the top of nine pillars in just three days!" He says that this level for Shang Hai means moving to higher training levels. He tells Shang that he will move to the spirit training stage and tells him, "Follow me." Shang Hai has never trained his spirit before, so he absorbed a large amount of spirit energy from the nightmare demon. However, he has truly entered spirit training now, and this is a great opportunity he has been waiting for. Then, when they reached the training area, Shang is surprised by something huge, like a planet. He feels a great pressure on his spirit and asks the trainer, "What is this?" The trainer tells him that this is the remnant spirit of vengeance from an ancient monstrous bird, and its level has reached that of an emerald-ranked warrior spirit. Shang Hai asks, "Smell?" The trainer says, "Exactly." He says, "It seems you haven't heard of these things before, and I will tell you about them." He says that the term "warrior spirit" means a strong spirit that can fight on its own, but it's not easy, otherwise everyone would have a warrior spirit. To reach it, you need difficult training and talent, and only then can you fully use the power of your spirit in combat. Shang says to the trainer, "You said warrior spirit training is difficult." He waits for him to tell him how to train it. The trainer says, "If you want an answer to your question, send your spirit to the warrior spirit." Shang Hai leaps up and says, "This elder seems to be joking with me." The elder says, "These things are no joke, and all the students you see here have also sent their spirits. This is the fastest and best way to train." Shang sits down with them and says to himself, "You won't lose anything by trying. If something happens to you, the dragon spirit inside you will protect you." He begins to send his spirit upwards, feeling immense energy pressure. Then he says to himself, "What next?" He sees yellow circles resembling the sun. When he gets closer, he feels comfortable. Then he says to himself, "Could these be spirit healing lamps?" Then he goes to a student sitting there and asks, "I'm new here, can you tell me how to train my spirit?" He tells him that the vengeful bird's spirit is trapped in the middle of the void behind him and that there is always a great spirit agitation. The void there is divided into six levels, and each level doubles. As he gets closer to the spirit, the levels increase. He says, "All you need to do is train your spirit to withstand the pressure until you find a lamp and can renew your vitality through it. But be careful, as you get closer to the spirit, the number of lamps decreases, and the difficulty of training there doubles." Shang Hai says, "It's a strong spirit like my body." Shang begins his spirit training journey. He starts to get closer and feels the pressure, but he says to himself, "Endure. Every step you take will increase the benefit." The students look at him, terrified by what he is doing, and say, "Is this guy crazy or what?" Kuang, as soon as he sees him there, says, "Your end is near at my hands." But when he sees many people sitting, they say he won't be able to fight them, but when they meet in the spirit realm, the situation will be different. He says that his clan is known for the high power of their spirits from the moment they are born, and this level is nothing to him. He begins to advance, looking for Shang, who has reached the second circle without stopping. Everyone is talking about him. One of them says, "Even though he is a newcomer here and this is his first time, he has reached a point that I have been trying to reach for years." Suddenly, Kuang begins to run towards Shang and attacks him. Shang says, "What do you want? We have no enmity, so why do you keep getting in my way and blocking me?" Kuang tells him that he doesn't need a reason to block or obstruct his path, and it's enough that he doesn't like his appearance. Shang Hai says, "There are many people like you, and their end was bad." Suddenly, Kuang transforms his spiritual power into a sword and attacks Shang. Shang dodges the blows, and all the students watch and say, "This is not the first time Kuang has attacked a newcomer, and many newcomers have been killed by him mercilessly. Shang should not have provoked him and should have left the spirit realm quickly before Kuang finished him off." But the fight is still going on. Shang Hai says, "You probably haven't heard of spirit combat, and you think Shang is running away from you." He says, "Where will you go from me?" Shang Hai says, "Spirit combat?" He remembers that he has heard of it before. He begins to separate a part of his spirit and use it as a needle, stabbing the arrogant Kuang. Kuang can't believe that someone can attack him and injure him. He begins to attack Shang with all his might, but he is surprised that Shang has disappeared from him. He looks for him but can't find him. The students in the place see that he has surrendered and withdrawn his spirit. Shang Hai says, "He's gone." Suddenly, he appears and begins to play with his fingers at Kuang, provoking him. Kuang attacks Shang to hit him. As soon as he reaches him, Shang, standing confidently, says calmly, "If I were you, I would look behind me first." Kuang looks behind him and sees soldiers standing and saying, "Combat in the spirit realm is forbidden, and whoever starts fighting here will be punished with 1000 years in prison." Kuang gets scared and retreats, saying, "It's better for you, I don't want to see your face here again." Shang Hai says, "I'm going inside now. If you think you're a man, follow me." The other gets angry and grits his teeth, advancing towards Shang, who has reached the third circle. Kuang tries to enter, but he can't due to the high pressure, so he retreats to the lamp to recover. Then he continues to chase Shang, who saw that this idiot wouldn't leave him alone, but he is surprised why Kuang is advancing towards the first circles. Kuang gets tired from running and heals himself next to the lamp, saying to himself that his spirit power can only take him to the next lamp. He is surprised that Shang is standing at the lamp and will jump to this power to advance so quickly. He interrupts his healing so as not to waste time and says that he must capture this insect within two minutes. After four hours of chasing Shang, he finds that he has disappeared. He is surprised that Shang will advance so quickly. But the provocative Shang surprises him again and puts his hand on his shoulder from behind, playing with his fingers in his face like a child, saying, "Why did you stop? Keep running." The other gets very angry at Shang's insult and lunges at him to kill him. Kuang gets angry and says, "I won't leave you until I kill you, even if I kill myself, and everyone with you." He activates the spirit burning technique and writes that if he keeps burning it like this, he won't be able to return to his body. Suddenly, he finds that Shang has advanced greatly, and the gap between them has become very large. Shang Hai tries hard to reach the circle of circles. Suddenly, the eagle spirit appears and begins to put pressure on his spirit, which has reached its limit and can't bear it. Many spirits and monsters appear, and he must pass them all to finish the fourth level. Shang Hai retreats to sit next to the lamp for a while to recover and, at the same time, makes a plan for himself. The dragon laughs and tells him that he likes the spirit of this little bird, and when he reaches the sixth level, he will swallow it. Shang Hai says, "You're joking. The one you're talking about is not just an ordinary spirit, but a warrior spirit, and it can't be swallowed so easily." Shang tells the dragon that he is very optimistic and says, "The sixth circle? He's not even sure he can pass the fourth circle." The dragon tells him that the bird's spirit is sealed with the thunder seal, so it is currently weak and cannot resist him. He asks Shang to withstand the pressure until the sixth circle and leave the rest to him. Shang Hai says, "What if the spirit escapes the seal when we attack? What will we do?" The dragon tells him, "That's your problem. What do I care?" He tells him that he can pretend to be ignorant and not know what's happening. The dragon tells him that if they can swallow this spirit, it will be very beneficial for him. Shang says, "How will I benefit from this?" The dragon tells him that the bird's power will be divided into three parts: one part will be taken by the dragon, one part by Shang, and the third part by the dragon's brother. Shang Hai asks, "The dragon's seventh brother? He is one of the nine dragons in the ancient text, and he specializes in body training." He tells him that he previously had an opportunity that brought his body to the level of Linga's power, and if he continues his training, his body will reach the level of Xiu. He tells him that he has now reached the level of the sky world, and ordinary methods will not be enough to strengthen his body. As for his great talents, training only in spiritual energy would be a waste of time. Shang Hai thinks that very few people on the continent use the body training system, which is completely different from internal energy training. Body training develops Yang energy, and body fighters are characterized by great explosive energy, and their advantage is direct attack. Shang Hai says to himself, "I must be a body fighter, and therefore I will try to reach the sixth circle quickly." He attacks the monsters with his spirit power and then retreats to the lamp for recovery. After three days, he reaches the fifth circle, where the pressure on his spirit is very high, but it doesn't make much difference because his spirit power has also reached higher levels. On the fifth day, he reaches the boundary between the fifth and sixth circles and calls the dragon to tell him to prepare himself. The dragon warns him, "Be careful, because as soon as you start attacking, the bird will cause a wave of high pressure, and you must withstand it." Shang Hai says, "Trust in God." He says, "It's up to you." The dragon begins to attack, and the pressure on the entire area increases greatly. Elder Zhuo says, "How did this brat reach the fourth level five days ago and is still inside?" He says that most of the dragon men trainees are still in the first circle, the distinguished ones are in the second, and geniuses from the great clans like Kuang can only reach the third circle. Kuang gets angry at his trainer and says, "What are you saying?" Elder Zhuo tells him that if Shang is the first person in history to reach the fourth circle, then he has truly surpassed the word "elite" by a lot. He says that the purification process alone was a shock, because the last person to reach it was the leader of the Green Dragon Palace 100,000 years ago. And all of this is not enough for Shang Hai to break another record and reach the fourth ring. He says he will not stand by and must take action and contact someone important from the temple to convince Shang to join them. The trainer Wei stops and sees that Elder Zhuo is plotting something to take Shang from him. He tells him that he is aware of this and is ready to go to war with him over Shang. Suddenly, Master Nian Nang, the head of the temple, arrives personally and asks Elder Zhuo, "Where is the boy you told us about in the messages?" He points to Shang. He says, "He is very young, looks ordinary, and is still at the sky world level." He asks him, "Are you sure this boy finished nine pillars and reached the purification stage?" Zhuo replies, "It's impossible for me to lie to you about something like this." He also tells him that the students who reached the third stage saw him entering the fourth stage, and he has been there for four days and is entering the fifth day. Suddenly, the Master sees something strange happening, and the pressure explosion increases greatly. He becomes afraid for the students inside, and all the students' spirits come running out of them and return to their bodies. Elder Zhuo grabs one of them and asks him what is happening inside. He tells him that he doesn't know exactly what is happening, but a boy inside got very close to the spirit, which caused the seal around the bird's spirit to explode. The Master asks him who this boy is, and he looks at Shang and says, "It must be him, because all the spirits returned to their bodies except him." The student tells him that everyone inside fled when they saw the explosion, except for him. The Master says to Elder Zhuo, "Are you sure this boy is only in the sky world? Then how can his spirit be this strong?" The Master says to himself, "It must be him," and says that whoever can reach the fourth stage in a few days, no one else can reach that far. Then the Master tells Elder Zhuo that Shang must have died, because no one can escape from such a powerful vengeful spirit. Suddenly, Master Tang Jing, the governor of the city himself, arrives, and everyone pays him respect and greets him. He tells them that he heard what happened and came quickly, and that this spirit took a lot of effort and resources from them, and was sealed for a long time. "Why break the seal now?" he asks. The Master of the Temple tells him that the students inside said that a student named Shang was able to reach the sixth circle, and that is what caused the seal to break. The Master is lost in thought for a moment, thinking about Lu Sheng. The trainer Wei tells him that Lu Sheng is the boy you gave the permit to a few days ago. He is shocked and says, "What are you saying?" He tells them that a few days ago he received the Godly Script and inside it was a hidden message from King Shuan. He says that the person is one of the 49 dragons from the dragon tribe. He tells them that the 49 dragons are considered gods to them, the dragon men. He tells them that the biggest surprise is that King Shuan is one of the nine missing dragons. He says that legend has it that a strange thing happened a long time ago, and suddenly the whole world was shocked: nine of the 49 dragons disappeared, and many people tried to solve the mystery or find out where the nine dragons were, but no one knew. When the message reached him, he felt that his whole life would change, and he never dreamed of serving a divine being like King Shuan. After a while, he read the message again and was shocked when he found it written that the bearer of this message is someone he met during his travels, and that they must take care of him and train him as if he were one of them. He also asked him not to tell anyone that he appeared, and that whoever kills him will kill him. He decided to blend into the wall and not speak, and gave him permission as it was in the message, and forgot about it. Suddenly, the head of the Identity Dragon Palace arrived. When she saw them gathered, she said, "What are they doing here?" She asked about Lu Sheng, who had reached the stage of law purification. The head of the temple told her that he was still inside. The head of the temple pays his respects to his lady. She stands contemplating the bird's spirit and the exploded seal. She asks them, "Where is that mischievous boy?" Suddenly, her eyes fall on him, and she says, "I've found him." Then she contemplates him for a while and looks at the bird's spirit, but doesn't find it. When she looks at Shang Hai, she sees the warrior spirit. Then she remembers that he is still in the sky world, and to reach the level of warrior spirit, he must at least reach the level of god spirit. So she decided to help him and give him a pill. Suddenly, she finds him calling him and throwing him a pill. He is surprised when he sees her standing and talking to him. He says, "What is this?" He is surprised by the pill she threw him. The beautiful head of the Identity Dragon Palace and the dragon inside, when he sees him afraid of her, tells him not to worry, and that this pill is a very high-level medicine that will help his spirit reach a stronger level. He takes the pill, which begins to permeate his spirit bit by bit. The president sees that Shang's spirit has reached the warrior spirit level and is very surprised. He also says, "Since when is reaching the warrior spirit easy, and an ordinary person can reach it?" He also says that he sees something unusual in the warrior spirit that appeared on Lu Sheng. The trainer Wei says that maybe the president gave Shang a pill of Ling grade, which is a very high level. Elder Zhuo goes to flatter Shang and tells him that Ling grade pills are indeed expensive, but they are not rare, and he can provide them for him. He tells him that if he joins the Fire Dragon Temple, he will guarantee him a brilliant future. Shang Hai asks, "Why should we join your Fire Dragon Temple?" He says, "It doesn't matter who I am or what my authority is. What matters is that we are the Fire Dragon Temple, and tens of thousands of students wish to join us, and we refuse." He tells him that if he agrees to join them, he will give him 50 drops of dragon blood. Shang Hai says, "Wow, you are very generous." Elder Zhuo says to himself that the young man was shocked when he heard 50 drops, but Shang says, "Keep your dragon blood drops for your temple, you might need them, because I won't join you at all." Elder Zhuo begins to shout and says to Shang, "What's wrong with you? Are 50 drops of dragon blood not enough for you?" Shang says, "Your drops don't matter to me, and I don't like the way you talk to me." Elder Zhuo spits and says, "Watch your words, my boy. You are just a nobody in this world, you have gone nowhere and achieved nothing, and I can crush you here. I will teach you a lesson so you know how to deal with your masters." Before he attacks Shang, the head of the palace stops him and says, "The man didn't say anything wrong. It's you who spoke to him inappropriately. And Elder..."

He thought to himself, the situation has become even more complicated after the President and Shanghai intervened. Thank you, my sister, for helping him reach the fighting spirit. She was laughing when he called her "my sister," and he asked her, "Did I say something strange?" You seem younger than me. Do you want me to call you "my little sister" too? Those standing in the place were saying, "Is this boy stupid or what? He doesn't know who he's talking to." The fear was that her mood would be spoiled and she would put him in prison for thousands of years or something. Coach Wei said that 100 years is very long for ordinary humans, but for the President, tens of thousands of years is nothing. Besides, she can get a bit of beauty, so anyone who sees her would say she's young and in her teens. He also said that even though Shanghai was rude to her, she was still happy. He said that women, no matter how strong they are, still love men, beauty, and flirtation. The President told Shanghai to call her "my sister," and she told him to call her "my lady." She also told him that if he wanted to join the Identity Dragon Palace, she had no objection. He agreed immediately. She immediately gave him a bottle containing 20 drops of dragon blood. Elder Zhu said that she offered him less than half of his offer, yet he accepted. He said that Shanghai made the mistake of his life. The President suddenly went and gave him a drop of the supreme dragon blood essence, telling him that it was different from everything else and that in difficult times, it would be respected. The elder went crazy, saying, "No, this is a waste." He said that the normal amount of blood in an adult dragon's body could flood an entire sea, and that's why they use it as gifts. Because, in the end, it's just a means to increase the purity of dragon blood in our bodies. But dragon blood is priceless because every temple or palace has only 100 drops of dragon blood essence, and many temples and palaces don't have any at all. One drop of dragon blood essence is equal to 1000 normal drops, and even presidents and rulers compete for a single drop. The President became very angry with her, saying, "Do you know what you did?" He asked her to reconsider what she did and think about it carefully. She replied, "Why should I do that? The value is not important as long as the drop goes to someone who deserves it, what do you think?" Shanghai told her, "You're right." The President thought, "Could it be that the President knows something about Shanghai's relationship with the Dragon King Xuan?" The students were calculating Shanghai's luck. Coach Wei said that he sacrificed his blood and sweat for decades to join the Identity Dragon Palace and get a drop. This child, as soon as he joins the palace, gets a drop. Shanghai went to the dragon and said, "Do you think the President knows anything about us?" The dragon replied, "God knows. Maybe she saw something while you were training and cultivating your spirit." He told him not to worry, because if she were smart, she wouldn't talk. The President asked the President, "The essence drops are under your hands, and you are free to dispose of them as you wish. But I have a question for Shanghai. He asked, 'Until all the students escaped the range of the fighting spirit, the spirit was still there, and then it disappeared completely. What happened to it, and where did it go?'" Shanghai's tongue was tied from the shock of the question. He said he was afraid of this question and wondered what he would do in this predicament. Then he told him that he didn't know what happened, and that like the other students, he felt the seal when it exploded. He said that a problem occurred, he got scared, and ran to the spirit to find out what happened. Suddenly, there was an explosion, and the spirit disappeared. The President said, "Are you kidding me? You don't know? Do you know what the spirit of this bird means to the city? Do you think you can escape my grasp and fool me with a couple of meaningless silly words?" Everyone was standing to hear Shanghai's reaction. Shanghai said to the dragon, "Uncle Dragon, didn't I tell you that what you intend to do will lead us to ruin?" The dragon asked him to calm down and said that he didn't lie to them and that he really didn't know what happened. The dragon told Shanghai that when he released the seal on the bird, a powerful pressure wave came out that would have sucked him in. But fortunately for Shanghai, the dragon was able to activate the sun's radiance from the site at the right time, all under the protection of the stove where he was training at the time to reach the fighting spirit, unaware of what was happening around him. Shanghai said to the dragon, "So, what's the bottom line? How should I deal with this now? What should I tell them?" The dragon replied, "The ruler will overlook it because she knows that you have her support. Also, don't forget that the President is also standing with you. She will compensate him for the damages. She also told him, 'Would you like me to bring you a new spirit?'" The ruler swallowed his tongue and said to himself, "What's going on? I was doing this to see how attached she is to this boy. I didn't expect her to spend all the palace's wealth to protect this boy." Then the ruler told her that capturing a bird spirit of this level is very difficult. He told her not to tire herself out. Then he said to himself that Shanghai is coming with a recommendation from the dragon, and he can't punish him at all. He also doesn't want enmity with the President of the palace, so this matter must be resolved in silence. Then the ruler told the President that he would bear everything. He asked everyone to go back to their work, and everyone left. He was about to explode with rage. The President told Shanghai, "You have a lot, but your true strength level is weak, and we have many training methods much better than where you came from. I will take you to refine your dragon blood." Then he went after her to the Identity Dragon Palace through the formations in front of them. Shanghai told her something, and then thought to himself, "Training here is the wisest thing to do, because there are better techniques and resources here. But I have many things to do below. My sister, Luyuan, is a talented person, and she will soon reach the level of the God Realm. I must save her." She was reading his thoughts and shouted at him, "What are you saying?" He apologized to her, saying his mind had wandered a bit, and apologized for not being able to stay there because he had many things to do below that he had to attend to. She accused him and said, "I know you have things you want to do that are occupying your mind and thoughts, and if you don't finish them first, you won't be focused, and that will affect your progress in the future." He thanked her for understanding and said she would give him something else. She gave him a protection charm and told him that when all other paths were blocked, she would protect him. She advised him not to rely on her completely and to always be careful. He thanked her. The ruler thought to himself, "I am now sure that the Palace Master knows that Shanghai has a connection with the Nine Dragons, otherwise they wouldn't be treating him so kindly." He said, "I must find out what she knows about the Nine Dragons before the President does." But he was afraid that if he interfered, they would kill him. So he took his leave and walked away, talking to himself. Then the President also walked away. Coach Wei told Shanghai, "The President entrusted me with you to train you quickly before you leave." He told him that he had learned many laws and that his spirit had ascended to a very high level, and that all that remained was to raise his energy level. He gave him a sword and a shield, telling him that they belonged to new students. Shanghai was surprised and said, "It's impossible that this is a sacred sword and a sacred shield of the low level. Even the great clans in his world don't have many of these things, and they wouldn't give them to new disciples." He thought to himself that with his current level, he wouldn't be able to benefit from them, and he would save them for the future. Coach Wei took him to the best place to raise his energy and gave him a place full of formations. After two months of training, Shanghai reached the third level of the Crystal World. He said to himself, "That's enough. I have to go back for my sister." Then he used the formation to return him to his world. We go to the commercial capital of Tok Tok, and we see people talking about the flying dragon tower, which will be the prize for the first-place winner. They also talk about the crowds there and the inflated prices due to the approaching competition. Suddenly, they see something strange happening to the tower and say that a god is descending from the sky upon them. Those who were present from the beginning say that the naughty boy from the Sky World has returned through the tower. They try to capture him to learn the secrets of the Sky World. The young President says that he must act now. He says that in the past few months, everyone has been talking about the young man at the Heavenly level who was able to ascend instead of the young President who had the seal. He also says that Shanghai has become very important, and whoever captures him will be like having the key to the tower. The whole city is running towards the tower to capture Shanghai. When they reach the tower, they hear footsteps on the stairs and say he's coming. They wait for him at the door. As soon as Shanghai opens the door and they see him, they say, "This person is from the Crystal World, not from the Sky World." The young President, as soon as he sees him, says, "What happened to Lu Shanghai? Wasn't he in the middle of the Sky World? How could he jump nine levels in three months like this?" His soldiers began to say, "This boy is the king of the ten, and we must capture him." Tu Jianbai from Xuan Yin Hall stepped forward and told them, "This boy is mine. Leave him to me." The attack began. Shanghai said, "No, Uncle!" Tu said, "Why not? If you don't want to die, come with me now!" But someone named Li Bo appeared, who also wanted to take Shanghai. He fought with Nu for him. Also, a giant named Jian Yunfei from the Blood Wood Tribe attacked Shanghai, but Shanghai finished him off with a single blow. Everyone stood in amazement at the giant who was at the peak of the Crystal World. Shanghai and the young President watched, surprised at how Shanghai defeated the giant with a single, unstoppable blow. He said, "Since when did Lu Shanghai have all this power?" Shanghai said, "You want to capture me? Alright, let the next one show himself!" But everyone ran away from him. Yu thought to himself, "I must thank Boy for stopping me before I attacked Shanghai, otherwise I would have been dead by now." The young President saluted Shanghai, "We know you entered the Flying Dragon Tower, and that in the past three months, the temple has been looking for you. Tell us, where are we, and what moved the tower from the forest to here?" He told him, "It's a long story. He told him, "The noble Diye is here in the capital. I'll take you to her, and she'll explain everything to you." Shanghai found many fighters lying in wait for him. He stopped and said to them, "It seems you are not convinced of me. Whoever wants to die can come forward. I am ready." Blood Poison appeared and said to him, "How long will you keep your word?" She tried to seduce him with her eyes using a first-class seduction technique. He thanked God that his spirit had entered the warrior spirit level, otherwise it would have been the end of him. She went crazy, disbelieving how Shanghai was able to break her seduction technique so quickly. He shouted at her, "What business is it of yours whether I keep my word or not?" She told him, "You killed a student from the Blood Wood Tribe. Do you think this matter will go unpunished?" Shanghai taunted her, and she used an even stronger seduction technique than before. She began to say sweet things to him to influence him with the technique to the point that the technique affected everyone present. Shanghai said to himself, "How should I deal with her?" She told him, "Your smile angers me. Admit my beauty and that I am alluring." But he surprised her and said, "I know you've been trained in this technique for thousands of years, but I don't like old women." She became angry and began to attack him because he called her old. She said, "You are just a bug in the Crystal World. You don't know the difference between earth and sky. No one will save you from my hands." The raven arrived and asked her to wait. He told her, "This young man is my prey. Then the raven called Shanghai and asked him to tell him everything he knew about the tower, or he would make him regret the day he was born." The young President told Shanghai, "These two are at the level of virtual disaster, and you cannot escape them. We must reach the Temple Master as soon as possible." Shanghai and suddenly heard a voice from the sky saying, "Who dares to bully the disciples of the Cloud Temple?" Everyone looked at the sky and said, "Who's there?" Then the noble Diye suddenly appeared before them. The raven told her that she had not yet reached her level of virtual disaster and had not yet regained her strength. He said that they should not fear her now, but they should fear my master. The raven shut up and closed his mouth. Blood Poison said to herself, "Diye's master is very powerful. He is the one who brought the Cloud Temple to its current strength and brought their clan to the fourth level." She also became angry. The Seven Guards also arrived and told her, "Even if your master himself comes here, if Shanghai doesn't go with you before he tells them the secrets of the tower, then what?" The noble Diye asked them, "Is this your final word?" They replied, "What will you do?" She said, "Regardless of Lu Shanghai's relationship with the tower, he is a disciple of my temple, and his protection is my duty, no matter the cost." She told him, "If you think your threats will scare me, you're dreaming." She summoned her giant eagle. Everyone was surprised, including Shanghai, who saw her true power for the first time. He said, "Could she fight all of them for me?" The Seven Guards told her, "Are you sure you want to fight here? We are the only clan here that has reached the fifth level." She told them, "All I want is to protect a member of my temple." They asked her to reconsider, or her temple would pay a heavy price. She told them, "You can ride your highest horse." She also told them that the Cloud Temple might not be able to defeat them, but it would not fall easily. If it is destroyed in this war, it will take everyone with it. They said, "As you wish." The war formation began to form, but the members of the Tok Tok Commercial Association suddenly arrived and asked everyone to exercise restraint and calm. The President said, "Didn't we agree to forget about this fight? What's new? If there's anything, we can resolve it through discussion." The noble Diye told him that there was nothing to discuss here, and that if Shanghai was a member of her temple, she would not allow anyone to take him. Blood Poison told her, "Then what? If your Shanghai doesn't tell us the secrets of the tower, then the tournament is useless." The seven agreed with Blood Poison, saying that Shanghai was the only one who used the tower, and if someone else won the tournament and took the tower, they wouldn't be able to use it without Lu Shanghai. In short, Lu Shanghai is more important than the tower itself. The President said, "Then why doesn't Lu Shanghai tell us the secrets of the tower now, in front of everyone? That way, no one will take it." Everyone fell silent and agreed to the idea, including Lu Shanghai himself. But before he could speak, the noble Diye told him, "Don't tell anyone anything." When he tried to offer it to her, she asked him to listen and be quiet. The raven told her, "Don't be stubborn, so the matter doesn't escalate." Blood Poison told her, "Your temple cannot afford to antagonize all of us." She thought for a moment. Lu Shanghai approached her, touched her, then winked at her. Then he asked her to stop acting like a child and leave him to talk to her. She became angry and spat in his face, saying, "Who are you calling a child, you animal?" She thought to herself, "I am a noble and the master of the Cloud Temple. What makes me allow him to say such a thing to me?" Then Shanghai began to speak to everyone, saying that if anyone had asked him politely, he would have told them, because there was nothing to hide. He told them that the tower had started working again at full capacity. Blood Poison told him, "We can use it easily." The raven said, "So, we just use it like that?" The President of the Tok Tok Commercial Association told him that they had tried to use it, but to no avail. He asked him to tell them how it suddenly started working and how he knew, since he hadn't even tried to use it. He told them that the day he ascended, he was chasing someone from the God Realm, and he had no choice but to play with the formations on the sixth floor to avoid him. He told them that now, before leaving the tower, he had put everything back as it was. The raven said, "You're lying. We are masters of formations from all over the continent. We examined the formations on the sixth floor when they brought them, and we didn't understand anything. You want us to believe that you understand them better than us?" Shanghai said, "Whether you believe me or not is not my problem." He asked the Tok Tok Commercial Association if they had received any news about him from Yun Hai City. He told them that if they investigated the matter, they would confirm the truth of his words. Everyone stood stunned. Then they said, "So you are Lu Shanghai." He began to tell them that a few months ago, he received a report from the head of the Yun Hai City branch, explaining the perfect brushwork and the strange drawing style of Lu Shanghai. Because the name Lu Shanghai is so common, they didn't expect it to be him. The Tok Tok Commercial Lord said that what he told Lord Lu Shanghai is true, and that there is a formation that no one can compete with except the legend Feng Guan Yu. Of course, the whole place didn't believe it. The Seven Guards said, "The achievements of Lord Feng Guan are well-known, and he cannot be compared to anyone else." They asked him how he dared to mention his name with the name of this brat. He told them, "This is the truth. Believe it or not, it's up to you." One of the Tok Tok masters said that they had some formations drawn by Shanghai and could verify them. But Shanghai told them, "There's no need to verify. There are many men around us, and the tower is in front of you. Send someone to the sixth floor to try, and we'll see." They were convinced by the idea and said, "Why didn't we think of this solution earlier?" The raven asked someone named Xuan to try and gave him the key. He entered the tower, and after half an hour, they saw him being pulled from the tower towards the sky. The raven told them that he had Xuan's crystal, and if he died above, the crystal would break. If it broke, it would mean Shanghai was lying, and then he would not be spared. After a long time, the raven said, "A lot of time has passed. I wonder if Xuan has reached the Heavenly Path." We go to Noble Diye, who is blaming Shanghai and saying, "Why did you fix the tower for them so easily?" He told her that it wasn't that simple and that he had actually lied to them. He told her that this tower is connected to the Dragon World and is exclusively for Dragon Men. Anyone who uses the tower without dragon blood will be imprisoned for over 1000 years. She told him she didn't believe him and if what he said was true, how did he return? He said to himself that he couldn't tell her about the dragon he had, but he could make up a story. Then he told her, "I'll tell you later when we're in a safe place." Then Lu Shanghai told them, "Can I leave now?" The Tok Tok Commercial Lord told him, "Since the tower problem is solved, no one can stop you." Then the noble Diye told him, "Come with me." She took him to a place where she was staying and asked him how he was here if anyone who used the tower would be imprisoned for over 1000 years. He told her that the laws of the Heavenly World state that anyone with a drop of original dragon blood in their body is considered one of them. He said he found a bottle some time ago with some drops and gave her the last drop as a gift. She was surprised and asked him, "Is this original dragon blood?" Then she remembered that there was once a tribe of Dragon Men, but it was destroyed 160,000 years ago during a great war. One side was the Dragon Men tribe, and the other side was the seven great kingdoms united against them. After a fierce war, the Dragon Men were annihilated. In their last moments, the Dragon tribe sacrificed millions of their men to open a spatial gate and summon an original dragon. But the dragon was too large for the gate, and only its head appeared. The dragon then breathed fire from its mouth, causing the gate to collapse and the dragon to disappear. Due to the fire that came out of the dragon's mouth, three great kingdoms were destroyed, and only four kingdoms remained out of the seven. She said that the dragon is a very great entity, and anything related to it is priceless. She was surprised that Shanghai managed to obtain such a treasure, and even more surprised that he gave her that drop as a gift willingly. She wondered if he was very rich or crazy. He told her, "Why are you looking at me like that? If you don't want the drop, give it back to me, and I'll give it to someone else." She replied, "Of course, I'll take it." He extended his hand for her to take it. She stood and looked at him, thinking to herself that despite being the head of the temple, she didn't feel like she had any authority over Lu Shanghai. She thought, "At least today he knows who I am and what my authority is. I must make him know who the President is here." Then Shanghai told her that he had heard about a competition here in the city, and the winner would receive the Dragon Tower. She replied, "Yes, it was supposed to be held in four years, but it was moved up due to the dispute over the tower." He asked her if only the four great powers would participate. She replied, "There are other clans and free fighters who will participate." He asked, "Free fighters like whom?" She mentioned their names, including Sui Shui. As soon as she mentioned his name, Shanghai became very angry, and a powerful killing intent erupted from him. She was surprised and said, "What is between him and Sui Shui that makes him so angry and emit such killing intent? There must be something strange." Then she couldn't hold back and focused on him for a while, and realized that he was Luyuan's brother. She was very surprised and wondered why she didn't know. When she asked him, he told her that Luyuan was indeed his sister and that the Sui Shui Temple had forcibly taken her from a branch of the Cloud Temple. She was very upset and wanted to apologize, but he did not accept her apology or regret. He kept shouting at her, very angry and agitated, saying that if she had defended her even half as much as she had defended herself just now, she would have saved her, and all this would not have happened. She was affected and apologized, feeling sad and distressed. When he saw her sad, he asked her to forget about it, as it had already happened. Then, as they were talking, their teacher appeared and told him, "If Sui Shui, the king of the entire East, has kidnapped your sister, go and rescue her yourself. Or do you not consider yourself a man compared to Shanghai?" He thought to himself, "Who is this person to my master's tribe?" The old woman told him that he was just an ordinary member of the Cloud Temple, and how dare he speak to the President of the temple like that. She told the noble Diye that how could she let a young man from the temple speak to her like that without punishment. She said that instead of punishing him, she was apologizing to him, and that she was undermining her authority. Then the noble Diye thought to herself that Lu Shanghai was different from the rest of her subjects, and despite that, she shouldn't have acted like that in front of him. The old woman told Shanghai that Sui Shui wanted to build the Sky Demon Formation, and no one could stop him. He needed three girls with negative violet bodies at the God Realm level. She told him that this condition was not easy to fulfill, and that after many years of searching, Sui Shui had managed to gather two of the three girls: one was his sister Yan, and the other was Su Miaoling. He still needed one more. She told him that Su was Sui Shui's close disciple, and she would participate in the competition in his place. This would be his golden opportunity to kill her. He thought about the old woman's words and said to himself that this was indeed his golden opportunity, because the negative violet body was very rare. If he could kill her, he would delay Sui Shui's formation construction, and his chance to save his sister would increase significantly. He asked her about Su's level. She told him that she was in the middle of the God Realm. He thought to himself that this was not good news. Even though he had increased his strength to the third level of the Crystal World, there was still a big difference in power between them. The old woman told him, "You don't have the courage to save your sister, and you want us to save her for you?" He asked her what was required to participate in the competition. She was very afraid for him but didn't show it. She told him that this competition was not like a clan competition, and that the fighting was to the death. He didn't care. He told her he would participate. She told him that he didn't even know the strength of the opponents he would face. She then began to tell him about the participants in the competition and their strengths and names. She told him that he was no match for them and that if he participated in this competition, he would die in the first round. She said that the temple had already nominated its candidates, and if he wanted to be nominated, he would have to nominate himself as a free candidate and pass tests to be accepted. He told her, "Then, goodbye." He walked away, saying, "I will participate in this competition, and this tower must be mine. I must also kill Su Miaoling." The old woman admired his determination and said, "This is the right fighter." The noble Diye told her, "Don't encourage him." She created an ice barrier for him so he couldn't leave, but Shanghai easily broke through the barrier and left. The noble Diye was going crazy, saying, "How could he break through so easily?" The old woman told her that he had used the laws of space and time and reached a very high level of understanding, something even her dream realm hadn't reached. Then the old woman told her that Shanghai had the motivation and strength to participate in the competition and asked her to let him. But the noble Diye refused, saying she didn't want any of her subjects to die. But the old woman understood her and told her that Xuan and Zun were not her subjects. She told her that she was her teacher and understood her well. The noble Diye reacted, realizing that the old woman knew she loved him and was worried about him. She left, telling her that his death depended on his luck. Shanghai reached the free fighter trials, got a ticket, and entered. He first watched the fighters in the trial to see how they passed. He saw a fighter who had to break a rock with his hand to pass the test. He wondered what kind of rock it was and tried to identify its type with his spiritual power, but he couldn't penetrate it with his spirit. This made him realize that the rock was not ordinary. The fighter tried to break it many times but failed. Shanghai calculated the stones that the Tok Tok Commercial Association would collect from the fighters who bought the participation ticket and failed the test. The next test was on a magnetic Yuan stone. To pass this test, the color of the stone had to be changed. Shanghai thought that the pressure of his attack was amazing. It was Shanghai's turn, and he pushed a super energy stone to enter the test. The fighters there mocked him for his weak body and for being from the Crystal World. They told him not to waste their time and to leave. But he ignored them and approached the stone, feeling the power of the laws within it. The dragon told him that there was not just one law inside the stone, but laws of metal, wood, water, earth, wind, and electricity. Shanghai thought, "I can change the color of the stone." He tried to gather the seven laws in his mind. The dragon laughed at him for gathering the seven laws in his mind and told him, "You're exaggerating your thinking." Shanghai thought, "Don't underestimate this stone." He told him that if he could gather the laws, he would get a good result. Shanghai, the stove, and the nine dragons. He said there might be a connection between them, and that the appearance of these things could change the face of the era. The audience began to attack him, saying, "Are you going to stare at the stone all day?" They asked him to get off the stage. Shanghai made a thin lightning bolt in his hand. The audience mocked him, saying, "This is to light a fire with some firewood." He thought to himself that the small amount in his hand was incomparable to the power of Tian's thunder sword attack. He raised his hand to strike the stone. The judge said that in his entire life, he had never seen such pure lightning. Shanghai struck the stone, and its color changed completely with the first blow, fixing the new color for more than 20 seconds. The audience went crazy with shock and wanted to know exactly what he had done. Some people said that the stone was broken due to too many hits. After half an hour, the result appeared. Shanghai and the audience protested, saying it was cheating and that the stone was broken. But the judge shouted at them, asking them to be quiet, and called them stupid. He said that even though the lightning bolt in Shanghai's hand was small, it was powerful enough, and the law of electricity in it was at a high level. He took advantage of the fact that they thought the stone was broken and told them to gather more stones. Everyone rushed to register for the test. Shanghai reached the place where those accepted in the test were gathered. He saw one of those who had passed the test before him and realized that he had succeeded. The students entering the competition were standing and mocking him, saying, "What is a person in the middle of the Crystal World doing here?" One of them went to annoy him. Shanghai said, "Leave me alone." The other said, "I want to know how you passed the test." Shanghai realized that he was in the middle of the God Realm and told him, "Leave me alone." The other attacked him to hit him, but the competition official intervened and told him, "If you don't leave him, I will cancel your test result." The second stage of the test for free participants in the competition began. Only three people were supposed to pass this test, and everyone considered themselves one of the three. Shanghai was very ready for the test, which would be a combat elimination every day until the competition date. Only the first three would participate. Shanghai thought to himself, "If I can't defeat these competitors, how will I face Su Miaoling and defeat her, who is at the half-god level and also has the negative violet body, and is the disciple of the strongest fighter on the continent?" He said that these eliminations are a very important step on his way to the finals. The first test began, which was a magic formation. Everyone would enter it, and at the end of the tower, their mission would be to defend the tower and collect points. There was a crystal in the tower that would count the kills for each person to determine the rankings. The first three would qualify. The first wave of attacks began. Shanghai was slow and couldn't be relied on. He drew his sword and began to kill the spiders, noticing that they were very weak and all died with a single swing of the sword. The battle was very fierce between the other competitors in the first round. Elder Mu saw that the fighters in the current competition were much better than in previous competitions. Shanghai was seen as weak and wouldn't last, as he was still in the middle of the Crystal World. Then, when he saw him, he realized that he was the master of formations who had achieved the perfect brushwork in the Cloud Temple. One of the committee members was surprised and said, "The temple has indeed registered its nominees. Why is he among the free fighters?" Then he said that formation masters know nothing about combat, and he thinks he is ruining himself in front of the fighters. Elder Mu told him that he knew him well and that he would pass the test and reach the tenth wave. The other disagreed, telling him that he finished off the spiders in half an hour and the fifth wave in the end, while Elder Mu believed he would ascend. The argument between them began to escalate, and the other was sure that Shanghai's limit was the fifth or sixth wave, unlike Elder Mu, who was confident in Lu Shanghai's abilities. In the end, they wanted to know how he passed the first stage of the tests. They decided to ask Judge Xiao about Lu Shanghai's performance in the test. When they were talking about him, he told them that he had come to observe Lu Shanghai. They told him that he was ranked 392nd because he was still in the Crystal World, and he was also a formation master and not good at combat. Of course, Judge Xiao was shocked by the surprise when he learned that he was a formation master and didn't believe them. He told them that their information was wrong and showed them his result in the first test. He told them that he believed he would be one of the three qualifiers. Elder Mu, when he saw the test result and that Shanghai was first in the first test, thought something was wrong. He said it was impossible for Lu Shanghai to have kept the stone for 33 minutes without it returning to normal. He told him that the person who changed the color of the stone the most among the ancestors of the Tok Tok Commercial Association reached 20 seconds, and he himself could do it in 10 seconds. Xiao told him that he had never known Shanghai before to lie for him or falsify his results. When Elder Mu began to doubt his words, Elder Mu decided to remain silent to avoid enmity with Judge Xiao. Judge Xiao said that although Shanghai was not a specialist in electricity, he was still able to create a lightning strike that made the stone glow for more than half an hour. This was strange and there was something behind it. The committee said, "How can Shanghai have this talent in electricity, and yet he hasn't studied lightning attacks?" Judge Xiao told them that he was sure he would be one of the three qualifiers and wanted to bet Elder Mu on it. Elder Mu refused. After the first round ended, Shanghai got 1000 points. He thought that points strengthen the tower, and the goal in the end is to keep the tower standing. So he used all the points to strengthen the tower. The second round began with human-like monsters this time, and their attacks were a bit stronger than the spider phase. Shanghai thought that speed in finishing them off was not important; what was important was to strengthen his sword skills to prepare for the competition. He decided to fight them one by one. The second round ended. The committee saw that Shanghai was very slow because his companions were close to finishing the third round, while he hadn't even finished the second. But Xiao saw that he had great talent in electricity and was surprised that he was only using a sword. In the second stage, Shanghai got 3000 points. The next stage was supposed to be that the fighters would attack each other's towers, so Shanghai thought he would also strengthen his tower with points so that the tower itself would be strong and he wouldn't have to worry about it. The third round involved attacks from giant turtles. Shanghai protected the tower and killed them very quickly and with great power, astonishing everyone. Elder Mu thought he would be one of the three qualifiers and the first person from the Crystal World to reach the finals. Then Lu Shanghai surprised everyone and killed all the turtles in the third round, finishing the round before everyone else, even though he entered the round late. Suddenly, he saw a sword spirit and a demon. Elder Mu went crazy and said, "How can a formation master reach the level of sword intent to have his own sword spirit, and not just any ordinary sword spirit?" When they asked him how it was not ordinary, he showed them his sword spirit, which had no features at all. He asked them the difference they noticed between the two spirits, but their answers were incorrect and superficial, based on appearance rather than substance. They mocked the appearance of his sword spirit, which they found ugly compared to Shanghai's beautiful sword spirit. But he told them that the matter was completely different and that he had spent 40 years to make his sword spirit take that form. He said that the type of spirit like Shanghai's is terrifyingly clear, with eyes, a mouth, ears, and even hair. This type requires at least 1000 years of experience to form, and Shanghai is still very young. But Xiao told him that this is not an absolute rule, as Sui Shui, the strongest person on the continent, is less than 50 years old. He said that although clan fighters have the potential and resources to be superior to free fighters, Sui Shui was a free fighter and was able to...

A short period, and he becomes the strongest one on the continent. Not only that, but he also strives to rule all continents, and no one could even think of standing in his place. So, Elder Mu says to him, "Do you mean that if Sheng has the capabilities to become like Sui Sui?" He replies, "Perhaps, but what is clear to us now is that he is a talented boy, and his level is much greater than his peers. However, he cannot be compared to Sui Sui in his youth." Elder Mu also says that if he wasn't affiliated with the Cloud Temple, they would have tried to recruit him and have him join them, and that they will try to steal him from them. We then move to the fourth stage, which is a strong attack by the ravens, who attack with poison. However, Sheng's body strength makes the poison ineffective on him, and he manages to eliminate all the ravens in just 20 seconds. Not only that, but he goes and kills the ravens near the competitors' towers. Elder Mu sees that Sheng is planning something in his mind, and Shao tells them that he is killing the competitors' monsters to increase his points. One of them sees that this is against the rules because the competitors' attacks on each other will start in the tenth round, and he started it in the fourth. However, Xiao says that he did not attack the competitors themselves; he attacked the competitors' monsters, and there is no rule in the competition that prevents this. Mr. Xiao is surprised by Sheng's courage and bravery, and sees that he has become much stronger than he had imagined. Then they say that they will follow until the end and see what happens. One of the competitors tells Sheng to leave his area, and Sheng helps him. But the fighter tells Sheng to stay, so Sheng tells him, "I'm not leaving. Come and expel me from here if you can." The fighter will not be able to because Sheng is standing in the middle of the poison, and the fighter is going crazy. He says, "How can I be in the first level, the Land of the Gods, while he is still in the Crystal Realm and is stronger than me?" In the end, he retreats, and the fourth round ends. Sheng uses all his points to upgrade his tower, and we enter the fifth wave. Sheng says that this is for him, and he also says that he is not afraid for the tower after strengthening it four times. Elder Mu does not see this as arrogance, conceit, and excessive confidence from Sheng to let his sword spirit fight alone. It is fighting monsters that are capable of eliminating dozens of competitors from the competition. The Elder sees that Sheng is doing this to free himself up to fight the other competitors' monsters so that he can upgrade his tower to level 11 before entering the second round, and he sees that this is unfair. Elder Mu says, "How will he raise the tower to level 11 when our limit is level ten?" He tells him that when they made the array, they accounted for adding new rounds in the future, and therefore the basic structure of the array can withstand 12 levels, and thus it can also withstand 12 levels of tower development. However, they did not imagine that someone like Sheng would surprise them with a level higher than the number of rounds. He tells them that the tower's infrastructure is designed so that level 1 is equivalent to the strength of a person at the peak of the Land of the Gods, and level 12 is equivalent to the strength of a person at the level of virtual catastrophe. We go to one of the fighters named Zhao, who attacks with soul power, and the monsters in front of him are fortified against soul attacks. He says that he has no choice but to attack them with his fists. But suddenly Sheng appears to him, laughing at him provocatively. Zhao asks him, "What are you doing here?" Sheng laughs, and Zhao feels that Sheng is stealing his points, and tells him, "I will kill you," and begins to attack him ferociously. The Elder sees that this attack is evil and asks for its name. Elder Mu tells him that it is an ancient type and its name is "Deception of Evil." The elders say that the one who used it was an old man who lost his mind due to excessive use and killed a large number of people, causing concern throughout the continent until the great powers intervened and killed him. However, in the last moment, he was able to separate his soul from his body. Now Zhao appears with the inheritance of the evil old man. The elders see that even though Sheng is a great engraver and has reached the perfect brush, his soul will not be able to protect him against this attack of hatred. Zhao begins to unleash the spirit within him to destroy Sheng's spirit, who stands and lets him do as he pleases without any reaction from him. Yao sees that Sheng is in danger because Zhao is attacking him directly. Elder Mu sees that Sheng is already dead and out of the tournament. But the surprise is that the attacker himself falls to the ground, and everyone is confused. Sheng, with soul power, has condemned himself to death, and his soul has reached the level of a warrior soul and was able to repel the attack with ease and also destroy Zhao's soul, who cannot believe what happened to him. He says that from the first time he learned the hatred attack, he was able to destroy an entire clan by himself, and since then he has not lost to anyone. Sheng tells him, "I will leave now and come to you in the next round." We return to the Night Demon, who has also eliminated all the monsters and has accumulated a very large number of points, raising the level of the tower, which after the upgrade reached the strength of a person in the middle of the Crystal Realm. The judging committee is confused about Sheng, who managed to eliminate 50 fighters, all of whom are higher in level than him, and his tower has also become stronger than all the towers. We enter the sixth wave, and the Elder sees that Sheng has raised his tower level by two degrees at once, violating the competition rules, and wants to expel him from the array. Xiao wants to stop him, telling him that there is no law that allows this. Elder Mu tells Xiao to let him be, because he will do what he has in mind, and no one will be able to stop him. The Elder goes to the array's control panel to expel Sheng from the competition. Suddenly, Noble Dai enters the arbitration center room and asks the Elder Sang, "Who are you talking about?" Elder Mu tells her, "Why is Sheng participating in a bloody tournament if he is an engraving genius?" She asks him what he is doing in the competition. He tells her that he is good, but what can benefit her more is Elder Sang. He says to himself, "Let's see how you expel him now, Uncle Sang." She turns to Sang and says, "What are you doing? You wanted to nominate my disciple instead of me." He replied, "I just wanted to expel him from the array." She asks for the reason, and he tells her, "Look at the screen, and you'll see for yourself." He shows her on the screen Sheng killing level six monsters. She says, "Okay, what's wrong with that?" He says, "Nothing is wrong with it, but he killed another person's monsters." When she sees fighter Zhao lying on the ground, she is shocked, disbelieving. Elder Sang tells her that he lets his sword spirit fight in his area while he goes to steal points from the nearby competitors. He also shows her Sheng's tower, which is higher than the other towers. He tells her, "If Sheng continues like this, he will eliminate all competitors before entering the second stage." She tells him that Sheng always surprises her. Elder Sang tells her that he sees Sheng's expulsion from the competition. She asks him, "Is there any law that prevents what he is doing?" He says, "No, there isn't, but what he is doing is like cheating. If he continues like this in the later stages, it will be very easy for him." She told him that anything is permissible in combat as long as it does not violate the rules. She tells him that according to her understanding of this competition, there is no law that prevents a fighter from using his intelligence. She tells him that he is looking for a scapegoat to cover up his failure, and he is completely defeated. Elder Xiao congratulates the noblewoman on her comforting words to him and tells Elder Sang that the noblewoman is right. He tells him that he can set new rules starting tomorrow for new competitors. Sheng is confused about what is happening. After he was on track for first place, he is now unable to get up from the ground, and Sheng is number 12. He reaches round 10, and very giant monsters attack, and he easily eliminates the monsters. Elder Sang is dying of rage but cannot speak. Elder Xiao says, "Only 22 contestants are left to enter the next round." We enter the second and final stage of the competition, and Sheng's tower is huge compared to all the other towers. The 21 fighters are surprised by Sheng's huge tower, and they accuse the Commercial Conglomerate of helping Sheng. Sheng says, "I am still here, and I have become everyone's enemy here." The fight begins, and everyone attacks Sheng to kill him and take his tower. Sheng tells the fighters, "Beg, because my soldiers' arrows are very poisonous and will finish you off." They return to their towers. The tower soldiers surprise Sheng with their strength, as their arrows reached the fighters in their towers, and Sheng managed to eliminate 12 of them from the competition. Sheng says, "I don't want to waste second and third place." An idea comes to him. Then the young master of the third-level clan threatens Sheng, saying that if he attacks him, he will be an enemy of the clan. Sheng says, "I don't threaten." He tells them that he is the first place holder, and he will decide the second and third place holders. He tells them, "Whoever pays more will get the places." The competitors go crazy, and Elder Sang also goes crazy. He says, "The Commercial Conglomerate organized the tournament, and Sheng is selling the places here." Elder Xiao tells the noblewoman, "What treasures do you think Sheng will ask for in exchange for the places?" She tells him that he is rich and has many types of treasures. We go to him, who says, "Whoever doesn't like the auction, don't participate. Whoever wants to buy from me, start with the price now." The young master asks if they should attack and kill him, but he tells them that his soldiers who shoot arrows have reached the level of virtual catastrophe, and whoever approaches will die. He vows to kill him if he meets him in the tournament. The young master begins the auction with 50 high-quality stones for each place. Sheng offers 80 stones for each place. The young master says, "I will pay 100 stones for each place." Another competitor says 150 stones, and another says 150 stones. He sells the two places, and Sheng finishes off the rest. After the end of the competition, the qualifiers in order are Lu Sheng, Ouyang Xiang, Fu Jiao. The noblewoman leaves and asks them not to tell Sheng that she was here. Elder Xiao asks her why, and she tells him, "It's none of your business." Elder Sang announces the names of the three winners and says to himself, "If I had expelled Sheng, this noblewoman would not have been silent." He says, "I will let him continue and see what he does." Sheng is very quiet to rent a room to train and prepare to kill Sui. He reaches training in his room until he is close to breaking through the fourth level of the Crystal Realm. His engraving level also reaches the "Soul Breathing" inscription. The dragon tells him to fuse the inscriptions together to make them like a tattoo. After two days of training, Sheng officially enters the fourth level of the Crystal Realm due to the inscription, and the dragon congratulates him. He tells him that he will wake his brother up again. Sheng asks, "Who?" The dragon tells him, "Did you forget when we swallowed the bird's soul and I told you I would wake up a part of the bird's soul?" The dragon asks Sheng if he is ready. Sheng says yes. The dragon begins to release a part of the bird's soul from within him and tells Sheng, "I hope it's enough for the dragon to wake up." He strikes the dragon with the bird's soul, but it doesn't wake up. The dragon becomes annoyed, but after a while, the dragon begins to wake up, its color is different, and its size is enormous. Sheng is amazed by its appearance and its power. Sheng also feels that his body has become stronger. The dragon here feels Sheng's body and knows that his body has indeed reached the Ling level, and that among billions of living beings, only a limited number have Sheng's potential. Lu Sheng is surprised and says, "Is my body that special?" The dragon looks at Sheng with disgust and says, "How can you use a body like this just to support the energy system? You are wasting your talent." The Red Dragon says to Sheng, "Didn't my ninth brother tell you that this body of yours is the Hong Meng treasure of Ling degree? And the energy produced by this body is this treasure. You only used it to support energy, and that is infuriating." He also tells him that he focused on training his high energy alone after entering the Heavenly Realm, and this wasted the great energy his body produced. He also tells him that a large number of creatures wish they had half of what he wasted in the past period. Sheng says, "It happened, it happened, and that's it. Stop blaming me." The Red Dragon tells Sheng that he knows he participated greatly in his summoning and also tells him that he wasted the best time for training, but he will stay with him until he teaches him new ways to train his body. He tells him that this will cause him great pain and asks him if he can bear it. Sheng says, "I will pay anything, even my life, to save my sister." The dragon says, "Okay, let's start now." Sheng says, "This was child's play, and I want you to forget it completely. All the physical training you underwent after entering the Heavenly Realm was useless, and because of it, a part of the great energy produced by your body was wasted, and the rest was distributed to the rest of the body. He told him that he used the energy produced by the body for tempering and supporting energy to enter the Heavenly Realm, and therefore he intends to start from the area of super energy concentration and exploit it to reach the right path." Sheng prepares himself, and the dragon warns him one last time, telling him that this will not be easy and that he must be psychologically prepared for the great pain he will feel before he is physically prepared. The dragon begins the training, and Sheng feels energy flowing from his body and feels comfortable. He says, "This is the same feeling I used to have when I was training." The dragon tells him that he hasn't done anything yet and has only activated the energy source in his body, but the hard work is still to come. We enter the serious part, and due to the intense pain, the homeowner's daughter hears his voice and climbs over the fence to see what's happening, even though her father told her that he rented the arena to a fighter and she doesn't even know what a fighter is. He asked her not to disturb them, but she thinks that one or two glances won't disturb them. Sheng is almost dying of pain and screams to himself. The girl is surprised and says, "Do all fighters suffer like this?" The Red Dragon tells the Green Dragon that Sheng has endured more than expected. The Green Dragon tells him that his soul has reached the level of a warrior soul, and he will not lose consciousness easily. The Red Dragon sees that if Sheng loses consciousness and the training process continues while he is asleep, it will be better for him because the torment he is currently enduring is unbearable for humans. Sheng is in so much pain that the neighbors and the homeowner notice it. The homeowner, as soon as he remembers that his daughter is close to Sheng, rushes home to keep her away from him. Sheng asks for water. The Red Dragon, seeing Sheng lose consciousness, asks the Green Dragon, "Are you sure about your prophecy?" The Green Dragon tells him that Sheng will one day change the course of the world, and that the effort they will put into helping him will benefit them. He also tells him that no one will be able to stand in his way due to his great talent and good luck. The Red Dragon tells him that the owner of the prophecy must have a good ability besides talent and luck. Although he sees that he is indeed lucky and talented, he cannot see how far his ability will take him. The Green Dragon tells him that this is normal because Sheng's destiny paths are not linked to Sheng. He screams and says, "How?" The Green Dragon tells him that Yan, Sheng's younger sister, is the one who possesses the destiny paths. The Red Dragon tells him, "If what you say is true, then we have not progressed and cannot determine Sheng's future. If his ability ends with saving his sister, and he waits to sit next to her in this lowly world, then our efforts will be in vain." The Green Dragon tells him that after Sheng saves his sister, Yan might be kidnapped again by a greater power. The Red Dragon tells him that if they had the power to wake up and wake up their elder brother, he would have told them what would happen with a single glance. Sheng finds himself on the bed, and the girl also brings him tea and tells him, "If you are still tired, I will get you a doctor." He tells her, "There's no need." Suddenly, she screams at him and tells him, "You destroyed the fence and some buildings, and you have to repair them at your expense." He gives her some jewels, and as soon as she sees them, she is stunned and says, "This is too much." He tells her, "Break whatever else you want." She says, "Break whatever you want, my friend," and leaves to get him dinner. He jumps a small jump from the bed and finds himself through the roof. The dragon tells him that the Yang energy has started to appear on his body, even though he is still at the beginning of training. He tells him, "This is the power of Hong, if you want it." Sheng asks, "What is this energy?" The dragon tells him that it is the energy used to train his body, and that body training and super energy training are different. A fighter trains the body up to six simple levels, and then chooses between continuing training or moving to the Heavenly Realm and super energy training. If the fighter chooses super energy training, he will enter the Heavenly Realm, then the Crystal Realm, then the Land of the Gods, and then the Virtual Catastrophe. But if he chooses body training, he will temper 108 pressure points in his body, and then his body will be flawless. Then he will reach the stage of the Eight Palaces, and then the stage of the Nine Stars. The dragon tells him, "Always keep your head held high like now, and you will be a renowned ruler in all realms." Then he begins to temper the pressure points with the power of fire and lightning. The tempering begins from the head area, called Bai Hu. After an hour, the dragon is amazed by the result and says that this point takes a year to temper. Sheng says, "An hour because the fire and lightning energy produced by Sheng's body is unbelievably strong, and also because his body has reached the Hong power before, tempering is easier for him." Then he proceeds to temper three points at once. At the same time, Noble Dai is standing on the flying ship above the house where Sheng is training, and she knows that he has reached the fourth level of the Crystal Realm. The girl brings Sheng dinner. The next day, the competition drums beat, and the audience is excited and ready. Sheng is grateful for the hospitality and says to himself that he has finished tempering all the pressure points in just three days. The time for the trial has come. Sheng reaches the tournament grounds and sees the crowd for the expensive tickets. The security guards stop him at the door and tell him that spectators enter through the second door. Sheng looks at the guard and tells him to come and teach him manners. A giant emerges from inside, so tall that Sheng has to look up to see his face. The giant begins to attack Sheng, but Sheng dodges him with his speed and grabs him by the neck like an animal. At that moment, the security guards show him respect and see his badge, and let him in from the front. When he enters, he sees a crowd of fighters, and their faces are like a storm. When they see him, they say, "What brings someone in the fourth level of the Crystal Realm among us?" They say he will be killed in his first minute on the ring. The fighter who bought the place from him for 150 stones tells them that he was with him in the competition and that he appeared only once and has a 12-level tower. He says the Commercial Conglomerate is helping him. The witness tells the second person who bought the second place that he doesn't know if the Conglomerate helped him or if he succeeded in the qualifiers through his own efforts. Then he tries to attack Sheng, but representatives of the great clans arrive, including the elder of the Xuan Yin Hall, who is approximately 1000 years old, the Blood Wood Cliff Hall with the Blood Demon Mistress, the Cloud Temple with Noble Dai, the Black Mountain Clan with Elder Raven, and the Chu Ling Clan with the Void Priest himself. All the clans arrive, and finally Sui Sui arrives. The surprise is that Lu Yan is with him. Sheng is strong and screams in pain and anger over his sister, asking himself, "What did they do to her?" The dragon reassures him, telling him that it is a special training path and will not harm her. He also tells him that he has sealed her six senses, and she cannot smell, taste, touch, hear, or feel anything. Although she is completely separated from the outside world, this is very beneficial for her. Thus, Sheng understands that Sui Sui is training her to reach the Land of the Gods level quickly. The third daughter appears with them, and Sheng focuses on her. The Green Dragon tells him that his suspicion is correct, and Sui Sui has obtained the third daughter with the Yin Violet body. Sheng says, "The Yin Violet body in this world." At the same time, he says that this Yin Violet body is a great treasure for its owner. Sheng says that he has no choice but to kill one of the three daughters. The celebration begins, and everyone is excited for the spectacle. The head of the Commercial Conglomerate welcomes everyone and has prepared a great gift for all their visitors. Everyone asks, "What could the gift be?" Suddenly, a large group of condemned slaves of the Commercial Conglomerate enter for their crimes, and their lives will be distributed to those who attended. Sheng is impressed by it, and the drums begin to beat to draw the lives from the slaves and distribute them to the attendees, which come out in the form of lights. Sheng says, "Long live the king!" and everyone is happy and joyful, saying, "We want more!" Sheng says that this world is bad, and surely these slaves were strong or rulers of small regions, and now their lives have been distributed to everyone. The head of the Commercial Conglomerate announces a surprise to everyone, saying that they have discovered the appearance of the ninth shrine lamp. Everyone is amazed by the surprise and wants to know who the owner of the lamp is. The head of the Conglomerate asks the owner of the lamp to light it at the light festival this year so they can enter the shrine together. Sui Sui is happy and laughs, saying that he also has one of their lamps. Sheng says, "Who would dare attack him to take the lamp?" A contestant with him says, "And who can get past Sui Sui?" Sui Sui feels the killing intent coming from Sheng and says, "Who is this?" He also says, "I have seen this killing intent before." Sheng says to himself, "Forget the lamp for now and focus on the tournament." The tournament begins with someone flying in the sky and asking the fighters to throw their badges so he can choose from them randomly. Sheng sees Sui happy that she will participate. The first round is between Zhao Dong, a free fighter, and Yu Fei from Xuan Yin Hall. Zhao begins the attack with the terrifying speed known as the speed of the gods, which everyone says cannot be defeated. Yu tells Zhao that his master said his blood will bring luck, and he must die immediately. He also attacks him and indeed defeats Zhao, cutting him to show his blood and bring him luck as his master said. Thus, the winner of the first round is fighter Yu Fei from Xuan Yin Hall, and his old master grants him freedom for 10 years as a reward. Sheng says that the competition here is completely different from the inner clan competition, and he sees this as an opportunity to kill Sui Sui's disciple. The second round will be between Lu Sheng from the Cloud Temple and Zhong Song, a free fighter. Lu is happy, "Everyone, the game is about to begin!" The audience sees that this round will be a period of entertainment for them to laugh at Sheng. Mei Shi from the Chu Ling Clan, who is at the peak of the Crystal Realm, laughs because the Cloud Temple brought someone in the fourth level of the Crystal Realm. She tells her master, "You told me I was the weakest here, but it turns out there is someone weaker than me." He tells her that energy level is not a measure and asks her not to underestimate him. He tells her that she is still in the Crystal Realm, and she is stronger than many who have entered the Land of the Gods, which is proof that a fighter's energy level is not a measure of his strength. She insists that he is weaker than her and wants to challenge him. If they both win, Zhong from the Cloud Temple fighters is surprised by her participation, asking if she knows him. She tells him that he is known for his arrogance and that he used to go to the Elite Land every day and beat them up, even though he was still in the Heavenly Realm. Zhong remembers him and wonders how he reached the middle of the Crystal Realm so quickly. Zhong thinks his luck is good because his first round is against a child from the Crystal Realm. The audience cheers him on and asks him to finish Sheng. Zhong draws his sword, and Sheng says, "You seem to know some things, even though you are just a nobody." He tells him, "Don't expect me to be merciful to you, because a fighter must fight with all his strength, even if his opponent is weak." Sheng says, "Let's see if you can last a little longer against me." Zhong laughs sarcastically and attacks Sheng with all his might. He begins to use his dual sword techniques while attacking Sheng with the Dual Moon Technique, Moonlight, and Night Radiance. Sheng dodges and quickly draws his sword again and activates the Eclipse Technique. Sheng says, "Let Zhong do it to their subjugated souls." The audience rains down arrows of God. Then Sheng strikes Zhong a blow that defeats him and sends him to the end of the ring. The Elder announces Lu Sheng's victory. Zhong is lying on the ground, almost unconscious, and asks what happened. Mei Shi is happy that Sheng won and says that when she was in the fourth level, she didn't have the same strength. Her master is surprised and says he didn't expect to see a fighter in the body training path. He tells her that he must have used a hidden attack to break the sword. Shi says that this boy has aroused her enthusiasm. Her master asks her to speak politely and not to underestimate him, and not to call anyone a child, even someone older than her. Noble Dai is surprised and says, "Since when is Sheng a fighter in the body path?" The Elder asks Sheng to draw a card from the box, and it turns out to be a rejection card. The Elder tells him that he can withdraw with it if he doesn't want to fight a specific person without losing. He was hoping it would be a revival card so he could challenge Sui Miao and finish her. He looks at her with his eyes, and she is surprised. He goes to sit aside. Noble Dai calls him to sit with the temple members, and he tells her that this is the place for chosen masters, but he relied on his strength and will sit with the free fighters. She doesn't know how to respond. Zhong is sad and wishes to meet him on the ring to teach him manners after embarrassing the noblewoman in front of the whole world. Elder Xiao is surprised by the conflict between them and says, "First, she came to follow his news and asked them not to mention it to him, and now he doesn't want to sit with her." The fights pass, and the next one is between Zhong from the Cloud Temple and Su Hao, the brother of Noble Dai, who is very excited. She envies her brother because his opponent is strong. Out of excitement, she calls out to the one who is passing by, and it turns out to be Sui Sui with his son, Sui Yun, who is at the Land of the Gods level. He tells his father, "Let me challenge her," and he says, "You seem more confident than you should be." Gai says to him, "I came here for first place, but I got a little bored and want to have some fun." Yun says, "Me too," and asks him to go out and have some fun. But her master yells at her and tells her that he doesn't want random fights without purpose. Sui Sui tells him, "Don't bother her, and don't bother the children. Let them play together for a while." He tells him that he has a suitable talent and looks at Sui Sui with Gai and says that he reached the peak of the Crystal Realm at the age of 15 and seems to have something strange about him. He put it in his mind and wants to know what is special about him. The battle begins between Zhong and Hao, and both use the law of lightning in their attacks. Sheng produced a large amount of lightning compared to his opponent, whose lightning is slightly less, but he is defeated. They say that they have reached the first half of the first level of the law of lightning, but he has completed the first level entirely. The battle begins fiercely between the two, as if they were a storm in the sky. The dragon tells him, "You are using the second level of the laws of lightning, called Purification." He also tells him that the first level is called Destruction, and the second is Purification, and he is currently using a mixture of the first and second. Sheng says, "The first level of nine mixed laws." He sees that the path ahead is long in the law of lightning, which has nine levels. Hao wins the round. Sheng thinks and says that the second level of the law of lightning does not exist in our world. He sees that it might have been leaked from the Heavenly Realm to here. The Green Dragon tells him not to worry about it because he has obtained Purification in the laws, which will allow him to merge multiple laws in the future to obtain greater power. The Red Dragon laughs and tells him that when he reaches a certain level of his body's power, all laws will be useless to him. He asks Sheng to focus and open the eight Dao palaces, and then he will teach him the divine techniques that will allow him to crush any law he encounters, regardless of its level. Sheng asks, "What are these divine techniques?" The Red Dragon laughs, and the Green Dragon tells him to shut up. Sheng says, "I promise." The Green Dragon tells him that the unique technique is not something easy to talk about casually. He asks him to focus on opening the palaces first. Sheng says, "It is the number one combat art without a doubt. It is called unique because no technique in the world can reach its power, and whoever masters it will rule the entire galaxy without a doubt." Sheng says, "I have finished tempering the pressure points and will start opening the palaces immediately. Soon, I will see these techniques myself." The Red Dragon says, "Okay, agreed. But opening the palaces will not be as easy as opening the points. Reaching the level of virtual catastrophe is easier than opening the palaces." Sheng says, "I'm ready." We go to the next round, which will be very strong between Lu Sheng from the Cloud Temple and Bu Zhou from the Blood Wood Cliff. Bu is happy that his first fight is against a strong opponent so he can crush him and become famous. Blood Demon calls him and tells him that this boy embarrassed her in front of people and she wants him to teach him manners. She gives him a drop of her blood poison and tells him that it will quickly burn his vitality and produce a burst of energy in his body. After he defeats Sheng, she will give him an antidote to restore his vitality. He tells her that he doesn't need her help to kill him, but she implants it in his body and tells him to keep it as a backup. The battle begins, and the fighters see that Sheng was lucky the first time and want to see what he will do against a fighter chosen by a great clan. The trio Hao, Bai, and Maple arrive at the competition grounds. Maple reaches the fourth level of the Crystal Realm in six months and is competing against Land of the Gods fighters. He says, "But the gap between me and the Land of the Gods is very large. How can I overcome them?" But he tells him, "Just as we overcame them when we were still in the Heavenly Realm, he can overcome the Land of the Gods level even while he is still in the Crystal Realm." One of the audience replies, "That won't happen. His easy victory in the first round was a fluke, and it won't happen again." When he hears him say "easy victory," he says to Bai, "It seems we missed some good things." Bai says, "But this time, the fighter in front of him is from the great clans." Sheng prepares himself and says, "I have a feeling Sheng will keep winning until he reaches the finals." Hao asks Maple for all the money he has to bet on Sheng, who no one has bet on at all. But Maple refuses, and Hao takes it from him with his sword. Bu begins the verbal war and tells Sheng, "I have mastered one-third of the law of fire, and today I will turn you into ashes." Sheng surprises him and all the attendees by saying, "If you possess one-third of the law of fire, then I possess the entire law of fire." He creates a complete fire law circle, which makes everyone's skin crawl with fear, including the head of the Commercial Conglomerate, who uses the same law and has not even reached 30% of it. He will never complete the first level because this law does not exist in their lowly world. He will reach the first level entirely and obtain the Nine Refining Fires. His brother says, "How can he be a master engraver and surpass me in fire?" The noblewoman is very surprised and says, "I thought Lu Sheng would join me after his journey to train under me. Suddenly, he became a master engraver with a perfect brush, disappeared for a few months, and returned with body training and a complete level of the law of fire." Then she remembered that the law of fire is incomplete in their world and said, "Then he must have learned it in the Heavenly Realm." But Bu doesn't care and says, "I will kill you even if you possess the entire law of fire." He grabs his fire sword and activates the Flame Cutting Technique, attacking Sheng, who manages to extinguish Bu's sword fire with his fire circle. We go to King Sui Sui, who is impressed by the complete first level of the law of fire and says that Sheng is interesting and doesn't seem unfamiliar. His son tells him that he couldn't have seen him because he hasn't appeared in public for three years, and at that time, Sheng's level was such that no one would even look at him. But the king is sure he has seen him before but can't remember where or when. His son tells him not to worry about it because he will eliminate them all at the end of the tournament, and no one will be remembered except him. Bu is sad because his fire was extinguished and says that he has no choice but to use Blood Poison, letting the poison flow through his body to explode the energy throughout his body and bring back the fire. Indeed, it returns, and he activates the Blood Cutting Technique. Sheng notices that his chest is open and jumps with all his might, delivering a blow to his chest with his fist that defeats him. He falls to the ground like a sack, and Lu Sheng's victory is announced. Hao is happy that his prediction came true, and also because his friend added the law of fire to his arsenal. Maple cries with joy because he won the bet and says that if he had lost all his money, he would have died. Bai asks himself if Sheng entered to compete for first place or to increase his strength. He stops and Sheng draws a card, and it turns out to be the challenge card he was hoping for. He looks at Sui Miao and says he will find out if he challenges her now. He says he will wait for the right moment. The next round will be between Xuan Yun from the Cloud Temple and Sui Yun, a free fighter. This is the son of the continent's king, Sui Sui. Sheng says, "My goal is Sui Miao." Yun excuses himself from the Elder and goes to Noble Dai. She asks him, "What are you doing here? Your place is on the ring." He tells her that he will make her an offer and presents her with a large piece of calm violet ice. He tells her that this piece is very valuable, but it is not enough to be a gift for her. He strikes it once, breaking it into 100 pieces. She reacts and says to herself, "Why did he destroy it if he didn't want it? Why didn't he tell me to take it?" She sees this as a waste and says that it is a treasure for everyone here, destroyed with a single blow. Suddenly, he pulls out another stunning gift and says, "This is the only thing that might be worthy of you." She is shocked and says, "What is this? What is happening here?" The eyes. He presents the Water Feather Crown, stored in the calm violet ice, as a gift to Noble Dai. The fighters, as soon as they see the crown, recognize it as the Sky Feather Crown, ranked by Sheng from the Serene Palace. Its story is that the leader of the Serene Palace once declared war on the great powers but was eventually defeated. Her treasures were distributed among the clans, the best of which was the Sky Feather Crown, which was lost. The clans searched for it extensively and found nothing. It turns out it was with Sui Sui, and it is ranked by Sheng. All the clans dream of it and see Sui Sui's son as very extravagant for offering such a gift. And why are they giving it to Noble Dai of the Cloud Temple specifically? Blood Demon says to herself that she is beautiful and attractive like this, and she deserves the crown. Sui Miao also says that she has served him for over 30 years, so why didn't he give her the crown? Yun tells Noble Dai that the Commercial Conglomerate is the strongest on the continent and has a treasure of the Qing degree. The Chu Ling Clan is second and also has a treasure of the Qing degree. But the Cloud Temple is third, and it is embarrassing for them not to have a treasure of the Qing degree. Noble Dai tells him that everyone wishes to possess Qing degree treasures, but why give them such a gift when they owe him nothing and are not even asking for anything from him? Why give her such a treasure? He proposes marriage in front of everyone. The Cloud Temple is not happy with what is happening and attacks him, saying that he is too weak and incompetent to propose to a noblewoman. His father might be qualified to marry the noblewoman, but he is not. They begin to shout, saying, "You..."

Who do you think you are to do this with Nabila here? And he tells them to shut up or you will all be killed. And this noblewoman tells Yun that she knows that his father is the one who asked him to put on this play. And she tells him that they first took Lu Yan from her, and now he is coming to tempt her personally. And she tells him it's clear that you underestimated us greatly. And in the end, she told him that the most important thing of all is that he is not qualified at all to ask for the hand of the noblewoman of the Cloud Temple.

So he tells her with complete coldness that in terms of the difference in power between them, he is indeed worthy of her. But his talent is divine and it will happen soon. And the audience started attacking him again and asked him to stop writing and that there is no divine talent in the Central Region at all.

And this noblewoman says to herself that Sui Shui is the one who sent his son, and if she rejects his offer, he will pressure them in the future under the pretext of this matter. And she tells herself what to do in this situation and how to get out of it. But Sheng saves her and enters at the right time and tells him, "Do you think you can tempt Nabila with a Sheng treasure? Do you think she's a child who will run after a chocolate wall or what?"

And Yun tells Sheng, "And who are you to talk about Zheng's treasures? Have you ever seen anything like them in your life, a thousand times?" And Sheng ignores him and tells him that this Sheng treasure is not a great thing or anything. And he takes off his shirt and puts it on this noblewoman and tells her, "This top might not look good, but it can protect her well. And it is also a treasure of Zheng rank."

And her face turns red and she starts to feel the aura of the shirt. And she says to herself, "This really came from Sheng's rank." And she started to feel that it was very comfortable for her and that her energy increased fourfold. And she also feels protection against weapons and that this robe is many times more expensive than all the other Zheng treasures in the Central Region. And she told Sheng, "And at the Qing level indeed." And even though it doesn't look very good, she accepts it. And he tells her that he will bring her some nice dresses and compensate her for this appearance and the beautiful look.

And then the stands explode with surprise and all they say is, "Who is this Sheng to do that? And why did he enter as a free fighter since he is from the temple? And how can you ask this noblewoman to sit with them and he refuses?"

As for Yun, Sui's son, he wants to know how someone like Sheng, who is still in the Crystal Realm, can have a robe like this. And he says that the robe is indeed more expensive than the crown, but where did he get it from and why does it look so ugly?

As for the head of the trade conglomerate, who turned into a statue in his place from surprise, and sees that this robe is more expensive than all the Zheng treasures they collected and haven't announced yet. And not only that, it's also more expensive than the currency of time. And he also says, "What is the origin of this Lu Sheng and why does he always have so many secrets?" And he says that the temple is very, very lucky to have him with them and that if he continues with them, he will ascend to the fifth level.

As for King Sui Shui, he wants to know where he saw this Sheng before and how he dares to do this with his son.

And we go to Yun himself, who, after regaining his balance after the shock he received from Sheng, tells the noblewoman with such cold nerves that he will not force her to take the gift and that he will return it to her again when he becomes stronger. And he hopes that she will then reconsider his offer. And Sui greets his son and encourages him for his calmness and persistence. Yun tells him that his goal is to surpass him to be worthy of the girl he wants.

And Yun returns to the arena, but he looks at Sheng and killing intent pours from his eyes. And Sheng notices the killing intent and decides to use a challenge card against him. And he says that he will win this round against Xuan and then defeat him in the name of the Cloud Temple. And then Simiao will get angry and challenge him, so he goes and fights her, and thus things become normal.

And Xuan wants to take revenge on Yun and teach him a lesson he won't forget for daring to approach her in front of everyone. And she starts her attack with a water dragon vortex. And he blocks her attack with ease and starts attacking her. And then he creates a vortex and chooses to exit, but he suddenly appears behind her and injures her hand, making her drop her sword. After that, he turns into a demon and attacks her to kill her. And she says that she must use the essence of blood or he will kill her. But Elder Xiao intervenes before he finishes her off and declares his victory. And he asks him to go to the box to choose a card. And a rejection card comes out, and he breaks it with his hand out of rage.

And then his father blames him for not being able to control his anger. And he tells him, "What makes you unable to control your anger?" And he says that anger is the fighters' motivation. And his father tells him that he uses anger as a motivation, but he shouldn't let anger control him. And he tells him, "Be as angry as you want, but don't lose your focus."

And Elder Xiao prepares to call for the next fight. But Sheng interrupts and tells him that he wants to use a challenge card. So he tells him, "Will you challenge me?" Didi says to herself that he will challenge her. And Gail, who is thirsty for battle, wants him to challenge her. But Sheng surprises everyone and challenges Yun, who is amazed by Sheng's audacity and says, "Does he think I'm weak to challenge me?" And he vows to punish him for this audacity.

And the audience in the stands sees that Sheng is committing suicide like this. And Sheng gives her a pill because he injured her. And this noblewoman asks him if he is sure of victory, and he tells her, "Of course, I am sure." And she says to herself, "As long as he is confident, there is no need to worry." And she tells him in her mind that if things go as he wants and he can kill Simiao, she will defend him when Sui Shui attacks him.

And the romantic Maple is surprised that his colleague Sheng is challenging someone from the Land of the Gods. And Hao sees that this is his usual behavior and goes to bet all the money he has on Lu Sheng. And the romantic Maple tries to stop him in his comedic way, of course, but Hao threatens him with a sword as always.

And in the arena, the verbal war began with Yun first, who tells Sheng that he loves the brave, but courage alone is not enough and sometimes it is stupidity and kills its owner. And Sheng tells him that he is not worthy of it at all. And Yun, with all arrogance, tells him, "Oh, I'm not worthy of it? Then who will be?" And Sheng tells him that he is indeed arrogant.

And Yun pulls out a dagger with a Zheng-level tip, and Sheng sees the law of wind and the law of metal around the dagger, which is strange. And the fighters in the stands will go crazy when they see the law of wind in the dagger and also the law of metal that reached 70% of the first level.

And the dragon tells the fighters in the stands, "You are stupid." And he tells Sheng that this is not a fusion and that Yun uses all laws at once and that Sheng can do it very easily. But fusing laws is very difficult and no human can do it without someone helping them. And he tells Yun that he can do what he did. And he tells the dragon that he is right and that a simple link between these laws is easy for him. But as soon as he makes the link, he will feel his power doubled.

And the audience sees that Sheng is trying to imitate Yun, but a team among them tells them that just because he imitated him doesn't mean it's easy. And they notice that Sheng has merged three laws together.

And the head of the trade conglomerate says that it is rare to find someone who succeeds in studying laws and that Sheng was lucky in the months he spent in the Upper World. And that mastering three laws to such a great extent is extraordinary for humans. But Elder Xiao sees that Sheng has mastered more than three laws. And he says that he saw with his own eyes the law of lightning at the highest level. And then he discovers that Sheng has thus studied all laws.

And Yun tells Sheng, "Your mastery of laws is what gives you courage, but if you thought you would kill me with laws alone, then you are dead from now on." And he tells him that he will taste the power of Zheng's weapon and attacks him, drawing his sword, and he attacks too. And Yun is surprised by Sheng's speed and Sheng tells him, "What do you think? Didn't I tell you that your crown is useless?"

And Yun will go crazy wondering how Sheng knows how to locate him every time he disappears. And Sheng tells him that he has the spirit of a warrior. And the audience of fighters in the stands have lost their minds over Lu Sheng, who keeps showing them a treasure. And they say he must have stolen a divine kingdom.

And Yun tells Sheng that he didn't expect the fight with him to be so difficult. And he testifies to him that he really caught his attention even though he is still in the Crystal Realm. And after that, he grabs his sword and starts to injure himself and soak his sword with his blood. And then his father gets up and shouts and calls him, and he replies to his father and tells him, "Don't worry, I know my limits well." And his father is worried and tense and says, "My son shouldn't have activated the power of the dagger and should have kept it as a trump card until the end."

He plunges into the ground, and then the earth splits open, and a giant monstrous demon named Akasha of Hell emerges from it. And Sheng, when he sees it, says that he didn't know that the dagger's tip had the power to summon Akasha of Hell. And he looks at his sword and says to himself that this means all Zheng's weapons have a special effect. And he wonders what the effect of his sword will be.

And Yun tells him that he will die today even if he uses 100 laws. And he starts attacking Sheng with the demon and tells himself that his sword is just a weapon for students and surely has no effect. And he tells Yun that two against one is not fair. And he summons the Night Genie, who strikes Akasha of Hell with one blow, so it is pushed back into the arena.

And Yun says, "Who is this woman and why does Sheng have so many trump cards?" And he pulls out the Wind Blade, and Sheng tells him to draw his sword. After that, Yun activates the Wind Killing technique and attacks Sheng with all his might, who defends with his sword and gets injured in his shoulder. And then he tells himself that he dealt with the situation carelessly. And he tells Yun that the injury is a small scratch and he hopes he doesn't get too confident.

And Akasha of Hell returns again, and Sheng tells him, "And Sheng." And Sheng runs in front of Yun, who thinks Sheng is escaping, but Sheng surprises him by going to the monster himself and making the Night Genie fight Yun. "Every blow, I will defeat you with one blow." And he activates the power of 500 dragon scales and uses all his training power and attacks the demon with his body, telling it, "Show me how you will be stronger after this blow." And he strikes the monster a blow that makes it penetrate the arena's insulating wall and go outside.

And the audience of fighters can't believe their eyes, and Elder Xiao covers his eyes after what he saw from the shock and says, "Impossible, this cannot happen." And he says that the arena and the insulating wall are made of the strongest metals in the Central Region; dozens of metal formation masters supervised it themselves. In addition, 400 inscription masters from the Central Region participated in drawing its inscriptions. And the inscriptions consist of six layers of protection, and it has been there for many years and many tournaments without anything happening to it. But Lu Sheng crushes it with one indirect blow. And he says to himself, "What is this great physical strength that Lu Sheng has?"

But the monster gets up again and returns stronger, and Yun almost sticks out his tongue, telling the demon that he clearly underestimated him. And since a body attack is not effective, he should try another method with him. And he pulls out his sword and says that lightning attacks are the strongest weapon against demons. And he starts activating the law of lightning, and the fighters will go crazy. And he says, "Sheng comes out to us with a complete fourth law of the level, and if Yun had a divine talent, then what is this Sheng?"

And Sheng draws his sword and activates the law of cutting and attacks the demon to cut it. And the dragon tells him that it is connected to the underworld and that the inscription itself is indestructible. And Sheng tells him, "The end of the round has arrived," and tells Yun, "You wanted to kill me, and you are not even worthy of your words." And he also tells him that he has a Sheng weapon despite his young age and that his master is the strongest fighter in the Central Region. And he says that you have a divine talent, but without Akasha, you are useless, unfortunately.

And Yun says, "You think you're better than me because of the help of the woman with you?" And Sheng tells him, "This is not a woman, this is the spirit of my sword." And he tells him that he produced it with his pure power, unlike him who summons beings from another world to fight for him. And he also tells him, "You are in the Land of the Gods realm, and I am just in the middle of the Crystal Realm, yet I am playing with you like a fish waiting to be cut." And in the end, you tell me that you have a divine talent.

So Yun gets angry and leaves the killer with the killing genie and runs towards Sheng. And the genie strikes him with the sword in his back, and he falls at Sheng's feet. And Sheng tells him, "It is your fate to die by my hand." And Yun is in pain under Sheng's foot, and Sui Shui gets up and shouts at Sheng and tells him, "Shut up, I know what you are trying to achieve." And Sheng ignores Sui Shui and tells Yun, "Believe me, I am telling you the truth." And he says to himself to Sui Shui, "I was late in making you angry, and you shouldn't have allowed your son to go up to the arena in the first place."

And thus Sheng succeeded in making Yun lose confidence in himself and he started saying, "How can this happen? I, the son of Sui Shui, the strongest one in the Central Region, and my father put all his resources and experience into my training, and I thought of myself as an invincible monster, and then someone still in the Crystal Realm comes and defeats me with such ease." And he cries and says to himself, "Could it be that everything I achieved was with my father's help, and without his help, I would be useless?"

And Sui Shui ignites fire and tells Sheng, "How dare you destroy my son's martial arts heart?" And he attacks him in the arena, but this noblewoman intervenes at the right time and defends Lu Sheng. And the head of the trade conglomerate runs to the arena and tells Sui, "You will attack someone in the Crystal Realm?"

And Sui Shui begins his attack, and this noblewoman cannot bear his aura and says that she must quickly advance in studying the heart of the Ninth Heaven God. And she says that there is no solution for her but to activate the secret defense technique. But Sheng surprises her and grabs her hand and pulls her away and tells her that he will not allow a girl to defend him. And she tells him, "How dare you grab my hand in front of all these people?" And she tells him, "Don't tell me you intend to defend against Sui Shui's attack yourself."

And Sui Shui tells him, "You are pretending to be a hero in front of me. Fine, be a man and die as a hero then." And he transforms the entire arena into a pressure of fire, and the audience sees that this pressure is enough to burn Lu Sheng and kill him. And they see that he shouldn't have challenged Sui Shui. And they tell him that he was a genius and was killed in the prime of his youth.

But nothing happens to Sheng, and he emerges from the fire holding the noblewoman in his hand. And Sui will go crazy and says, "How can a child in the Crystal Realm withstand my spiritual pressure?" And this noblewoman is lost in Sheng's face and says to herself, "The feeling of having someone protect you is so beautiful, like a little girl." And she remembers when she was a child, enjoying her family's protection while playing, not afraid and not caring about anything. But then a third-level clan attacked them and killed her father and mother, and before she died, a student from the Cloud Temple found her. And there she trained, and her talents emerged, and she toiled and sweated until she reached the position of head of the temple. And when she reached sufficient power, she avenged her family, but revenge did not bring back the happiness she felt with her family. But Sheng, in a very short period, brought back her feeling of happiness and security.

And Sui Shui is retreating in front of Lu Sheng, and the whole place is filled with great surprise at what is happening. And Sam Dam was silenced, and the Crow sees that this is a breach of custom and that spiritual pressure of this level, if it doesn't kill a person in the Land of the Gods, will make them bleed from their mouth. And even though Sui Shui was the one who released the pressure, Lu Sheng dealt with it as if it were air.

And this noblewoman takes Sheng by the hand and takes him out of the arena, and Elder Xiao apologizes to everyone and temporarily stops the tournament. And Sheng says to himself that he directly provoked Sui, but as long as this will speed up the process of saving his sister, then there is no problem. And Sheng says that Sui will not be able to attack him directly so that his reputation is not shaken in front of people after what he did to his son. And that he will have no one but Simiao in front of him. And Sheng looks at her and says that she will surely try to target him from now on. And thus he will have a convincing reason to kill her.

And Elder Xiao calms the audience who want to continue the tournament and get their money. And he tells them that he cannot resume the tournament before repairing the insulating wall to protect the audience. And the audience insists on their position and says that if the tournament is not finished, their money must be returned.

And Elder Xiao says to himself that 70 years ago, there was a problem with the wall, and an attack leaked, causing the death of 100 spectators and injuring tens of thousands. And they want to continue without a barrier and don't know the difference between life and death.

And suddenly, the head of the Inscription Tower, Master Nai, arrives with his team to repair the barrier. And the inscription team sees that the foundations of the barrier were completely destroyed due to a large amount of energy that caused the explosion of the six layers. And they tell Elder Xiao that they told them that the limits of the fighters must be in the middle of the Land of the Gods. And Elder Xiao tells them that the one who destroyed the wall is a person from the Crystal Realm. And the head of the tower tells him, "Are you kidding?" and doesn't believe him. And he tells him that the repair will take three days, but the Elder tells him, "You only have six hours, or the audience will attack us." So he tells him, "You are asking for the impossible," and they leave.

But the head of the conglomerate intervenes and tells Master Ni that three days is too much and the situation here cannot tolerate delay. And Master Ni insists and tells him, "These three days are the minimum time it can take to repair the wall." And he tells him, "If you find someone who can repair the wall in less than that, I will call myself Susan."

And Lu Sheng called President Shi, the head of the conglomerate, and told him that he could repair this wall in just two hours, "How much will you pay for this speed?" So he tells him, "I forgot that you reached the perfect brush." And he tells him, "Are you sure you can?" And an elder returned and told him, "Three days? Who is this arrogant one who says two hours?" And he says that young people are impulsive and foolish. And he directs his words to Sheng and tells him, "You can't just say anything you want, Dad."

And President Shi repeats his question to Sheng and tells him, "Are you sure you can repair the wall in two hours?" So he told him, "Let me try, and if I can't, you won't lose anything, and you don't have many options." But Nan replies and tells him that this is an insult to them, and if this young man cannot repair the wall in two hours, they will not deal with them again. And the audience tells them, "So you won't repair it, nor do you want anyone else to repair it?"

And President Chi tells Nan that Sheng does not mean to offend and that he will give him the chance, and if he repairs it, he will give him 5000 high-level energy stones. And he says that the trade conglomerate is very rich and that he never dreamed of such an amount.

And Sheng takes out the inscription tools, and Master Nan sees that the materials and tools are good but useless. And Sheng starts drawing on the stone, and Nan and his team, as soon as they see the inscription, go crazy from shock and all say in one voice, "What is this? A perfect brush!" And President Chi is happy and says, "The right man for the right job."

And Master Nan says that the speed at which Sheng draws will quickly tire his spirit. And President Chi sends him a spirit recovery pill, the highest in the Central Region, which will make him continue drawing at the same speed. But Sheng refuses and tells them, "My spirit doesn't get tired from these small things." And he says to himself that his spirit has reached the level of a warrior's spirit and that even third-level God's Hand inscriptions will not tire it.

And the head of the conglomerate is very surprised and says that he will thank him for teaching Nan a suitable lesson on his behalf. And Lu Sheng is about to finish, and President Chi tells Nan to look for a name other than Nan for him.

And Lu Sheng says that Lu Yan is standing without any movement and he asks himself if she even felt his presence next to her. And he tells her not to worry because her brother will save her and that killing one of Sui's followers will not be easy, so it's fortunate that the wall was destroyed to create a perfect one. And Lu Sheng finishes and asks him to inspect the wall, and Nan is happy and says that the wall will not withstand the test. And after the inspection, the control unit told them that the wall had been repaired, and President Chi thanks Lu Sheng and gives him a reward that Master Nan had tried to get for years. And it is a spirit-renewing jade, which is considered one of the best treasures that helps inscription masters, and it is of Xian grade.

And the audience is happy because the barrier has been repaired and the tournament will continue, and Xiang wins the next fight and draws a challenge card and challenges her, afraid that Xiang might defeat her and be eliminated from the competition before he meets her and kills her. And Sheng says that Simiao must die no matter the cost, and there is nothing he can do but wait and see.

And she leaves Lu's spirit and tells him, "You are challenging me and want to kill me?" And she asks if he is easy to color. And the third girl with the violet body, his beloved, appears. And Sheng tells her that he doesn't care if she discovered it or not, and that they exploit their power to bully the weak, and that's why she deserves to die. And she tells him that this is the cruel world they live in; if you don't have the power to protect those around you, no one will even feel your presence. And she also tells him that she knows he has divine power and that he is strong, but he is stupid. And she advises him to surrender and go train until he becomes strong and comes to take revenge.

And he gets very angry and starts attacking her, and she tells him that she will give him chances to try to kill her, but even if he manages to kill her, his beloved will remain with Sui. So he tells her, "At least I will slow down the process for you a bit until I become strong and save her." And she told him that he is just a cockroach to Sui. And he started attacking her, and she dodges his blows with ease. And the audience cheers for her and wants her to kill him.

And Sheng is watching and says that he didn't expect this fighter to have a goal in challenging Simiao. And he sees that so far the battle is going in favor of Si and hopes that if he cannot kill her, she will emerge safely from this match so that she does not refuse his fight.

And we return to the battle and see O, who cannot even touch him, and there is no solution for him but to transform into a huge monster they call "Beyond the Clouds." And the audience says that his blood is mixed with the blood of monsters, and he flies at her, grabbing her by the neck like a chicken. And her face is red in his hand, and she is surprised by his speed, which increased greatly after the transformation. And she manages to escape from his hand and gets serious with him because he angered her. And she surrounds herself with thorns from the outside, and as soon as he approaches her, these thorns stick to his body and start growing on him.

And we learn that these thorns are flesh-eating and are called Flesh-Eating Thorns, and they are very rare and grow on the flesh of living beings. And the flowers grow on his body very quickly and cover him. And Si tells him that he should have endured the loss of his beloved to become strong because his anger will kill him.

And suddenly he threw an insect at her; if it had entered her body, she would have exploded, and the energy in her body would have very quickly turned into 100 zombies, and she would have died. But her reaction was quick, and she attacked the insect before it reached her body and knocked him to the ground. And she kept telling him that she was sad about his strong will that he couldn't use correctly. And she left him and walked away, telling him to live the rest of his life in torment like this. And he sees his beloved in front of his eyes with Sui and cannot do anything for her.

And this noblewoman says to herself that Si turned out to be much stronger than she expected and that it is very difficult for Sheng to win against her, and she must talk to him to make him retreat. And when she looks at Sheng, who is standing and not taking his eyes off Simiao, she tells herself that he won't listen to her at all. But at least he knows her attack method now, and his chances of winning against her have increased. And she says that if Lu Sheng defeats her, Sui will intervene at the last moment to save her, and at that time, she will also intervene.

Si goes to the box and draws a card, hoping it will be a challenge card. And Sheng, who hears her, says to himself, "Could it be that she wants to challenge me?" And then she looks at him, and he hopes she draws a challenge card. Oh, Simiao, when she drew a card from the box, a rejection card came out for her. And this made Sheng very annoyed because he felt that their fight would be delayed a bit.

And after that, they take the fighter O out of the arena for the next round to begin. And Elder Xiao calls for the next round, but Sheng is not interested and goes to check on O Xiang, whom the conglomerate doctors managed to free from the thorny plant. And Sheng went to someone who told him that his condition was good and that he would help him.

And Sheng went to the noblewoman Di to get a pill from her to save O, who is surprised and says to himself, "Why would Sheng help me even though he has no reason to?" And he also said that he stole 150 super-level stones from him, so what made him suddenly care about his life?

And Sheng went to him to give him a sixth-level pill from the Cloud Temple and told him, "Take this, it will save you." And he asked Sheng why he would give him a treasure like this, of which there are not many in the temple at all. And Sheng ignores him and throws it into his mouth, so O asks Sheng, "Why did you do that?" And Sheng tells him, "We have the same goal," and O was startled and told him, "What are you saying?" And then he thought for a bit and said to himself that there is a third girl whose name is Lu, meaning the same family name as Lu Sheng. And he said to himself, "Could he be her brother?" And after that, Sheng told him, "Rest, your goal will be achieved, God willing."

At the same time, Simiao didn't take her eyes off her and Sui, and she missed Ji in the last round. And a challenge card comes out for her, with which she challenges Lu Sheng, but Sheng refuses and says that this young man is a genius and that he would love to meet him any other time, but he will not reveal his cards or even expose himself to injury currently. And of course, she doesn't miss the opportunity and tells him, "You are a coward, come here and show yourself." And he kept refusing every round until Simiao won and a challenge card came out for her, and she said to herself that Sheng had used all his winning cards and thus he would not escape her. And she asked to challenge Lu Sheng and told him, "This time you won't be able to refuse." And he told her, "I accept with pleasure," and headed towards the arena. And Di called out to him and told him, "Take care of yourself," and he told her, "Okay." And she is worried and says, "I hope he really does that."

And Sui asks Si to kill Sheng, and she reassures him and tells him that she will avenge Yun and kill Sheng. And the verbal war began from Si, who tells Sheng, "I feel like you've used up all your satisfaction cards to tempt me and challenge you." And he tells her that his luck only brought him one challenge card and he had to wait for it. So she tells him, "Aren't you afraid of death, or do you have a goal like O or Xiang?" And she looked at Xiang, his sister, and told him that his family name is the same as Yan's family name. And after that, she tells her, "Don't think this is a coincidence." And she tells him that the reason is not important because he is now among the dead.

And she starts to release her negative violet domain, and he is surprised and says, "What is this?" And the fighters in the stands are surprised that she has the negative violet domain, which is only possessed by those who have reached the power of the Divine Sea Realm. And they say that she might be an exception because she already has a negative violet body.

And she started her quick attack very early and managed to injure Sheng in the face, and he got very angry. And he started attacking her, and she tells him not to try because as long as he is inside her domain, he will be powerless, and she will do whatever she wants with him. And indeed, he finds himself bound and says that he must break this domain quickly.

And she provokes him and tells him, "Well, why don't you summon your beautiful sword spirit, without which you wouldn't have dared to jump on little Yun?" And she tells him, "Try and show me, and the result is known in the end because no one can penetrate my domain."

And Sheng activates the power of 500 dragon scales in addition to his full body strength and delivers a blow to her that a fighter at the virtual disaster level cannot withstand. And he also uses the law of space and actually breaks her domain with his fist. And she can't believe that Sheng was able to understand the law of space, which is considered the strongest and most difficult of laws, especially at such a young age.

And the audience of fighters in the stands will go crazy, not believing that Sheng has used a fifth law so far, and this is impossible because those who only learn laws are said to have divine talent and are nicknamed the "little monster."

And Simiao starts attacking Sheng with the fork she has, but he blocks them and breaks them one by one. So she suddenly disappears from in front of him, and Sheng says that this is strange, that she disappears like smoke in an instant. And he asks himself, "Is this her real body? And if not, then where is the real body?" And he uses his spiritual power to locate the real body, and he discovers that it is not there.

And she admits that he is looking for her with spiritual power, and she likes the idea and brings out many copies of herself to him. And she tells him, "You don't know what the negative violet domain is." And he looks at them and says, "All these are copies. So where is the real body among all of them?"

And the Green Dragon tells him not to underestimate the power of the negative violet body. And he tells him that her body has indeed been fully activated, and she has now reached the negative violet realm. And Sheng asks him, "What is the negative violet realm?" And the Green one tells him that he calls it a special realm because it is a small realm, and owners of the negative violet body are automatically connected to this realm. And their relationship resembles his relationship with the Seven Killer Mountain, which, although it is an independent killer, he was able to enter it when he met certain conditions. And that Simiao's real body is in this realm. And he tells him that there is someone who has a violet body and made billions of powerful swords and left them in the violet realm, and anyone with a violet body can use the swords in battle. And he asked Sheng to look above his head, and when he looked, he saw giant swords falling on him from above. And he tries to dodge them and is startled by their sight and gets angry and says that this is not fair because she has a special body since birth, and this benefits her greatly.

And when the audience saw the giant swords falling on Sheng from the sky like rain without stopping and constantly narrowing the distances around him, they were startled and couldn't believe that something like this even existed. And Sheng asks him if there is anything he can do to her as long as she is in her special realm and sitting comfortably there. And the Green Dragon told him, "No, there is something he can do." And Sheng tells him, "Why didn't you tell me from the beginning? Were you waiting for me to be killed?" So he told him, "Because you didn't ask me." And the Red Dragon laughs and tells him that the Green one likes to joke a lot. And he tells Sheng that she cannot disappear completely and that there is a spatial seal connecting the arena to the negative violet realm. And he tells him to look for the seal, and then he will see her real body.

And Sheng asks him where it is, so the Green one tells him that they don't know, but he will find it inside the arena. And he tells him to use the law of space in his search to be able to find it. And Sheng says that he is under attack from the swords falling on him and has no time for equations and laws.

And Di feels that Sheng is in danger and approaches the arena, thinking of helping him, holding the Eye of the Abstract Beast in her hand. And its story says that the 13th head of the Cloud Temple found it 4000 years ago and sealed it in crystal. And if activated, it can only be used three times. And this noblewoman says to herself that this eye is known as the enemy of the original dragons, and its attack can kill a person at the virtual disaster level. And she says to herself that she cannot kill Sui himself because he is above the virtual disaster level, but she can kill Simiao. But if she kills her herself, it will plunge the Cloud Temple into a war that will not end until the entire temple is destroyed.

And Sheng continues to look for the connecting thread until he suddenly sees it, draws his sword, and flies towards it. And the audience sees that Sheng has gone crazy because he is just flying in the air. And Sheng strikes her, and she falls to the ground, and he tells her that he doesn't see her technique or anything. And she tells him that she never imagined that someone could find her seal in such a foolish way using the law of space. And he attacks her and tells her, "As long as the method is effective, don't be foolish." And she admits to him that she underestimated him, but if he thought he had defeated her like this, then he was wrong. And she got angry and told him that she has a dangerous technique she hasn't tried before, but he brought it upon himself, and its time has come. And she started doing strange things, and the place shook as if there was an earthquake.

And the Green Dragon asked Sheng to kill her quickly before she summons evil spirits from the violet realm, the weakest of whom, if he breathes on them, will kill him. And Sheng ignores him and flies at her and slams into her chest. And then he flies at her with his fist to deliver the finishing blow. And she creates a protective wall for herself, but Sheng's fist destroys the wall and hits her in the face, throwing her to the end of the arena.

And Elder Xiao says that Si, even though she was defeated, did not surrender. And he thinks of announcing the result with Sheng's victory. And Sheng walks towards Simiao, who is lying on the ground, and the audience of fighters in the stands says, "Where is he going?" And they also say, "It's impossible that he intends to kill her while Sui Shui is present."

And Sui Shui stands up and calls out to Sheng and asks him to return in exchange for forgiving him. And he told him, "If you dare to take another step, I will kill you." And Di is holding the eye in her hands and is ready. And Sheng raises his sword above Simiao's head, and King Sui screams from within, his face full of anger, directing an attack at Sheng. This noblewoman gets up, activates the Eye, and blocks Sui's attack a bit.

And the audience of fighters is amazed by what this noblewoman did and that she was able to block an attack from the King of the East. And they see the eye in her hands, which is considered the strongest defensive trump card of the temple.

And Sui Shui gets angry and attacks Sheng again and tells the princess, "Show me how many times you can stop me." And King Sui delivers a powerful blow with his fist to Sheng, and a huge explosion occurs in the arena and a strong mist. And everyone imagines that Lu Sheng died, but Sheng surprises everyone and appears in the arena without a single scratch.

And Sam Dam can't believe that Sheng was able to withstand King Sui's blow himself, who had surpassed the virtual disaster level, because Sheng is considered an ant to him. And the Crow looks at Sheng and says, "What's going on, guys?" And the monk can't believe that the insulating wall can withstand a blow like this at all.

And the head of the conglomerate can't believe that his insulating wall was able to block the King's blow and says, "Surely Sheng added something to the wall himself during the repair because the wall is designed to withstand the power of the Land of the Gods level at maximum." And he says that the perfect brush weakened the endurance, and with this image, the endurance will reach the beginning of the virtual disaster level. And he says that Sheng surely changed something in the wall. And he says that Sheng repaired 100 inscriptions, and the result is that the wall became much stronger, and the Prince of Inscriptions himself could not do that or know how to do it. And all this was done in just two hours.

And the dragon replies to the head of the conglomerate and calls him ignorant. And he tells him that the Thousand Dragon Array can deter sacred beasts and that the resources here are poor. And Sheng says that it is more than enough to stop Sui.

And Sam Dam is impressed with Sheng and says that the word "talent" was originally "Sheng," and he shouldn't have provoked Sui. And Sui tells Sheng that it seems he was planning this plan and to reach this moment, and that he usually doesn't negotiate with ants like him, but he will negotiate with him. And he tells Sheng, "Your demands, master, and don't kill her." So Sheng tells him, "You mean leave her to him?"

And the King remembers where he saw Sheng and tells him that he saw him in the Kunyun clan. And the King laughs and says, "Two ants appeared on the same day and annoyed me because of the girls, and they think playing with me is this easy." And Sheng tells him that he just wants his sister.

And the audience sees that Sheng is so bold that he is flirting with death and threatening Sui Shui. And Sui grabs Lu Yan by the hand and tells Sheng, "I will kill her if you don't let her go." And Sheng puts his sword on her neck and tells him, "I will kill her now." And Sui tells him, "You can't." And Sheng tells him, "I can."

And the Crow tells the King, "Give the man his sister, and everything will be fine." And Sam Dam tells the King that Sheng is right and asks him to hand over his sister before blood is shed. And she says to herself that Sheng turned out to be an inscription genius and that if she stands with him now, he might agree to make them a defensive array.

And the arrogant King tells Sheng with such arrogance, "Listen, Dad, leave Simiao now, and I promise I will return to you and return your sister safe after I take what I want from her for the array, or else I will kill her in a gruesome way." And Sheng is surprised and tells him, "You say safe?" And he goes and slaughters Simiao, and the King goes crazy, and his body turns into a volcano of fire, and everyone in the stands flees in fear. And he descends into the arena and tells Sheng, "You dare to delay the plan I made for the array? I will kill you in a way you cannot comprehend."

The bloc's president entered and asked Su to back down and reconsider the matter, but he attacked her and asked him to stay away. The noble lady also intervened and stood in front of him, so he told her, "My daughter, reconsider, you are not my equal." Then her trainer entered and said, "If you think my student is not your equal, then what do you think of me?" And the grandmother told him, "Do you know what could happen from your decision?" And Su told the grandmother, "Yes, she is also not my equal and cannot stop me." Suddenly, a very old man entered and said that in the commercial bloc's tournament, life and death are in the hands of the fighters only, and that these are rules set by the bloc 1000 years ago. He told Su, "Surely you haven't forgotten these rules." Su retreated and told the old man, "You are one of the ancestors of the bloc, and you are over 1700 years old." He told him that he respects him very much, but this does not mean he agrees with him. And Bai saw that Sheng was impulsive, and no matter how much he hated Su, he should not have slaughtered his student in front of the world. And Mabel said that Sheng must think about what he will do after becoming a direct enemy of someone like Su. But Hao had a different opinion. He said that if he were in Sheng's place, he would have killed her too. He told them to think a little because Su, after killing Si, had to wait until he found another girl with a negative violet body, and this would be very difficult. And if Sheng managed to escape from Su's hands today, he would have some time to increase his strength, and this is an opportunity for him to be able to kill Su himself in the future. We return to the elder who told Su, "An eye for an eye." If he wants to kill Sheng, he should wait for him until he leaves the Oracle's city. Su told him, "If I wait for him until he leaves, he will destroy the Cloud Temple." And the old man told him, "That's not his problem." Su thought and said, "If I fight the old man, man to man, I will win, but I should not be impulsive in the stronghold of the strongest organization in the entire central region." He agreed to the old man's offer and left. But Sheng called him and asked him if he would kill Lu Yan. Su looked at Sheng and left. And Elder Xiao looked at the arena floor that had turned to dust and said, "How will we continue the tournament now?" And we go to the grandmother who is attacking Sheng. Di tried to stop her, but the grandmother told her that the Cloud Temple had fallen into disaster because of her impulsiveness, and asked her how she would deal with this disaster. Sheng Hai, you said that Si Miao would be here. And the grandmother told him, "You are free to do as you please, but I will not allow Di to risk her life or the Cloud Temple." And Sam Dam told the grandmother that her actions were misplaced. And the Raven told the grandmother the same thing. And Sam Dam told the grandmother that Sheng did not make a mistake, and that he is one of the members of the Cloud Temple, and that she must stand by him. And the grandmother told her, "Then what is it to you that you are interfering between us?" And Sam Dam approached Sheng to see if his body was damaged after the elder's attack on him. He was surprised by her actions and told her he was fine. And the bloc's president was impressed and told Sheng, "Tell me, what did you do to the wall to make it so strong?" He had the legacy of an ancient inscription master, and he used his teachings to repair the wall to protect it at the right moment, and he could not tell him anything about the divine line. And Dai tried to calm the angry grandmother, and she told her, "How can I calm down? There is a strong enemy at the gates who will kill millions of my people." And Di apologized to her and told her that she was not fit for the position of temple president. And the grandmother told her, "Even if your decisions were emotional, your talent is great." She told her that when she broke through to the Limbo world, she would elevate the temple to the fifth level, but because of her hasty decisions today, everything was lost. And Sheng Hai told her, "Things are not difficult at all, and he has a good way out of this predicament." So she told him, "What way? If it weren't for Tai's ancestor appearing, you would be dead. And what do you have, crystal world person, other than a bit of luck?" And he told her that he would withdraw from the tournament now and start designing a defensive system for the Cloud Temple. And she asked him if he could create a formation that could withstand Su's attacks. He turned to the grandmother and told her that he was 80% confident. And he said to himself that he was 100% confident, but he left himself some room in case of error. And the grandmother agreed and told him that he would start immediately and that the temple would bring him all the requests he needed. And she told them, "Prepare yourselves, we will move now." And the members of the bloc wanted to resume the tournament, and Di wanted to challenge Sheng again. And the noble lady told her that they had withdrawn from the tournament, and she was sad and wanted to meet Sheng. And the audience was sad and wanted him to continue until he won the tower. And the noble lady apologized to everyone and told them that they had an emergency at the temple and had to leave. And Sheng Hai Xiao went to the commercial bloc's president, and Di ran after Sheng, leaving him to sit and not go with them. He apologized to her and told her that there would be many more opportunities in the future. And Elder Xiao gave Sheng's message to the bloc's president. When he opened it, he found written in it that whoever enters the tower without the dragon's blood in his body will be punished with imprisonment for 1000 years. He said, "That's why no one who used the tower returned except Lu Sheng." And he said that he would have waited for the tower and his brother with him. He said that they had sent many people and told them that if they did not return after three days, they would kill their families. Nevertheless, not one of them returned. That's why he decided to go himself. Then he gave the papers to his brothers to read. When the younger brother read them, he got angry at Sheng and said, "Because of his silence, he destroyed many people. If he had spoken from the beginning, no one would have died." Then he asked himself, "Then why did Sheng return from there unharmed?" And he said that no one could answer that question except Sheng himself, who had already boarded the spaceship with the temple president and left. As soon as the noble lady arrived at the temple, she told them to declare a state of emergency. When they asked her why, she told them that a strong enemy was coming. And she summoned Zhong to come to her palace. And Elder Xiao asked her, "Why the emergency? What happened?" And she left and walked away. And he asked a fighter with them, "Who is the enemy that caused problems?" He told him that it was Su Shuyi. And the other was shocked and told him, "How did we make an enemy of the strongest man in the region?" And he learned from him that Sheng was the cause. And the news spread throughout the temple, and everyone was enraged. They said, "How can a noble lady, a crystal-level child, cause such a disaster for the temple?" And Elder Xiao told them that Su Shuyi was coming for Sheng. And he told them that the solution was to hand Sheng over to him. And they saw this as a good solution and wanted to go to the noble lady to ask her to hand Lu Sheng over to Su Shuyi and avoid problems. And one of them said that she would not agree to their request, and if Lu Sheng did not matter to her, she would not have used the beast's eye, which is considered a treasure of the temple, to defend Lu Sheng. We go to the palace to see the noble lady, who is asking why Zhong has not arrived yet. And Sheng Hai asked her, "Are you worried?" And she told him that he should be more worried than her. And he told her with all coolness that he was not worried about anything and that he just needed some time and everything would be fine after activating the formation. And she told him, "As long as you are sure, there is no need to worry." And Elder Xiao, who had an old enmity with Sheng from the days of the Path of the Healers, went and told them to hand Sheng over to Su Shuyi to be forgiven. And he told her that Sheng had brought problems upon himself with Su and deserved what happened to him. And she told him that the decision was hers, and she had already made her decision. So he left her to think for a while. And he told her that the temple had millions of people, and they should not be punished for the sins of a mischievous child still in the crystal world. The noble lady asked Elder Xiao and told him, "Do you think handing Sheng over will save him from Su's hands?" And he told her, "Of course." He told her that Sheng had wronged King Su, and they should not bear his mistakes. He told her to expel him from the temple and announce their disassociation from him. And she told them that the temple was founded more than 15,000 years ago, and if Lu Sheng had not killed Si Miao, Su would have completed his formation soon and reached the level of the God Sea, and then he would have begun to form his empire, and he would have brought them all under his rule, and the history of the temple would have ended at that date. And an elder among them replied and told her that Su was the strongest man in the central region, and she should not have made an enemy of him. And she got angry and told him that no matter how strong he was, it was not comparable to the strength of the entire temple combined. She told him that if he thought the Cloud Temple was weak, it was not worthy of being among the temple elders. But the elder told her, "We will do our part and hand him over to Sheng." And all the elders told her that they were with Elder Xiao in his decision. And she told them, "It is clear that you have forgotten who has the right to make decisions here." And she told them, "Everyone go back to your work, and I will deal with Su Shuyi." And Xiao got angry and attacked her. And she summoned the Ice Eagle, and he got scared and retreated and left. And Zhong arrived, and the noble lady asked him how far he had progressed in building the formation. He told her that the work was complicated and would take years to complete. So she asked him to calm her down again and told him that from today he would be Lu Sheng's assistant who would build a new formation. And she asked him to provide him with all the necessary resources and to carry out whatever Sheng said. So he told her that he would start tomorrow morning. But Sheng told him, "No, we will start now before Su finds us at the temple gate." And he gave him a list of requests to provide. And when Zhong saw the list of requests, he was shocked and told him that they were very expensive, and to buy them, he would have to pay half the money in the temple treasury. So Sheng told him, "Do we spend half the temple's money or destroy the whole temple?" And Sheng Hai told him to bring the requests immediately. And Elder Zhong traveled throughout the region for three days to buy the resources for the formation. And the noble lady asked Zhong to hand over the inscription site to Sheng Hai, his assistant. And Sheng began the work, calculating the number of inscriptions needed for the formation until it was completed. He said it needed 4901 complete inscriptions. And he began the work by drawing third-level inscriptions. And Elder Zhong, when he saw the perfect brush, told himself that he was willing to watch it all his life. And Sheng received a message from Meng, who stopped. And the noble lady went to visit him. And Zhong saw her, but she gestured to him not to speak. And she looked from afar and was surprised that the work was going well and quickly. She contemplated Sheng as he worked and said that she had heard that drawing inscriptions was soul-draining, yet Sheng had been working for 12 years without stopping. And she remembered when Zhong had told her before that drawing for two hours required several days of rest. And she said to herself, "How can Sheng draw all these hours without rest?" And a group of elders went to the noble lady Di and asked her to reconsider the matter of handing over Sheng, because they were not willing to sacrifice the temple for a mischievous child. And Elder Ko Kosa of the Rainbow Clan told her that they were not willing to die for her whims. And Elder Xiao saw this as a good opportunity for him to become president instead of the noble lady Di. He said that if he helped Su Shuyi kill the noble lady Di and Grandmother Yu, then he would be appointed president of the temple. And the noble lady was provoked and knew that he was still busy saving the heart of martial arts for his son. She was happy that he was distracted from them for a while to gain some time. And she asked her men not to take their eyes off Su. After three days of continuous work, Sheng used soul-renewal pills and inhaled soul renewal to continue. He said that Su would not wait for him and that he had to finish the formation quickly. And the noble lady Di was worried about Sheng and felt sorry for him because he was working himself to death and not sleeping. And the Green Dragon told Sheng Hai to enter the green pattern, which is considered a great achievement. After 15 days of continuous work, the formation was completed, and only the final touches and drawing the three golden inscriptions of the fifth level remained. And Sheng Hai told them to draw them to avoid mistakes. And the first inscription is the Water Calm inscription, which connects all the inscriptions together to work as one system. And Zhong stood watching and felt the power of the golden inscriptions and asked himself about the duration of the inscription's power that would link all the inscriptions together. And the second inscription is the offensive inscription, called Lightning's Wrath, which will give the formation the advantage of lightning attacks. And the noble lady Di did not meet the elders, and they went to take Sheng to hand him over to Su Shuyi. And Zhong tried to stop them and told them that Sheng was about to finish the formation. But Elder Xiao intervened and asked them to arrest him. But when they entered, something strange happened, and energy emerged from the ground like lightning, striking Sheng when he created a lightning barrier between himself and Elder Xiao and those with him, so that no one would disturb him and he could concentrate on his work. And he reached the third and final inscription. As soon as the elders saw the finished formation, they couldn't believe their eyes. And when they approached it and felt its power, even though it was not yet finished, they truly believed that it could indeed counter Su Shuyi. And Elder Zhong, as soon as he saw it working, went crazy. And Sheng Hai fell into the chaos trap and said that if he touched the formation with the brush, it would activate. And as soon as he touched it, he entered the chaos illusion and saw strange things. And the dragon called him to be careful, knowing that it was an illusion. And the dragon greeted him for being able to withstand the chaos trap and not fall into it. But the rest of the elders around the formation all fell into the chaos trap. And Sheng Hai Zhong, who woke up from the illusion, was surprised how Sheng was able to withstand it. And he said to himself that the difference between him and Sheng's soul power was like the difference between heaven and earth. Finally, Sheng completed the formation, and it was finished. And the elders congratulated him. Elder Xiao gnashed his teeth in anger and said to himself that he had underestimated Sheng Hai. And Sheng Hai asked the elders what brought them there. They said they came to check on him. But Elder Xiao told him that he had brought disaster upon the temple. And Su Shuyi asked him to sever his relationship with the temple and surrender himself. And Sheng Hai and the elder got angry and told him, "How dare a ant like you refuse my request?" And Sheng Hai told him, "Don't bother us, and go your way so we can get to work." And Sheng Hai and Hu said to them that the energy they saw a moment ago was the result of only two inscriptions from the formation, which consists of 4901 inscriptions. And he told them that they could imagine what the result would be when they gathered the total number and remained as they were. He told them that at least if they couldn't kill Su Shuyi, he wouldn't be able to touch an inch of the temple. And they asked him about his confidence in the formation. He said 8%. But Xiao laughed and told him that he was surely exaggerating. And Nong told the elders that if they didn't believe him, they could try the formation themselves after it was stabilized. And they were convinced by his words and decided to wait for him. And to the end, the elders asked her, and she got angry and told him, "Are you telling me that I am spying on you?" And he warned her about Elder Xiao, who was plotting against her to take her place. And Sheng began to stabilize the formation and asked her to come closer so she could see the formation as it was being assembled and working. And he told her that it would succeed. And the Green Dragon told Sheng Hai that it was made using Zi Tian's method, and it is one of the three killing formations. And because it is a miniature version of it, it can be called the Small Zi Tian Three Killing Formation. He also said that it is one of the three greatest formations for defense and killing. And Sheng Hai made it in the arena. And the dragon told him that the Thousand Dragon Formation was powerful, but it was not comparable to the formation of their world. And Sheng Hai Zi helped him on the other side, along with the temple workers. And after a month of continuous work without stopping, the formation was ready for operation. And Sheng Hai asked her if she was ready for operation. And after confirming that the energy stones were in place, he got permission from Dai to operate it. And he began to operate the formation, called Lightning's Wrath. And then he operated the second part, which is the Chaos Trap. And now only the most important and final part remained. As soon as he activated it, the elders and fighters came with their weapons and told him that it was very weak and that they would destroy it. And they began to strike it with all their weapons, and nothing happened to it. And Elder Zhong asked them to wait a moment until the formation stabilized, as it was still new. And Sheng Hai told them that it did not need time to stabilize. And the fighters kept coming from everywhere with deadly weapons to test the formation. And eight masters of the virtual catastrophe level came to attack the formation all at once, but it was not affected by them. They said that they had never seen or heard of a formation with such power before, but they said that no matter how weak they were, their power was not comparable to Su Shuyi's power. Suddenly, Grandmother Yu appeared and said that she also wanted to test the formation. And she used 10% of her power and attacked the formation, but it resisted. And the grandmother thanked Sheng and told him that the temple was lucky to have him as one of them. And after two months of training, Sheng finally reached the seventh level of the crystal world. And he asked himself why Su Shuyi had not appeared yet. And the noble lady sent for him because she wanted him. And he went to meet her. And she told him that the Commercial Bloc had made a list of treasures that could be found in the shrine and asked those who had lamps to light them during the Festival of Lights in five days. And Sheng asked her if she wanted anything specific from the treasures on the list she gave him. So she told him that the list contained many valuable and expensive treasures, but she wanted a Limbo flower. And he said to himself that this flower helps those at the level of the God's Earth to reach the Limbo level. And Sheng said that it is useful and has value for the noble lady Di, Grandmother Yu, and himself. And the Red Dragon told him that the Jade Immortal's greatness is also very useful for him and will help his body. So he told the noble lady that all the items on the list were indeed tempting, but he felt that something was strange and that a problem would occur. So he told her that every person who dies tries to hide their shrine from the living so that no one disturbs them. So how did the Immortal Yan give them a chance to enter his shrine? And he also told her how the Commercial Bloc was able to know what was inside the shrine. So she told him, "From your words, I understand that you think this is a trap." So he asked her, "What do you think?" And she told him, "You are right, and this shrine has always been surrounded by suspicion." And Sheng told her that in the world of martial arts, there is no sweetness without fire. And he told her that there is a possibility that these rumors are true, so they will go. And suddenly the noble lady felt something happening outside, and the children were running, and she was scared, and the alarm bell rang, and Su Shuyi appeared. And he asked the elder, his father, to come out to him. And the grandmother came out to him indeed and told him, "What brought you here, and what do you want from my temple?" And he told her, "Is it possible that you forgot? It's only been three months." So she told him that everyone who was there at the time knew that the Cloud Temple was not wrong in what it did. So he replied to her and told her, "Did I tell you that you were wrong?" And he told her that his son's determination was not strong enough, so he lost his martial arts heart, and Si Miao was weak and could not defend herself. And they both bore the consequences of their weakness. Then he began to shout and say that Yun, his son, and Si Miao, his wife, would kill everyone who tried to harm them, regardless of who was wrong, because they were scum and weak. And Sheng Hai told him, "Let's assume the temple is wrong. What do you want?" He said, "I want your life." So Sheng said, "Okay, and if I don't surrender myself to you?" He said, "I will destroy you and the Cloud Temple." So Sheng provocatively said, "Okay, I'm in front of you. Come and kill me if you can." So he told him, "You are saying this because you are relying on this weak barrier that you have previously used to block one weak blow from me. It seems you have become arrogant." Then Su summoned his power to begin attacking the wall. And Sheng Hai from inside the wall, and they took their attacking positions in case he breached the wall. And the noble lady Di said, "Show me. Try to get past the wall." And the king became angry and began to attack the formation with all his might, but he failed every time he tried. And the elders were impressed by the power of the formation that withstood the strongest men on the continent. And they called it the defensive formation, indeed. And Su Shuyi got tired and stopped to look at the formation. And Sheng Hai took out his sword and activated the Space Cutter technique, which is considered the strongest weapon in the entire central region. And as soon as the elders saw it, they said that the barrier was considered destroyed. And they told each other that Su Shuyi would kill her and leave them alive. But even the Space Cutter failed. And Su Shuyi, when he found that he had not even scratched the wall, knew that this wall was impossible. Then Sheng asked Zhong to activate the offensive formation, but Su managed to escape and flee from the attack quickly. And the noble lady Di said, "Su absorbs the lives of many people to reach this power." And Grandmother Yu told Sheng, "Don't think that killing Su will be that easy." And Su Shuyi told Sheng that he had the necessary potential to be his enemy. And Sheng Hai told him, "I'm not afraid of you." And everyone was shocked and said, "What ridiculous words is Sheng saying?" And the noble lady Di couldn't believe her ears and said that Sheng only thought about his little sister. And Su Shuyi laughed hysterically and said, "Sheng, you are forgiving me." And he threatened, saying, "We'll see how long you'll hide in your bubble." And Sheng Hai said, "Activate the formation's attack to drive this person away from me." And Zhong activated Lightning's Wrath, and Su Shuyi quickly fled from them. And the entire Cloud Temple chanted Lu Sheng's name and said, "You are the best, you are the strongest, you are the best, you are the strongest." And the grandmother was lost in thought about Lu Sheng for a while, and Di annoyed her and told her to snap out of it and return to her original state. Elder Xiao, who was waiting for the formation to be destroyed so he could sit on the temple's throne, was bursting with anger. He said to Sheng, "We'll see how long you'll hide." After a few days, the Festival of Lights began in Yun Hai City. And we go to the headquarters of the Commercial Bloc and see the ancient elder asking them to light the lamp. He told them that he felt that the ninth lamp had appeared now, but he didn't know with whom, but he felt its presence and that he would finally enter the shrine this year. And the bloc's president lit his lamp, and Su Shuyi lit his lamp, and everyone with a lamp lit it. And the marks began to light up to the eighth mark, and everyone was waiting. And the elders of the Cloud Temple were surprised that the lamp had been with the noble lady Di all along. And they said that the matter of the shrine might be a trap, and that's why she would go with some elite members and six virtual catastrophe experts. And Sheng Hai saw the ninth mark light up and celebrated. And we go to the shrine of Tian Miao inside the Sea of Chaos. And the sea said to humans that they were very slow and took 2000 years to collect the lamps. And everyone with a lamp had a void teleportation gate open in the sky to take them to the shrine. And in the Sea of Chaos, they saw monsters with the power of Limbo. And she told Sheng Hai that it was impossible. And Sheng told her that they were lucky to have passed the barrier directly before being eaten. And Sheng Hai and the elder told him that this was the entrance to the shrine and that they had to be careful with anything here. And they asked the dummy in front of them to see what would happen to it. And Sheng Hai said it was a smart idea, and the path turned out to be safe. And the liberation began, and everyone was anticipating and waiting to see what was inside the shrine. And a beautiful girl appeared, hiding her face, and told her brother that the remaining lamps were owned by clans from the central region, and that they were the only ones from the four divine kingdoms who had heard of this place. And she said that everyone here was just a bunch of ants and no one would take anything from them. And everyone felt restricted as they walked. And Dai screamed and told Sheng Hai, "Now fight someone at the level of a god." And Sheng Hai felt nothing, even though he should have felt the pressure more. And Sheng Hai and Dai walked, and he looked at the ring that Sheng had taken from Di. And he said, "It's impossible that the ring is protecting him." And he said to the ring, "Let me see what power I have that no one else has." Then he saw the ring of the immortal's treasures, and the amulet that the dummy had given him was with them. And when he saw the amulet, he said to himself that the amulet confirmed that he was the owner of the immortal's palace, but he could not control anything in the palace because he did not have enough power to use anything. And he said that he had completely forgotten about this amulet, thinking it was useless outside the palace, and he never expected its effect to be so strong. Then he tried to connect the immortal's palace and the immortal's shrine and wondered if there was a relationship between them. And Grandmother Yu felt something coming towards them and asked everyone to prepare their defenses. And she sent a dummy to explore what was there. And it was met by a zombie, and they fought and tried to kill the zombie, but they couldn't. Finally, Elder Xiao managed to destroy the zombie. Suddenly, large numbers of zombies appeared inside cages. And he said that they would not be able to get out. And he continued, and they looked at the zombies with fear. Suddenly, a very large number of zombies attacked them. And the grandmother asked everyone to defend themselves and kill all the zombies. And a monstrous zombie appeared, and Sheng Hai said that only virtual catastrophe masters could deal with it. But it attacked Sheng, who cut off its head with a single blow of his sword. And everyone went crazy and wanted to know how Sheng did it. And the noble lady Di asked them to advance. And suddenly they felt a strong dark energy coming towards them. And they saw a huge zombie monster. When they saw it, they said that they were all dead. And the noble lady Di asked if it was a demon. And Grandmother Yu told her that it was a demon of the leader rank that had turned into a zombie after its death. And she told them that she would deal with it. And Dai told her, "This is just a demon leader." And she stepped forward to fight it, and it melted. And Elder Xiao was surprised and said, "Where was this power all along?" And he said that she always treated them with contempt, and none of them knew the limits of her power. And the noble lady created an isolation wall for the monster using the Absolute Frost technique and gathered it. And they continued their way, and each clan had its own path. And they were also met by zombies and monsters, and each clan had its own unique way and weapons to pass through the stages. And suddenly they heard a voice saying that those who entered the shrine would not leave it. In the name of the heavens, he asked them to leave their lives here. And when they fled towards the exit, it closed on them, and they were trapped inside. And they heard the same voice saying the same thing again. And the Cloud Temple clan reached a place where they walked and smelled a strange scent. And the noble lady Dai saw something written on the ground. And Sheng Hai said, "Perhaps the zombies are a welcome gift." And he wanted to know where the scent of perfumes was coming from. And when they stepped on the mark on the ground, they found themselves in a large forest, and everything in it looked strange. And the elders ran towards the rare flowers. And the noble lady warned them when she discovered that there were no traps in front of them. She wished she could find the legendary Limbo herb. And Sheng Hai said that he would search for something important like them. And the Green Dragon told him that most of the things here were valuable but not useful to him. And he said that there was only one thing worth his trouble. And when he asked what it was, he said, "That brown clod of earth over there is the most valuable thing in this place." And he asked him to go and get it. And when Sheng was surprised by the word "earth," the dragon told him that it was not ordinary. And he asked for breathing soil and told him to take it. And the noble lady could not find the Limbo flower. And Sheng Hai took a handful of the soil. And when he reached it, he asked the dragon if it was it. And he told him, "Yes, it is." And he asked him to extract it from the ground and take it, as it would be useful in the future. And when he dug it up and took it out of the ground, even though it was small in size, its weight was very heavy in his hand. Then he saw Elder Xiao in front of him, who entered with malice in his eyes. But when Sheng raised his sword, his face told him that he wanted to know what he had found. And then the noble lady asked everyone to continue walking to complete their journey. And they found many doors in front of them. And one of them told them that they all had to enter through one door. And the noble lady asked them to stop where they were, and she would check the door. And when the noble lady entered, the door closed on her. And the grandmother tried to get out but couldn't. And Sheng Hai rushed to catch her. And when he entered, the door also closed behind him. And thus he discovered that whoever enters cannot leave. So he decided to continue his way and found an opening in front of him, which he entered. And suddenly he saw a strange path in front of him and heard a voice calling him. And when he looked, he saw the noble lady Di suddenly behind him. And when he approached her, he noticed a transparent barrier between them, and he understood that no one was allowed to approach each other. And he continued his way and saw a sacred courtyard with a place for ninety people around it, but each one was on his own path. And he wished her well. And the Xiu Ling clan appeared. And when the monk saw Grandmother Yu, he told her that he did not expect them to have a lamp. And she told him that she also did not expect them to be there. And Di called Sheng and told him that she had not forgotten that he had promised her a fight between them. And he told her, "When I'm free, we'll meet." And King Su Shuyi appeared. He saw Sheng and said, "You again. The members of the Commercial Bloc have also arrived." And the noble lady Di, when she saw them, welcomed them and said, "Since the Commercial Bloc is here, and also the Xiu Ling clan, then Su Shuyi will not approach them." And the Raven arrived, and Sam Dam, and a person appeared alone. And King Su Shuyi asked him to introduce himself to them and said that he was just a fugitive for 8000 days. And he asked if any of them remembered him. And he stood stunned and thought. And Dai said, "This is him." And Sheng asked her, "Who is he?" She said, "The King of Poisons, Shen He." And she told him that this person had reached the level of virtual catastrophe to obtain the law of the five poisons. And then the bloc and the great power offered a reward for killing him, but he managed to escape. And she told Sheng Hai, "He is a small..." And the king told him that he did not expect him to enter the Limbo world during the time he disappeared. And he told him that since he escaped from him, he had expected great luck for him. And he approached them, saying that they had forced him to escape and live in a swamp. And he told them that when he obtained the power of Immortal Miao, he would kill them all and build his own world. And the strange girl arrived again and laughed and said that the fighters with her were from the northern continent. And when Di heard her, she remembered that the four kings called the central region the northern continent. And she also said that to them, it was not a continent, but just a small piece of land in the north. And Su Shuyi told her, "Are you from the four kingdoms?" And she replied to him and told him, "Who allowed you to speak, you insect?" And he became very angry and challenged her, asking if she could say it again, her and the spirit with her. And he told her, "How dare you speak to me like that?" And the young man with him told him, "You are just an insect from the northern continent and not qualified to ask." And Sheng Hai said, "He is at the Limbo level of power, so that's why they speak with such confidence." Then he said, "After everyone has arrived, what will happen?" And everyone stood looking at each other. Suddenly, rolling stones appeared. And whoever the stone came across, a beam of energy shot out and trapped and killed him. And the monk said, "Then will we stand and wait for death?" And Sam Dam wished that the stone would not stop at her. And Dai said that the person at whom the stone stopped would die. And Sheng Hai thought about what he could do with his laws. And suddenly it was his turn, and the stone came towards him and shot him with rays. And Sheng was shocked by what happened. And the noble lady Di began to scream in fear for him. And Sheng Hai said, "Get out of this cage. And will the ray turn red and attack him?" And he said that if this happened, he would have no choice but to use the amulet that the president of the Dragon Palace of Air gave him. And Sheng said that if this ray was designed to kill them all, then why did it take this long to kill them all in the first place? And suddenly the ray turned red, and the king was happy, of course, and waited for the ray to attack Sheng and kill him. But Sheng attacked the stone, and it turned yellow. And the noble lady Di took a breath. And King Su Shuyi cursed the stone for not killing Sheng. And the bloc's president understood that they had to attack the stone. And Elder Hai Shan of the clan said, "It seems we have to play with the stone." And Sheng Hai said, "The stone said we have to play." And they took steps according to the number that appeared. And it was Ji's turn, who rolled the stone and advanced six steps. And the noble lady rolled the stone and advanced three steps. And she asked herself, "Will my luck be in the fourth step?" And when she took the fourth step, she gained 500 years of life. And she was shocked. And Sam Dam said that virtual catastrophe fighters would reach 1000 years of life and could live up to 2000 years. And Sheng Hai asked her, "How old are you?" And she got angry and told him, "What is it to you?" And we go to King Su, who said that the shrine here is built on luck, and everyone is equal in the chances of death or life. But he saw that luck alone would not determine everyone's fate, but surely there is a role for personal strength and courage. And he rolled the stone, and it gave him five steps, and a black box appeared. And Sheng Hai said that black always indicates bad luck, and it could be death or punishment. And he asked himself, "What will happen to the king?" And indeed, the king entered the illusion of darkness. And the Raven said to himself, "Will the king be able to withstand this punishment, or will he emerge stronger and become a real threat to all of us and our ancestors?" And the king endured the darkness and resisted. And the strange young man was surprised and said that he did not expect such strong fighters in the northern continent. And his sister told him, "The insect will remain an insect." And the king emerged from his punishment stronger indeed. And Sheng Hai said, "The capitals." And it was the turn of the beautiful girl, who got a six. And the stone gave her another chance. And Sheng Hai and the mischievous Ji were sad because she didn't get two chances like her. And when she played again, she also got a six. And everyone objected and said that this was cheating. King Su had a different opinion. He told them that this lady was not a saint and they should not compare themselves to her. And the dragon told Sheng Hai, "What happens happens. It's a game, but it's the wheel of fortune." And Sheng Hai said, "You think luck is just a superstition, but it is a real thing." And he told him that he would not blame them for that, because in their country they choose fighters based on talent and secrets, but the wheel of fortune also determines each person's level of luck. And he told Sheng that when Tian Miao built this shrine, he was looking for someone with true luck. And Sheng Hai said, "True luck has been with the saint until now, who with one blow advanced twelve steps." And the dragon told him that he did not agree with what he was saying and that an easy life was not true luck, but luck was starting from scratch and reaching power. And he told him that his first move was two steps, and that was his bad luck at the beginning of his life. And he told him that some people have no luck at all, and the stone killed them. And Sheng Hai advanced two steps forward. And he said that when he was born, he was the son of noble people, but he became a slave when his father and mother died. And he said to himself that because he was born a lord, he only took two steps, but if he became a slave, he could take more. Then it was Sheng's turn, and he rolled the stone, and it gave him a one. So he was disappointed. And the noble lady Di consoled him and told him not to be sad. And a purple square appeared, which meant punishment. And he took it off and said, "What will be behind this?" And as soon as he took the step, it ignited, and he entered the Star Burning level. And King Su said that this was the worst luck he could possibly encounter, and Sheng would not be able to get out of here at his level. And Di was worried about Sheng and afraid for him. And the bloc's president said that he had always seen Sheng as lucky and couldn't believe he would die so easily. And the ancient elder told him that his luck was temporary, and temporary luck was useless. And the president told him, "Let's see if temporary luck will save him from punishment." And we go to Sheng Hai, who is enjoying his shower. And he said that this fire reminded him of the fire of the formation, and that the most difficult part of tempering the body with magical fire was finding the fire itself. And he told him that when he was imprisoned, he had

The clan of Qin Yun, the magical fire over there, barely thickened the skin and a small part of the flesh. This time, they will see how far this fire will take the thickening. Then he feels his body is thirsty for the flame of the stars, so he rises to it again. When the fire begins to subside, the king says that Sheng has now turned to ash, and the noblewoman prays for him. He emerges from the fire unharmed, but Sheng emerges from the burning of the stars stronger than before. The strange princess is surprised that he came out of the fire alive and even stronger than before, and says, "How can someone in the Crystal World withstand the burning of the stars?" The leader of the conglomerate is happy and says, "This is the Sheng I know." The green dragon tells Sheng that his body has benefited greatly from the fire, and that the stars use this fire to thicken themselves. If the burning had continued a little longer, his body would have reached the level of Cheng. Sheng tells him that his body has now become as strong as the Xian weapon, and that before he could not use his full power because of his weak body, but now he can use a large amount of his power, and he is also one step away from reaching the level of Cheng. The king looks at Sheng and tells him, "Nothing affects me at all." He grits his teeth and says, "It's clear I'll kill you myself." Then it's the turn of the elder Shen, whose back allows him four steps. The red color appears from his lot. When he sees it, he says, "The last person who got the red color was killed by lightning." Then he hears someone say, "Free challenge!" and everyone is astonished. The raven says, "This is someone who has reached the Limbo level, and whoever is chosen to challenge him will surely die." The noblewoman is worried, and the leader of the conglomerate is sweating, but happy. He is looking for someone to challenge among everyone standing and says he will choose someone he hates. King Sui begins to worry, but the old man tells him, "A day will come when I will kill you, but not today." The king says to him, "Can you?" He looks at the blood poison and says to her, "You look scared." She tells him she is not scared. He tells her he knows she is scared that he will choose her. She tells him she is weak compared to his power, which has reached the Limbo level, and she must be scared. He tells her that's not the truth. He looks at the blood poison, and when she tells the old man Shen, she doesn't know exactly what he means by his words. He asks her to think a little. He thinks of the proverb that everyone is responsible for their actions. He reminds her when the whole continent was expelled for the book of the Five Poisons, but they were expelled alone, and no one targeted anyone from their family. But the Blood Wood Drift killed his entire family, young and old, more than 200 people. Since then, he has dreamed of this moment every night and cannot forget it. Then the blood poison discovers that she is already dead. She falls and activates the solid blood wave technique. He laughs and tells her that he knows her power is at the peak of virtual catastrophe, but to him, she is just a cockroach. She attacks him, telling herself that the blood contains the poison of the Beast King of Poisons, which will weaken his power. But he mocks her and tells her she is weak and he doesn't feel pleasure fighting her. Then he attacks her with his spiritual energy. Shenghua says she is dead. She is indeed starting to die until she turns into a skeleton and dies. A elder from the Blood Wood Drift sect says she is dead, and the ring on her finger contains most of the Blood Wood Drift's legacy. Another elder from the sect replies, "Can you claim it?" We go to the back, and it's the noblewoman Dai's turn. She takes six steps, then she gets another attempt, and it's also six steps. She gets a third attempt, and it's also six steps. She gets a fourth attempt, and the leader of the trade conglomerate envies her great luck. The raven says, "This is normal for the temple mistress who was born into a poor family and today became the strongest woman in the entire central region. If this is her bad luck, who in the world will have good luck?" The mysterious princess is jealous of Noblewoman Dai's luck and says she cannot lose to an insect like this. Then it's her turn. She takes six steps, and she gets a second attempt. She gestures to Noblewoman Dai and tells her she will go ahead of her. When she rolls the dice, she takes only five steps. The system gave her a chance to curse anyone present whose luck was bad. So she gestures to Noblewoman Dai and tells her she has accepted the system's gift and points to Noblewoman Dai and chooses her. The noblewoman is shocked, and Sheng shouts at the princess, saying, "How dare you do something like that?" She replies, "Who can stop me from doing that, you insect?" Sheng is vigilant, and Noblewoman Dai gets a black cloud above her head. When she sees the lightning in the cloud, she gets scared and says she is not reassured. Sheng reassures her and tells her he will find a way to lift the curse from her. The noblewoman is vigilant, waiting for what will happen to her. Sheng asks the green dragon if he can play with luck and change it. The dragon tells him to let things go naturally and says, "If this immortal could manipulate human luck, he wouldn't be buried in a place like this." Then the noblewoman stands waiting, and nothing happens to her. The dragon laughs and tells her that the noblewoman's luck is very strong, and this small curse will not affect her. He tells him that the consequences will be within the game. Sheng says, "May God hear you, Green One." Then she begins to advance. The dragon tells Sheng that the immortal cannot change anyone's luck, but he can play with the outcome of the game to make it seem like her luck was bad. He tells him that the effect on Dai will not be too bad. Sheng asks him, "Do you think her luck is that great?" The dragon tells him that her luck is always below his luck in training and ranking. Then it's Sheng's turn. He says, "Whose luck is good? I can only take three steps." The dragon laughs. When Sheng rolls the dice, he takes five steps and then says, "Finally, there's hope." The system gives him a chance to curse someone among the attendees to make their luck bad. Sheng laughs and says, "This is what's needed." The king stands and looks down on Sheng, who tells him that he will surely not die so easily and that if he curses him, he will surely find a way to escape the curse. He looks at the mysterious princess, who tells him, "Who are you looking at, insect?" She tells him that if he curses her, she will destroy his entire Financial Continent. The prince with her asks him to curse someone else, and he will give him a good reward, like a treasure he has never seen before. He tells him, "Are you stupid, boy? Or do you see me as a joke? If you could destroy the Northern Continent, you would have destroyed it long ago. If you had treasures, you wouldn't have entered the shrine and gotten into this ridiculous situation." The prince gets angry and says, "Are you mocking me too? Don't you know who I am?" Sheng tells him, "I don't know who you are, and I don't want to know either." He then points to the princess, saying, "About her." Then a black cloud full of lightning appeared above her. The princess asks Lao to kill Sheng, but Lao tells her that it is impossible because he cannot break through the immortal's barrier. She starts screaming like a child and says, "I don't care, kill him, kill him!" The prince replies, "Don't rush, because there will surely be a challenge, and I will kill you." Sheng looks at them and says, "If a free challenge comes to one of them, I'll be done for." Then he says, "When that comes, I'll worry. For now, let's focus on the game." We go to Noblewoman Dai, who is worried and thinking about the bad luck that is not reducing the number of steps. She says that everyone's luck has become bad in the last rounds of the game, and that one of the elders of the Twelve Ling Xiu sect has turned to charcoal, and that Ji Da You was also punished for her bad luck, and it's good that she was able to endure the punishment. Then it's Dai's turn for punishment, which is a short period of absolute frost. Sheng says the dragon was right because this punishment will not affect her much, as her punishment is from the same law she uses. Then he calls her and asks if she is okay. She is happy and laughs, saying that she is not only okay, but the punishment has made her understand the law of ice even more. The mysterious princess will burn where she stands from Noblewoman Dai's luck, which always stands with her. Then it's her turn for punishment, which is black. She shivers. He screams, afraid for her. Sheng is happy and says this is a good thing. Then she cries. When her brother asks her what's wrong, she tells him she lost her protection charm during the punishment. He gets angry and looks at Sheng, saying he will make this scoundrel pay dearly. Then it's the turn of the leader of the trade conglomerate, who gets five steps. He walks cautiously, not knowing what awaits him. When he arrives, he receives a gift, a cleaner that can remove curses from anyone. He looks at the princess and the noblewoman, playing with his beard, and says that only these two are cursed. He is thinking about who to help. The prince screams and tells him, "Are you still thinking, fatso?" He asks him to remove the curse from his little sister. The leader of the conglomerate screams at him for calling him fatso and says, "You are a prince from the Divine Kingdoms, and I don't care even if you are a prince sitting on the throne." One of her guards asks him not to be angry with the prince and to remove the curse from the young princess, and he will give him a great reward. He asks him what kind of reward, and the other is silent. Sheng tells him that if he removes the curse from Noblewoman Dai, he will build him a defensive array. The leader of the conglomerate is very happy and tells him, "Don't go back on your word." He agrees. The princess's guard tells him that they will give him an array if he removes the curse from their princess. He tells him that their arrays are nothing compared to the arrays that Sheng builds. Therefore, he has made his decision and removes the curse from Noblewoman Dai, who thanks him immediately. He tells her she should thank Sheng because he will pay for this favor. The guard is angry and blames the prince and the saint, saying that their arrogance and contempt for people have led them to this situation. He says that despite the great differences and internal conflicts in the Northern Continent, they will unite against the stranger, of course. He says that the saint is the most important person here and must be protected, because if she dies here, everyone will be in great trouble. Then it's the turn of the old man Shen, who gets three steps and a white color like the leader of the conglomerate, Yan. He also receives a cleaner to remove the curse. The saint's guard asks for his help and tells him that only the saint is cursed here. He asks what reward he can get if he removes the curse from the saint. The other says, "Ask for whatever reward you want." He asks them to send their army to destroy all the clans present here and build him his own empire on their corpses. Everyone is surprised. King Sui says that the old man Shen's ambition is frightening. The guard tells him that what he is saying is very difficult because building kingdoms takes years. He tells him that if he cannot help him, he will keep the cleaner for himself for when he needs it. The guard then says that he cannot build him an empire, but he can give him the inner book of his training style. The old man is shocked and surprised. The guard tells him, "As I tell you, my brother, the book I have is the outer book of the Five Poisons, but it is a general and incomplete book. The inner book they have has many details he has never seen before, and he will find everything he can imagine in it." He tells him that if he swears on his life arts, he will give him the book and remove the curse immediately. The other swears. The old man tells himself that negotiating with someone like this is shameful and uncertain, but he has no choice but to take the risk for the book. He tells him, "Agreed." The saint is vigilant, waiting. The one standing looks at her cautiously. Then it's the turn of Xuan Hall. When he gets a punishment, he tells himself that he is officially dead. But the system tells him that he has a chance to kill someone present. Noblewoman Dai says, "Thank God there are no problems between the Xuan clan and us." She wonders who they will kill with their killing opportunity. She thinks of King Sui or Elder Shen, or maybe someone old like the leader of the conglomerate, Yan, or even the raven. Then everyone is vigilant, and he makes a big surprise. He chooses Elder Xuan Yin, who is the head of his clan. As soon as he feels the betrayal, he activates his super protection shield, but unfortunately, it doesn't work, and he dies when the dice hit him with rays. Elder Sheng is happy that he has finally gotten rid of the old man who clings to the chair and doesn't want to die. The other elders of the clan congratulate Elder Sheng, to everyone's great astonishment. Sheng says, "What did this old man do to be so hated by his clan?" He says that this ray of the dice is very dangerous because it could kill someone at the Limbo level so easily. Sheng thinks it's his turn, and the dice give him six steps and a second attempt. When he rolls the dice again, he gets six more steps and a third attempt. Sheng takes a breath and says, "Finally, some good luck." When he rolls the dice for the third time, he gets six more steps and a fourth attempt. Noblewoman Dai is happy and congratulates him on his good luck, which has made him the first. Then he gets a green square. When he sees it, he says that this color is a symbol of something good. When Dai got it, she gained 500 years of pure life. When he stands on the square, he gains great insight that no one else has. He imagines a huge tree in front of him, from which golden drops fall and wash his eyes. Yan is surprised by the tree's sap washing his eyes. The young prince wishes it's not something bad and blinds his eyes before fighting him. But the saint's guard tells them, "You are a bit stupid and ignorant. What you see is the divine tree mentioned in the legends, and its people spend generations collecting a single drop of its sap to make high-level medicines." He is sad because this rare sap is washing Sheng's eyes. The princess asks if he is sure about the saint's words. They are vigilant. The elder guard continues and says that this divine tree appears once every 500 years, and only one drop is produced. The people of this tree do not even have 10 drops of its sap. Leader Yan is impressed as he looks at Sheng, who feels great comfort in his body and feels his eyes have become very pure, but he doesn't feel any change in his body. He tells the dragon, "Was my gift just to feel comfortable?" The dragon tells him that these drops will make his vision extremely sharp and protect him from most illusions, and the value of this drop and its benefit to humans is more precious than 500 years of life. Sheng is surprised and asks, "So you mean it's more precious than Dai's gift?" The dragon tells him, "When you try it, you'll know." The prince will burn with anger that Sheng is in first place. Then it's his turn. He wishes for something good this time, but the dice give him one step. When he sees the red square, he is afraid it might be a punishment. But when he stands on it, he discovers it's a free challenge. He laughs heartily and is happy. The saint asks him to stop laughing and challenge Sheng and kill him quickly. He tells her he will deal with this insect quickly and finish the game. The elder guard says, "A challenge between virtual catastrophe and the Crystal World is not called fighting." The prince begins the war of words and tells Sheng that his luck is good, but he has killed himself by choosing to be their enemy because his life will end here. Sheng tells himself that his luck is indeed good because the shrine here limits everyone's power a bit, and in this way, he has a chance to survive. The prince, seeing him take a fighting stance, says, "Are you stupid, boy?" He thinks to himself, "Shouldn't he be scared and ask for my forgiveness?" He draws his sword and tells him he will show him what a prince from a divine kingdom is. He activates the snake strike technique and attacks him powerfully. He actually manages to wound Sheng, who is surprised by the sword's power, its strange appearance, and its use. He thanks God that his wound is superficial. The prince tells him he is lucky to have escaped death in the first attack, but he will not escape the second. Sheng tells him, "Think of an idea." He decides to use the law of space. The prince, as soon as he sees the use of the law of space, is surprised and says to himself, "That's why he is arrogant, and it seems he has almost finished the first level of the law of space." He says that even in their divine kingdoms, very few elders can reach this level. He asks, "How can a young man like this, from a lowly continent, reach such a high level?" Then he tells Sheng, "Don't be happy with yourself for the circus trick you just did, because I will show you the real difference between us now." Suddenly, his sword spirit appears, which is a demonic dragon. Elder You sees it and is surprised and afraid for Sheng. Noblewoman Dai calls out to Sheng, warning him. Yan says, "This is normal for the martial arts of the Four Kingdoms, and I see that Sheng is finished against a prince of the virtual catastrophe level." Sheng tells himself that although the prince's power has increased a bit and he hasn't, the difference between them is huge. He is impressed by the prince's movements, which carry the pride of the divine kingdoms, and he feels that the demonic dragon in front of him is connected to his blood. He is surprised. Sheng asks him, "What connection could link him to the snake?" The dragon tells him that his training method is taken from the Dragon Men. He tells him that long ago, there was a clan of Dragon Men living with the Seven Kingdoms, but when the war broke out, all the Dragon Men were killed, and their treasures were distributed among the Four Kingdoms. They took everything of theirs except the Flying Dragon Tower, which disappeared before they could reach it. He tells him that the prince's training method is called the Sacred Dragon Body, and its level is higher than that of the Dragon Men. Since he cannot use the dragon style without dragon blood in his body, and there is no dragon blood in the world, he used snake blood. Sheng tells him that dealing with someone like this will be difficult, and he must show his true power to overcome him. Immediately after, he summons the Wheel of Life and Death and makes many copies of it. Then he summons evil spirits. The old man says, "How can a young man like this summon all these evil spirits without being afraid that they will devour his soul?" Noblewoman Dai is surprised because it is the first time she has seen so many evil spirits with Sheng. Sheng begins to attack the snake, and indeed he manages to kill it, but he notices that the prince has a powerful protection amulet. He tells him that if it saved him once, it won't save him again. He strikes it with his sword and breaks it. The prince screams and asks him not to kill him, saying that if he kills him, he will pay dearly. Sheng attacks him powerfully and tells him, "You are dead, and the dead should not speak." He attacks him and wounds his hand holding the sword, and the sword falls from him. Sheng tells him, "How can an expert at the virtual catastrophe level like him be so weak? He is a disgrace to fighters and must die now." The elder guard pleads with him not to kill him. The saint tells him, "If you kill him, I will kill you with my own hands." Sheng flies at him to slaughter him with his sword. The prince still doesn't feel like he has been slaughtered and is happy that the attack didn't do anything to him. After a while, he begins to feel intense pain in his head and says that it is because he used the Sacred Dragon Body without dragon blood. Then blood begins to flow from his neck, and he falls to the ground like a slaughtered sheep. The elder is disbelieving, saying, "How can someone in the Crystal World kill a genius of the virtual catastrophe level?" Sheng tells himself that the shrine limited his power until it reached the level of the God's Land, otherwise he would not have been able to kill him. The saint cannot believe this has happened and says that his death is not a problem for the kingdom because the king lives for thousands of years and has thousands of sons. But he was her only friend because she has been a saint since childhood, and everyone was afraid to approach her. He was the one who asked her to come here, and she didn't think this would be the last place they would gather. Then she went mad and got angry and swore to Sheng that a day would come when she would kill him and his entire clan. Then it was her turn to roll the dice. When she rolled the dice, she got six steps. She wished for a good gift, and her gift was to kill someone present. Noblewoman Dai screamed in fear for Sheng when she heard the system say that. The leader of the conglomerate is sad and says that the fighter who was at the Limbo level could not withstand the dice attack, and Sheng is now finished and dead. Sheng himself is shocked and confirms that he is indeed dead. Noblewoman Dai tells her that if she kills him, she will face the worst of fates and kill her herself. The saint tells her that she is a divine saint, and to her, she is an insect from the Northern Continent. How can she hunt her? Dai begins her attack, telling her that she does not show mercy. Elder You asks Noblewoman Dai to retreat, but Noblewoman Dai continues and attacks the saint's origin of life. Elder You says that Noblewoman Dai has burned her origin of life to curse the saint, and thus the saint has become Dai's target as long as she lives, and it is impossible for her to leave her until one of them dies. From today on, the saint will suffer from extreme cold poison that will not leave her body until one of them dies. Sheng screams at Dai and tells her she shouldn't have done that. Then the saint points at Sheng to die, and Noblewoman Dai screams in pain for Sheng. Sui Wei is happy that Sheng will die alone. Sheng resists, and the veins in his body begin to break. He cannot, and says that the attack on him is terrifyingly powerful, but he resists and says he will unleash all the Gong energy in his body and do everything he can to withstand the attack. Noblewoman Dai screams in extreme pain. The raven cannot believe his resilience so far and says that Xuan's ancestor could not withstand all this, and how Sheng has not died yet. Sui Wei is shocked and says his body is very tough. The leader of the conglomerate is impressed by Sheng's resilience. He says that if he can escape the immortal's attack, there must be a strange secret protecting him. Sheng, whose blood veins are almost all broken, is still resisting. Dai cries for him and asks him to get up to save his sister. Sheng lies on the ground, holding the protection amulet given to him by the head of the Dragon God Palace to protect him from death. Then we see him lying on the ground, covered in blood, but strange bubbles appear around him, protecting him from the dice attack. Then the entire place shakes as if there is an earthquake, and everyone in the place is shocked and astonished, not believing what they are seeing. Suddenly, the attack on Sheng doubles. Elder You and Elder Hong are surprised and want to know what Sheng used to withstand such an attack. The attack suddenly stops, and Sheng wakes up and begins to get up from the ground, holding the protection amulet in his hand. He looks at it and then says to himself that the amulet given to him by the head of the Dragon God Palace saved him from death, and he did not expect it to be so powerful that it could withstand the immortal's attack. Then he is surprised that he is still alive after all his blood veins were broken. He looks at Noblewoman Dai and tells her, "Why are you crying?" She gets embarrassed and turns her back. He laughs and tells her that this is just a normal attack from an immortal, not enough to kill him. She yells at him and says, "How can you play with our nerves in such a horrible way?" Elder You, King Sui, and the raven have almost forgotten about him and are still in shock. The leader of the conglomerate says that Sheng must have brought treasures from the Upper World that helped him resist the immortal's attack. He says, "How can someone who uses the tower be imprisoned for a thousand years, and he is back again?" The old man Shen says that Sheng's luck is very great, and if he had the same treasure, he would destroy the entire central region with it. The saint has gone mad with anger and tells Sheng that she will return soon and destroy the entire Northern Continent just because of him. Sui Wei rolls the dice and gets five steps. His gift is 500 years of additional life. Then it's Sheng's turn. He tells Sui, "Rely on your luck, and I will build my negative violet array." Sui looks at him and says that Sheng's luck is a great danger to him, and getting rid of him will not be easy. Sheng rolls the dice and gets six steps, and he is happy because he is close to the end. Noblewoman Dai is happy and says he has always attracted attention. She says that when she first saw him, the Sky Demon's Fist caught her attention, and she thought she would use him to help her get treasures, but she didn't expect him to have all these secrets and abilities, and that he is close to surpassing her in power and abilities. Sheng rolls the dice again and wishes for six steps to reach the end. When he rolls the dice, he gets six steps. He laughs and says, "Finally, I've reached the end! I'm the winner! I'm the winner!" He looks back and laughs at Dai, who congratulates him. Then something strange happens, and Sheng disappears. Everyone is shocked and doesn't know what happened. The raven is displeased and says, "A child in the Sky World has surpassed us all." The leader of the conglomerate tells him that Sheng is no longer a child to him. The old man Shan Hai says, "Just because he reached the end before us doesn't mean he will take all the immortal's inheritance." Sheng finds himself in a strange place and says, "Where am I?" When he looks around, he sees the immortal's tomb and is surprised when he finds it huge. He says he remembers everything that happened to him in the immortal's palace and that he never knew his body could grow to this extent. He stands there, not knowing what to do. In the end, he decides to open the chest. When he tries to lift it, he finds it very heavy. He uses all his physical strength and even the dragon's roar, but he cannot even move it. He thinks he will look for another place. As he starts to walk, he finds strange names written on the ground. He says, "What is this?" Someone replies, "These are the paths of destiny in the divination of the purple star." He asks him to enter the array. He is shocked and says, "Who are you?" He asks the one who was speaking to him from the shrine, "Who are you?" The immortal replies, "I am the owner of the place where you are standing." When Sheng asks him to show himself, the wall begins to crack, and a large bubble emerges, inside which is a strange being. Sheng says, "Tian Miao, and the immortal laughs and tells him that an immortal, once dead, cannot appear again." He says that he is the immortal's remaining will. He says he was waiting for the person who would reach this point, so he left a piece of his soul and mixed it with the sands of time so that it would live for a period, and thus his soul would not return to the world again. Sheng's body is protected, and his soul is also protected by the Heavenly Dragon and the Red Dragon. Then he says he doesn't know what the sands of time are, and that since the immortal lost his right to be resurrected, he has condemned himself to annihilation. This means that even immortals, no matter how long they live, will eventually die, and no one can stand in the way of death. Then he asks him why he is here. The immortal says he is waiting for someone. Sheng asks who that someone is. The immortal says, "You." Sheng was waiting for this answer and says that the game from the beginning depended on luck. He tells him that since he is the first to reach this point, he is the luckiest of them all. Thus, he is the reason for the creation of this array. The immortal tells him that he knows what he is thinking and says that his luck has not yet reached the required level. Sheng is shocked. The immortal tells him that he reached this point after rolling the dice six times. He says that this game is designed to give the person a chance for another attempt once every 300 dice rolls, and that one person out of 7 billion people gets a chance for another attempt. He says he is one out of 7 billion people. He tells him that if all the inhabitants of heaven and earth rolled the dice, not one would reach it with a single roll. The immortal says he is right, and his requirements were not rational at all. He asks him to stand on the array to assess his path of destiny. Sheng asks the dragon if humans can start with a path of destiny. Both say that humans can indeed read the stars. He suggests that he try it himself and tells him that he and his brother expect his destiny to be great, but this is just an expectation because it is not their specialty. He says that their elder brother is the one who can read the stars and asks him to give the immortal a chance, perhaps he is speaking the truth. Sheng says, "Don't you think it's strange that a human has a talent that an original dragon doesn't have?" He says he doesn't know the level of Tian Miao's immortality, but he is sure that his power is incomparable to that of an original dragon. He says that there are only 49 original dragons in the entire universe, and no matter how great the immortal's power, it will never be so special as to compare to a dragon. The dragon tells him not to underestimate the powerful humans in all the realms, and laughs, saying, "We'll talk about this later." Then Sheng stands on the array, and strange symbols begin to appear around him. The bubble containing the immortal begins to crack. Sheng is surprised and asks the immortal if something happened to him. Then the immortal tells him, "Do you have an immortality amulet?" Sheng says he does have an immortality amulet. He tells him that the crystal sphere around him has cracked. The immortal tells him to forget about the sphere and show him the amulet he has. When he shows it to him, he says, "Then you are the new master of the Immortal Palace." Then Sheng is surprised as the crystal bubble moves away from him. Then the immortal asks Sheng to come and take the thing behind the wall. When Sheng goes there, he finds an amulet like the one he has. The immortal tells him that he was the third master of the Immortal Palace. Sheng remembers that when he was there, he actually heard that the palace had previous masters, and he says he didn't expect to meet one of them here. Then he asks the immortal the reason why he gave him this amulet. The immortal tells him that it is a pass to open Sheng's challenges in the Immortal Palace. He says that the Immortal Palace has many ways of challenging, and that during the time he was the owner of the origin, he was only able to open one path, and this amulet is his key. Sheng asks him the name of the palace and its origin, and why the king would inherit something so valuable. The immortal laughs and tells him that the palace has no name, and since the first owner did not name the palace, no one after him can do so, nor can anyone in the 100,000 great worlds do so. Sheng says he is exaggerating a bit and thinks to himself that the Supreme Dragon World is among the worlds, and with the first owner, he should be able to name this palace. Then the immortal begins to walk, telling Sheng, "You are the new master of the palace," and advises him to wait until he reaches the Limbo level before entering the path. He tells him that he cannot give him information about the origin of the Immortal Palace, and that the history of this palace is beyond his imagination. He tells him that since he is the temporary owner of the palace, he must have obtained a map of it, and asks him what kind of map he obtained. Sheng tells him that he obtained the map of the sky. Then the sphere containing the immortal begins to crack more. Sheng tries to reassure him. The immortal tells him to forget about him and asks him if he is sure about the name of the map he just told him. Sheng says he is sure and shows him the map. When the immortal sees it, he is surprised and tells him that he has obtained the last part of the map and asks him to keep it safe because it belongs to the first owner, who was a supreme being. So Sheng asks him who the first owner was. He tells him that he is a being he cannot understand, so he doesn't need to know anything about him. He also tells him that he can use the Sky Demon's Fist, and that this is a technique specifically for demons. He asks him how he, a human, knows how to use it, and it is specifically for another race besides humans. Sheng says that if he didn't have the Sky Demon's Fist, he would have died long ago. When the immortal doesn't reply, he tells him that he doesn't want to know that he is already dead and will not wake up again, and that he should focus on worldly matters. Then Sheng thinks for a moment and says that he is speaking the truth. He says that his techniques might be strange and complicated, and that it was due to the circumstances he went through in his life. He asks about the result of reading his destiny. The immortal tells him that since he saw the amulet with him, his mind has been occupied with it for a while, and he did not finish reading his destiny. He asks him to return to the array. When Sheng returns to the array, the immortal begins to read his destiny more closely and discovers that a great world is protecting Sheng. The sphere falls to the ground in shock. Sheng is worried about him and keeps asking why the sphere fell. When he doesn't hear a sound, he says, "Did it fall on his head this time?" Then the immortal says that he is supported by a great world standing behind him, and his destiny is supported by this world. The green dragon, when he hears this, tells the red dragon that there is no need to wait for their elder brother to confirm their predictions about Sheng, because the immortal has already confirmed it. The red dragon says that Sheng will be the shining star of this generation of the world. The green dragon says, "It seems a major turning point will occur in the destinies of the Nine Dragons, and they are lucky to be with someone with such destiny." Sheng does not understand the immortal's words and asks him, "What do you mean my destiny is supported by a great world?" The immortal tells him that he is chosen by the heavens, and when he met him, he knew he had not waited 2000 years in vain. Then he says, "Since you have an opinion and such a great destiny, what is your motivation?" Sheng acts like the character in the movie "The Great Escape" and says, "By God, I don't know anything. I don't know about destiny or the motivation you are talking about." The other says, "Then I will tell you." After a while, he asks him if he has a younger sister. Sheng says, "Yes, he does." The immortal says that his motivation is his sister and asks about her whereabouts. Sheng is silent for a moment and thinks to himself that since this immortal built the shrine, he can ask him to kill Sui Wei while he is still in the shrine. This way, everything will be resolved for him. He tells the immortal that his sister was kidnapped by an evil person named Sui Wei and that he is currently in the Wheel of Fortune game. He asks if he can help him and rescue her. The immortal thinks for a moment and then apologizes, saying he cannot. When Sheng asks him why, he says that he chose the Wheel of Fortune when he was at his full strength and designed it to transport the first person to reach the finish line, and the rest will be distributed to different places to receive their prizes. When he built it, his goal was to choose the person with the best luck, not to assassinate anyone. He says that those who died in the wheel died because of their bad luck, and he had nothing to do with it. He says he is just a shard of a soul, and his clinging to life is useless. Then Sheng says, "Then..."

He knew that he was on the level of the gods and told him that he was equal to a general here. He entered and told him that he wanted to register and get an ID. The other replied, "So you are a rank seven warrior and you are here to enter the tower?" He asked, "What's stopping me?" He replied that he admired his courage, but he would be wasting his life for no reason. He told him that even the geniuses in the Purple Heart land would die if they entered the tower. He told him that humans are weaker than demons and jinn, and to enter this tower, his rank must be at least general. With this, Cheng understood why the humans on the continent were so weak. The man told him that they were distinguished from other races by two advantages. The first advantage is that their numbers are very large, and the second advantage is that their bodies communicate with the super energy system. But here, these advantages turned into weaknesses. He told him that on his continent, there are many resources, which helps the large numbers to be distinguished, and that they choose the best talents to train them and make them the best fighters according to the available resources. But here, the resources are very scarce, and they cannot benefit from their large numbers, because to obtain these resources, they must rely on the tower like other races. He told him that the tower needs the physical jungle strength that demons and jinn possess. Since humans do not have the jungle strength that demons and jinn possess, it is natural for them to be weak in front of them. Cheng said that he still wanted to enter after all that was said. The man had nothing else to say to him. In the end, he told him, "You are free." When he left, Air asked him if he got his ID. When he said yes, she was very happy and said, "Let's go." When they reached the tower, they found a very giant man asking them for IDs. When they showed the IDs, Cheng asked Air why her ID was different from his. She told him that the ID of those who enter the tower differs according to the levels they have reached before, and that when he enters and reaches a certain floor, his ID will change. Then the tower opened for them, and they entered. Cheng was surprised by the violent fights. He asked Air, "Didn't you tell me that fights in the forbidden land are forbidden, or does the tower not apply to these laws?" She told him that the tower is outside these laws and that he can fight in the arena normally. She told him that the tower is a huge arena and that it is the training center for the entire continent because all the resources in it depend on fighting. Therefore, the fighters who train in this tower are unparalleled outside. Then he focused on the battle in front of him between a demon and a human, which the demon won, slaughtering the human with ease. This was the second time Yanga had won consecutively. He then stopped and asked for someone to step up and challenge him. Then Cheng discovered that those who die disappear, along with their bloodstains. Air tells him that this is one of the wonders of the tower; it absorbs corpses and blood if no one removes them quickly. Even the weapons that fall on the ground are absorbed if their owners do not take them quickly. Yanga the demon is still looking for someone to challenge him. Then Cheng noticed that the demon's ID was glowing, and Air told him that this is the tower's prize, called the prize of destiny. She told him that the prize grows and shrinks according to the strength of your opponent. She told him that there is a legend that the tower turns corpses into energy and uses it to sustain the living. He told her that this is the law of destiny, and that he had something similar in the Flying Dragon Tower when he was trying to ascend its levels. At that time, this energy helped him raise his energy level. He told her the difference is that there the energy entered his body directly, but here the energy enters the card. Then the green dragon laughed and told him, "It's good that you've started to notice." He told him that the energy here is similar to the energy used by the dragon race, and the difference here is that this energy requires weight before absorption. Cheng said, "That's why everyone is interested in entering this tower. What's required here is to defeat your opponent to get the energy. And whenever a certain race defeats a large number of fighters, its control over the tower increases." Yanga looks at Cheng and tells him that he thought humans didn't allow anyone below the general level to enter the tower, and he didn't expect a small warrior like him to be able to enter the tower and stand before them like this. Another demon calls out to Cheng, who is lost in thought and not present. He tells him that Master Yanga is talking to him. Another demon says, "Are humans close to extinction, that they send us weak people like this?" He asked them to kill him. Yanga asks Cheng if he has the courage to challenge him and tells him that he can cut off his head with one blow of his hand. The genie tells Cheng, "Hai, keep an eye on him." He told her that he is a demonic warrior and this is a good opportunity. He told her that he will try. Cheng the hero goes down to the arena, and the demon Yanga mocks him, saying, "Humans have stopped being cowardly and have become stupid and want to die." He lunges at Cheng, who tells him, "I love hearing your sweet screams." Cheng says, "I wish, before we know anything, you would make sure that humans are not cowardly." Yanga tells him, "Shut up completely and just scream from what you will see." But Cheng dodged the attack, then just put his finger on the demon's head and blew it up. All the demons in the hall were shocked and said, "How can they say humans are weak, and how can this boy have all this power?" Then, poof, the tower gave Cheng his energy reward. Then he said that this uncle was right when he told him that this place is the fastest way he can increase his energy. He wonders how long it will take him to reach the bottom of the tower. Then there was a very huge demonic monster. He saw what happened, and when he saw Cheng leave the arena, he told him, "Wait, where are you going? Do you think you can escape from me so easily?" When Cheng looked at him and saw the very high concentration of evil energy within him, he said that the concentration of evil energy in demons is very high compared to humans, and that he desperately needs this evil energy to enter the second stage of using the wheel of life and death. And this is his opportunity to gather the largest amount of energy. We see the demons in the hall standing and cheering for the giant demon, wanting him to make a mess of Cheng. Cheng tells him that he is standing still, waiting. The demon starts to recognize him by name. Before Cheng can speak, he tells him, "Hurry up, dead man, I don't want to know your name because you are dead to me, dead." The demon attacks Cheng with his axe. Before he takes a single step, Cheng is behind him with lightning speed. The dragon turns around and says, "I found you, and I will cut you in half with my axe." But Cheng blocks the axe with his hand. The demon turns into an angel out of shock and says, "Where did this human get this body?" He starts to scream and attacks Cheng again, who is standing in front of him, saying, "Enough for you, because the undertaker is waiting." He punched him in the stomach, causing all the veins in his body to burst, and he fell to the ground dead. The demons are unable to think from the shock, saying, "How can a mere warrior like this, at rank seven, crush this giant like a cockroach with his hand?" One of them said that he must inform his superiors to kill him before humans have a center of power in the tower. Then the genie asks Cheng to go with her to the shops to exchange the points he earned after killing two. After exchanging the items he had for an epic energy stone, he had 20 points left. He asked her what he should do with them. She told him that he could do whatever he dreamed of with them. She told him that there are many markets inside the tower and he can buy whatever he wants with the points. He told her that he understood and was almost reaching his goal without realizing it. Then we see two humans coming from the sacred Purple Heart land, General Xie, who is at level nine, and General Sheng, who is at level eight. As soon as they see Cheng, they are surprised to see a human inside the tower. General Xie says, "I wonder why the Night Genie is following him." General Cheng says, "So you must be Cheng, who killed two great demons at level one." He told him, "He seems good," and asked him to follow him. Cheng says to himself, "It seems these fools are coming for me," and leaves them, asking Air to follow him to show him the famous places here. This made the general angry, and he told him that they are of the same race and must stand together, or they will all die. Cheng told him, "Man," and then told him that working as a team is beneficial, especially when the team is of the same race, but that doesn't mean he can take orders from anyone. The general got angry and started yelling at Cheng, telling him that he has only three days in this tower if he is not under their protection. Cheng told him that this is not his concern and left, saying to Air, "Let's go." The general became very angry and wanted to fight him. Another human appeared from behind him and grabbed him, telling him, "You shouldn't have threatened him." He told him that he is very strong, and if we can protect him until he grows, he will raise the status of humans within the tower. The general laughed and told him, "You seem to have been deceived about this warrior." General Xie said to him, "Could you kill a demonic warrior when you were like him?" She told him that when she was like him, she wouldn't dare to enter the tower. When he was about to reply, she told him, "Shut up completely." She told him that they must watch him from afar and see what he will do in the next stage. She told him that the genie with him will make him throw himself into trouble, and she will try to get close to him when the opportunity arises. Then she took him to the hotels in the tower and told him that this is the cheapest and lowest place, and that he can rent a training room here for one point a day. She told him that there are luxurious places where the rent for a room reaches 100 points per night. He asked her what was special about the room to reach that price. She told him that in rooms of this type, time passes at less than 10 times the normal speed. He told her, "So these rooms slow down time?" She said yes. He understood that this is the law of time and was surprised that the law of time existed here in the tower. He told her that when he was in the Supreme Dragon world, he trained in all the arts, but he did not find an art like the law of time. He said, "If space is noble, then time is king, and time and space are the most powerful natural laws." He said that dragons almost have a problem with the law of time because it did not exist for them. He asked her if there was a way to train in the law of time here in the tower. She told him that it exists only at the first level, and he must descend further into the tower to get what he wants. He asked her the way to descend further into the tower. He told her that he must first collect 100 points to reach the second level. She told him that he is not in a hurry and will try to get used to the first level temporarily and train there for a while. When he enters his training room, the first thing he does is absorb the light of destiny from his ID to raise his level before entering the next stages. When he absorbs it, he breaks through the eighth level of the Crystal World, but he says he is still weak. The only way to kill Sui Sui is to reach the rank of master and obtain the inheritance under the tower, because time is not on his side, and Sui Sui is a lucky man and will quickly find a third girl with a negative violet body. Then he calls the red dragon and tells him that he has opened one of the eight palaces of Dao, and now he must fulfill his promise to him and teach him the technique he told him about. The dragon laughs and tells him that he knew he wouldn't forget it. He tells him that he will teach him an incomplete version of the technique, but it is a very unique version, and even if it is incomplete, it is much better than anything else. Cheng tells him that he is ready. The red dragon tells him that the technique is called the Star Staircase and tells him that he cannot imagine the power of this technique because it allows him to absorb the energy of the stars and convert it into his body. The more energy of stars he absorbs, the stronger he becomes. Cheng tells him, "You mean I can control the energy of the stars?" He told him that he once looked at a map of the sun and moon and tried to imagine it, and at that moment he felt a terrifying energy in them. He asked him if this technique would allow him to directly control the energy of the stars. The dragon told him that he cannot use the full power of the shield until he opens another palace of Dao, but since he has opened the first palace, he can start learning now. He told him that he has a second problem that will prevent him from using the full power of the shield, which is that he is incomplete. Cheng tells him that he has no problem with that because he just wants to improve a little inside the tower to reach the furthest level he can within the tower. The dragon told him that the first part of the technique is the movement of stars and asked him to choose a random star from the sky. Cheng told him, "Okay, and how will I see the stars in the sky while I'm here?" He told him that he must see the sky and call him again when he sees the sky. Cheng said, "I'm excited now," and went out of the room. When he came out, he found Air waiting for him and told him that if he finished training, he should come and see his friends who are waiting for him here. He looks and sees a large group of demons, and one very large one among them tells him, "So you are the naughty human they are talking about." Cheng tells him, "Get away from me, I don't have time for you." The demon laughs and tells him that it's not up to him. Cheng tells him, "So I understand that you want to fight me?" Air tells him that fighting outside the arena here is illegal, and it's normal for someone to obstruct your way in the tower. Suddenly, the genius Youi Sho arrives, who is the tenth general of the demon race. He asks them to move out of the way a little. The demons, when they see him, retreat to him. Cheng, when he sees him, feels a strong aura emanating from him, even though he is just a general. He tells himself that he must not underestimate him. General Sho tells him that what the warrior said about him is not normal, even though he is human. Cheng tells him, "What's it to you?" Sho says, "Don't treat him with arrogance, because all the races in the tower currently want to kill him." He told him that he prefers to kill him directly in the arena and that he will wait for him at the tenth level and hopes he doesn't disappoint him by running away or hiding. Cheng tells him that he came here to reach the furthest level within this tower and that it doesn't matter to him whether he waits for him at the tenth level or elsewhere, because he is not the main target in this tower. Of course, the demons went crazy when he spoke to their general in that way. They started attacking him and calling him arrogant and full of himself. A very large demon replied to him and told him that the one standing in front of him is the genius of the demons, and if he belittles him, he will teach him manners. The general replied that he admires his personality because it is the first time he has seen a human inside the tower with such ambition. He tells him, "You want to fight us?" Then he tells the demons not to waste their lives on him and to let him ascend the tower until they reach him. He leaves them, saying, "No one should bother him." When the giant tried to object, the general just gave him a look, and he shut up. Cheng was surprised and asked Air, "Is it possible they will let me ascend?" She told him that normally he needs to collect a lot of points from victories to ascend to the second level, but since he is very strong and no one wants to fight him, he will not be able to collect points and will earn the necessary points automatically and be promoted directly. He tells her that the laws here are set correctly. Then he goes out to a place with stars to begin training the star shield with the red dragon. When he notices that she is focused on him, he says that he shouldn't let her follow him everywhere like this. Then she understood him and told him that she has a business to attend to and must leave him to his work. He is surprised and says that she is very smart and understood on her own. Then he sits under the sky and calls the red dragon, who tells him that this place is good for forming the star shield and begins to tell him the steps, asking him to start communicating with the stars through his spiritual power. Cheng tells him, "It's impossible for me to do that." The red dragon tells him that hesitation is not good for him and he must expand his spiritual perception. He begins to meditate to expand his spiritual perception and says that the area increases according to the spiritual power of the fighter, and his spiritual power will reach a slightly larger area. He continued to expand the circle until it reached 800 feet, and then he could no longer. He said that if he tried to expand it further, it would explode. He said that if his limit is 800 feet, how will he reach the stars? He said that he is like someone trying to break the moon with a needle. The dragon laughs and tells him that he is right, because if they used his method, no one would be able to touch the stars with their spirit. Cheng asked him, "Then what is the correct way?" He told him that he must separate his spirit from his body and reach the stars first. Of course, Cheng was terrified when he learned that the matter involved separating his spirit, but he had no choice. He tries to separate his spirit from his body until he feels that everything around him has disappeared. He found himself seeing the Tower of Sin, its limit, and not only that, but he saw the entire continent, everyone in it. When he saw how huge it was, he realized that the world he lives in is much larger than he imagined. Then he saw the central region and told himself that he would try to reach the continent of the Four Divine Kingdoms. Then he saw a third continent and discovered that it was many times larger than the continent of the Divine Kingdoms. He saw the winds of Junko, which he knew existed around the world since the creation of this world, and he knew that they appear, disappear, and reappear, and that they have the power to crush anything that stands in their way. Fortunately, he did not bring his body with him, or he would have become dust. When he saw what he could not have imagined in just 10 seconds, he remembered his conversation with his father long ago when he asked him about what was beyond the eastern region. He told him the central region and the sea beyond the central region. When he asked his father what was beyond the sea, he told him that he did not know and gave him a book about the legends in the world. When he read the book, he found that there was something called the valley beyond the sea. He wanted to know what was in the valley, because legends say that at the end of the sea, there is a large valley where all the water falls, and it returns. We return to Cheng today, who found his answer. He knew what was under the cliff and knew that the worlds are divided into landmasses separated by foggy boundaries. He said that behind the fog, there might be another world, and he never imagined that the worlds were so close to each other. Then he decided to go up again to see more. Then he stopped and said, "Enough." He saw something very strange, which is that the thousand worlds are stuck together and arranged like huge scales. Then he saw a very great monster and was shocked, disbelieving. He said that he never dreamed that the earth had a monster of such size and greatness. He said that one step of his covers a large area, and he can wipe out a thousand worlds just by walking. He said, "How can a monster like this live until now, what does it eat, and how did it reach this size?" He said that if it keeps walking like this, many worlds will surely be destroyed and disappear under its feet. At that moment, he realized that humans are nothing compared to the greatness of the universe. When he approached the star field and tried to touch a star, he felt that the star was alive and conscious, and he felt rejected by the star. He tried another star, and it also rejected him. Suddenly, he heard a star scream in his face, so he said that it was in a bad mood and quickly moved away from it until he reached a star that accepted him. As soon as he touched the star, he remembered the red dragon's words when he told him that it was impossible to find a star that would accept him on the first day, but he managed to do it. Then he began to feel the pulse of the star, which was like a sad girl complaining about her sorrows, and he didn't understand anything. Then he wanted to try to pair with another star, but it refused. He kept trying and failing until he reached 100. Then he told himself that he was greedy, because he managed to reach a star on his first try, and he was trying to pair with another star. He told himself that this is enough and he should go back. He said that the day will come when he will know what is beyond the thousand worlds. Then he says, "I wonder what's happening in the central region." And here we reach the end of the first arc of our story. What will Cheng do in his final round after seeing the mighty power of Bi? That's what you'll find out when you follow us in the new arc. Stay tuned soon. Goodbye.

Get Our Mobile App

حكاية لوه شينغ من عبد الى اقوى مقاتل اسطوري في عالم الأرض والسماء 👊🔥 ملخص مانهوا كامل 1️⃣

Transcription